Mn00144e - NMS5LX OPERATOR MANUAL PDF

NMS5UX
Release 6.4
Network Management System 5 UniX
User manual
Volume 1/1
MN.00144.E 001
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.

Property of Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the international
regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, without written permission from Siae Microelettronica S.p.A.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen displayed is
purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
Hewlett Packard, HP, HP OpenView Windows, Vectra and HPUX are Hewlett Packard Company registered
trademarks.
UNIX is a Unix Systems Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
OSF Motif is a Open Software Foundation registered trademark.
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
Contents
Contents
Section 1
General description
1.
NMS5UX SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE NMS5UX SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.1
Modular structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2
Integration of the NMS5UX graphical interface into the
HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform . . . . . .
1.2.3
Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.4
Hardware and software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.5
Maximum number of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.6
Maximum number of NMS5UX users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
SIAE EQUIPMENT MANAGED BY THE NMS5UX SYSTEM

(Legacy and SNMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.1
Equipment managed with the Legacy protocol . . . . . . . .
1.3.2
Equipment managed with the SNMP protocol . . . . . . . . .
1.3.2.1 Telecommunication equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.2.2 Network equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.3
Equipment manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
7
7
7
8
8
1.4
FUNCTIONS OF THE NMS5UX SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
1.5
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
NMS5UX GRAPHICAL INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
2.1
14
14
14
1.3
2.
WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1
Map windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1.1 Container map windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NMS5UX Release 6.4 MN.00144.E 001
Contents
2.1.1.2 Siae World map window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.1.3 WS and CSB map window . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
17
17
ELEMENTS OF THE MAP WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.1
Title bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2
Pushbutton bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.3
Status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.4
New Object Holding Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.5
Menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.6
ViewArea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.6.1 Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.6.2 Objects of the NMS5UX system . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.6.3 Work with the objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.6.4 Graphical displaying of the object: symbol . . . .
2.2.6.5 Symbol elements: icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.6.6 Symbol elements: name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.6.7 Symbol elements: asterisk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.6.8 Symbol characteristics: flashing . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.6.9 Symbol characteristics: behaviour . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.6.10 Symbol characteristics: colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.6.11 Symbol characteristics: function of the R.H.
side pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.6.12 Background of the View area . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
19
20
21
22
22
23
24
24
26
26
26
26
27
28
29
29
NMS5UX USERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
3.1
RELATION BETWEEN UNIX USER AND NMS5UX USER . . . . . .
34
3.2
PREDEFINED NMS5UX USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
3.3
CHARACTERISTICS OF A NMS5UX USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3.1
Username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2.1 Password expiring time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3
Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3.1 nms5ux map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4
Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4.1 Superuser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4.2 Privileged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4.3 Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4.4 Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4.5 Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.5
User (account) expiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
36
36
37
37
38
39
39
39
40
40
41
41
3.4
ACCESS TO THE MAP (READ WRITE OR READ ONLY) . . . . . .

3.4.1
Updating of the Read Only map windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
42
2.1.2
2.2
3.
II
29
30
Contents
3.4.2
3.4.3
Passage from the Read Only mode to the ReadWrite

mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access mode to the Equipment window . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Section 2
Operative procedures
4.
5.
6.
43
43
45
STARTUP OF THE GRAPHICAL INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
4.1
HP CDE GRAPHICAL INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
4.2
HP OPENVIEW WINDOWS NNM GRAPHICAL INTERFACE . . .
49
4.3
STARTINGUP OF THE NMS5UX GRAPHICAL INTERFACE . . .

4.3.1
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
53
4.4
AT THE FIRST STARTINGUP OF THE NMS5UX

GRAPHICAL INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
GRAPHICAL DISPLAYING OF THE EQUIPMENT NETWORK . .
57
5.1
AVAILABLE OBJECTS FOR THE NETWORK DISPLAYING . . . .

5.1.1
Network Element objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2
Container objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.3
WS, CSB, WS Port, CSB Port objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.4
Radio Link objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
58
58
58
59
5.2
MODES FOR THE OBJECT CREATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60
5.3
EXAMPLES OF NETWORK GRAPHICAL DISPLAYING . . . . . . . .

5.3.1
Network composed by equipment managed with SNMP
protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.2
Network composed by equipment managed with the
Legacy protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.3
Network composed by equipment managed with Legacy
protocol and equipment managed with SNMP protocol .
5.3.4
Network subdivided into more maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
72
77
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
6.1
82
OPENING OF THE SERIAL PORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
67
III
Contents
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
7.
Opening modes of the serial ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Closing modes of the serial ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection statuses of the WS, CSB, WS Port and CSB
Port objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
84
6.2
CONNECTION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
6.3
COMMANDS FOR THE CONNECTION MANAGEMENT . . . . . . .

6.3.1
Line Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.2
Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.3
Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.4
Alarm Realignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.5
Configuration Upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.6
Legacy Reset & Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
90
90
90
90
91
91
92
6.4
CONNECTION STATUSES OF THE EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.4.1
Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.2
Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.3
Unreachable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.4
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
93
94
96
97
6.5
LOM/LCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.1
Connection types between LOM/LCT and equipment
(Monitoring, Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.2
Indication to the NMS5UX user of the LOM/LCT
presence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.3
Enabling/disabling of the LCTequipment connection
in Configuration mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
100
ALARM AND PERFORMANCE MONITORING MANAGEMENT .
101
7.1
102
102
104
104
7.2
IV
ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1
Alarm acquiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2
Alarm displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2.1 Dynamic displaying of the alarms . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2.2 Displaying of the current alarms and of the alarm
history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3
Alarm correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4
Alarm saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5
Seriousness level of the alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5.1 Change of the seriousness level . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5.2 Change of the seriousness level for the User
Input Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.6
Alarm enabling/disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.7
Ringing alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERFORMANCE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
98
99
105
105
106
107
107
108
109
110
111
Contents
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
Activation (and deactivation) of the PM measurements .

Acquiring of the PM measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying of the PM measurement results . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving of the PM measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Section 3
Menu and commands
8.
9.
111
112
113
114
115
MAP SIAE MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
119
8.1
IMPORT/EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.1
To save on a file the objects of a map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.2
To save on file the objects of a container . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.3
To import into a map the objects memorised on a file . . .
8.1.4
To import into a container the objects memorised on a file
120
120
120
121
122
8.2
CHANGE MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
9.1
ADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.1
Add Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.2
Add Network Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.2.1 Add Network Element SNMP Managed . . .
9.1.2.2 Add Network Element SNMP Managed
(Virtual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.2.3 Add Network Element Legacy Protocol
Managed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.2.4 Add Network Element Legacy Protocol
Managed (Virtual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.3
Add Radio Link for Scoreboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.4
Add LegacyWorkstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.5
Add Communication Server Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
127
128
129
MODIFY/VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.1
Modify/View Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.2
Modify/View Network Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.3
Modify/View Radio Link for Scoreboards . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.4
Modify/View LegacyWorkstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.5
Modify/View Communication Server Board . . . . . . . . . .
139
139
140
141
141
141
9.2
132
133
135
136
136
138
Contents
9.3
DELETE
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4
9.3.5
.................................................
Delete Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Network Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Radio Link for Scoreboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete LegacyWorkstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Communication Server Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
143
143
144
144
144
9.4
ARRANGE SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4.1
Arrange Symbols Horizontal Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4.2
Arrange Symbols Vertical Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
146
146
146
9.5
MAP REALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
9.5.1
To create, into the open map, the copy of a NE, WS or CBS
object present into another map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
9.5.2
Map Realignment Window Menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
9.5.2.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
9.5.2.2 Map Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
9.5.2.3 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
9.6
GENERATE INFO FOR WEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
10. PERFORMANCE SIAE PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
10.1 PERFORMANCE MONITORING READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
10.2 PERFORMANCE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

153
10.2.1 Results of the PM measurements subdivided into daily
records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
153
10.2.1.1 Graphic Performance Monitoring Window Menu
bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
157
10.2.2 Results of the PM measurements subdivided into primary
records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
158
VI
10.3 OLD PERFORMANCE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.3.1 Results of the PM measurements, present into the
Old Performance Monitoring table, subdivided into daily
records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.2 Results of the PM measurements, present into the
Old Performance Monitoring table, subdivided into
primary records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
159
160
10.4 EXPORT PERFORMANCE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.4.1 To save on file the results of the PM measurements . . .
161
161
10.5 VIEW/MODIFY PM STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.5.1 View/Modify PM Status Window Menu bar . . . . . . . . .
10.5.1.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5.1.2 Action Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
163
166
166
166
11. CONFIGURATION SIAE OBJECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167
159
Contents
11.1 EQUIPMENT INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.1.1
Equipment Info/Find window Parameters . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.2
Equipment Info/Find window Pushbuttons . . . . . . . .
169
169
171
11.2 RADIO CERTIFICATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
173
11.3 LEGACY HW/SW EDITION INVENTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.3.1
Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window Object list . . . . . . . .
11.3.2
Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window Menu bar . . . . . . . .
11.3.2.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.2.2 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.2.3 Menu Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.3
Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window Status bar . . . . . . .
174
174
175
175
175
177
177
11.4 LEGACY PHYSICAL UNIT INVENTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.4.1
Physical Unit Inventory window List of the objects . .
11.4.2
Physical Unit Inventory window Menu bar . . . . . . . . .
11.4.2.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.2.2 Action Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.2.3 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.2.4 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.3
Physical Unit Inventory window Status bar . . . . . . . . .
178
178
179
179
179
179
180
180
11.5 SNMP SOFTWARE INVENTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.5.1
SNMP NE Software Inventory window NE Software
Inventory pushbutton activated Equipment list . . . . .
11.5.2
SNMP NE Software Inventory window Unit Software
Inventory pushbutton activated Unit list . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5.3
SNMP NE Software Inventory window Menu bar . . .
11.5.3.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5.3.2 Actions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5.3.3 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5.3.4 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5.4
SNMP NE Software Inventory window Status bar . . .
181
182
183
183
183
185
187
187
11.6 LEGACY ALARM AVERAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
188
12. FAULT SIAE LOGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
189
12.1 NETWORK ALARM HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.1.1 Alarm History Browser window List of the signals . . .
12.1.2 Alarm History Browser window Menu bar . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.2.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.2.2 Action Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.2.3 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.2.4 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.3 Alarm History Browser window Status bar . . . . . . . . .
191
192
193
193
193
195
199
199
182
VII
Contents
12.1.4
12.1.5
Refreshing of the information into the Alarm History

Browser window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording of the signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2 NETWORK CURRENT ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.2.1 Current Alarms Browser window List of signals . . . . .
12.2.2 Current Alarms Browser window Menu bar . . . . . . . .
12.2.2.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.2.2 Action Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.2.3 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.2.4 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.3 Current Alarms Browser window Status bar . . . . . . . .
12.2.4 Refreshing of the information into the Current Alarms
Browser window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
201
201
201
202
202
202
203
203
12.3 OLD ALARM HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.3.1 Old History Browser window List of the signals . . . . .
12.3.2 Old History Browser window Menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.2.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.2.2 Action Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.2.3 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.2.4 Action Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.2.5 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.3 Old History Browser window Status bar . . . . . . . . . . .
205
205
206
206
206
206
207
207
207
12.4 NE ALARM HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
208
12.5 NE CURRENT ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
209
12.6 SNMP NE HISTORY LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.6.1 Creation of a NE Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.2 Creation of more NE Logs at the same time . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.3 Displaying of the content of one or more NE Logs . . . . .
12.6.4 Deleting of an equipment NE Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.5 Deleting of all the NE Logs on an equipment . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.6 Deleting of the signals memorised into the controller of
an equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
210
212
212
212
213
213
12.7 ALARM SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.7.1 Filters Settings window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
215
219
12.8 NMS5UX STATISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.8.1 To display the signalings of all the network equipment
subdivided by time interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.8.2 To display the signalings of all the equipment of the
network subdivided by equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.8.3 To display the signalings of all the network equipment
subdivided by typology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.8.4 To filter the displaying of the signalings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
222
12.9 TRANSACTION LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.9.1 Transaction Browser window List of the operations .
VIII
200
200
204
214
224
224
225
225
227
228
Contents
12.9.2
Transaction Browser window Menu bar . . . . . . . . . . .

12.9.2.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.9.2.2 Action Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.9.2.3 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.9.2.4 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transaction Browser window Status bar . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording of the operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
228
228
229
229
231
231
231
12.10 NMS5UX INSPECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
234
13. OPTIONS SIAE OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
235
13.1 LEGACY NETWORK ALARM HYSTERESIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
238
13.2 SNMP NETWORK SEVERITY CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.2.1 Siae Events Manager window Menu bar . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.1.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.1.2 Action Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.1.3 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
239
241
241
241
241
13.3 SNMP EQUIPMENT SEVERITY CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.3.1 Equipment Severity Code window List of the alarms
13.3.2 Equipment Severity Code window Menu bar . . . . . . .
13.3.2.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.2.2 Action Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.2.3 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.3 Equipment Severity Code window Status bar . . . . . .
242
243
244
244
244
245
246
13.4 NMS5UX SYSTEM USERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.4.1 Command use executed by the user with Superuser
profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.1.1 User Management window List of the users
13.4.1.2 User Management window Menu bar . . . . .
13.4.2 Command use executed by the user with Entry,
Normal, Advanced or Privileged profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.2.1 User Management window Menu bar . . . . .
247
12.9.3
12.9.4
13.5 NMS5UX LOGGED USERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.5.1 Nms5ux: Logged Users window active View Logged
Users pushbutton User list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.5.2 Nms5ux: Logged Users window active View
Running Application pushbutton Application program
list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.5.3 Nms5ux: Logged Users window Menu bar . . . . . . . . .
13.5.3.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.5.3.2 Action Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.5.3.3 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.5.3.4 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
247
247
248
250
251
252
253
254
254
254
254
257
258
IX
Contents
13.6 SNMP LCT EQUIPMENT USERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.6.1 LCT User Manager window List of the users . . . . . . .
13.6.2 LCT User Manager window Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . .
259
259
260
13.7 SNMP LCT LOGGED USERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.7.1 Logged Users window Users list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.7.2 Logged Users window Menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.7.2.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.7.2.2 Action Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
262
262
263
263
263
13.8 SNMP NE REMOTE ELEMENT TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.8.1 Adding a station to the remote equipment list . . . . . . . .
13.8.2 Renaming a station of the remote equipment list . . . . .
13.8.3 Deleting a station from the remote equipment list . . . . .
13.8.4 Adding an equipment to the remote equipment list . . . .
13.8.5 Adding more equipment at the same time to the
remote equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.8.6 Modifying the characteristics of an equipment of the
remote equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.8.7 Deleting an equipment from the remote equipment list
13.8.8 Moving an equipment within the remote equipment list
13.8.9 Saving to a file the remote equipment list . . . . . . . . . . .
13.8.10 Restore from file the remote equipment list . . . . . . . . . .
265
267
267
268
268
271
273
273
274
274
13.9 SNMP NE SW/FW DOWNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.9.1 Updating of the equipment sw/fw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
275
276
13.10 SNMP SCHEDULED SW DWL STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.10.1 Scheduling download window List of the NEs . . . . . .
13.10.2 Scheduling download window Menu bar . . . . . . . . . . .
13.10.2.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.10.2.2 Sort Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
279
279
280
280
281
13.11 SNMP NE SW/FW RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.11.1 RelSw window Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.11.1.1 Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.11.1.2 Switch bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
282
284
284
284
13.12 LEGACY NE SW/FW DOWNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.12.1 Refresh of the equipment sw/fw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
285
286
13.13 LEGACY SCHEDULED SW DWL STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.13.1 Scheduled Download Viewer window NE list . . . . . . .
13.13.2 Scheduled Download Viewer window Menu bar . . . .
13.13.2.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.13.2.2 Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.13.2.3 Actions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
288
288
289
289
290
290
13.14 HW INVENTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.14.1 To display/filter the hardware inventory data of the NEs
present in the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
291
270
292
Contents
13.14.2 To export the hardware inventory data immediately . . . .

13.14.3 To export the hardware inventory data in scheduled
modality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
293
14. LOCATE SIAE ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
295
14.1 EQUIPMENT LIST/LOCATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.1.1 Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window Equipment
list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.2 Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window Menu bar .
14.1.2.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.2.2 Actions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.2.3 Commands Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.2.4 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.2.5 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.3 Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window Status bar
296
297
299
299
299
302
304
308
308
14.2 PROXY EQUIPMENT LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.2.1 Equipment Managed by Proxy window Equipment list
14.2.2 Equipment Managed by Proxy window Menu bar . . .
14.2.2.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2.2.2 Actions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2.2.3 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2.3 Equipment Managed by Proxy window Status bar . .
309
309
310
310
310
310
310
14.3 EQUIPMENT FIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
311
15. MISC SIAE TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
313
15.1 ALARM HISTORY BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.1.1 Backup procedure of the signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
315
315
15.2 ALARM HISTORY RESTORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.2.1 Restore from disk procedure of the signals . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2.2 Restore procedure from tape of the signals . . . . . . . . . . .
316
316
316
15.3 ALARM HISTORY DELETE BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.3.1 Deleting procedure of the backup files of the signals . . .
317
317
15.4 PM BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.4.1 Backup procedure of the PM measurements . . . . . . . . . .
318
318
15.5 PM RESTORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.5.1 Restore procedure from disk of the PM measurements .
15.5.2 Restore procedure from tape of the PM measurements
320
320
321
294
XI
Contents
XII
15.6 PM DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.6.1 Deleting procedure of the backup files of the PM
measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
322
322
15.7 PDHSDH RADIO SCOREBOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
323
15.8 PDHSDH RADIO LINK BROWSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.8.1 Radio Link Browser window List of the Radio Links .
15.8.2 Radio Link Browser window Menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.8.2.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.8.2.2 Actions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.8.2.3 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.8.2.4 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.8.3 Radio Link Browser window Status bar . . . . . . . . . . . .
324
324
325
325
325
325
326
326
15.9 MAP MANAGER STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
327
15.10 SNMP COMMAND EXECUTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
329
15.11 DATABASE BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.11.1 Backup procedure of the database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
331
331
15.12 DATABASE RESTORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.12.1 Restore procedure of the database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
332
332
16. SIAE COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
333
16.1 LINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.1.1 Line Test Network Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.1.2 Line Test Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
335
335
336
16.2 CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.2.1 Connect Network Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.2.2 Connect Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
337
337
338
16.3 DISCONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.3.1 Disconnect Network Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.3.2 Disconnect Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
339
339
340
16.4 SNMP FORCED NE DISCONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
341
16.5 LEGACY RESET & CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.5.1 LegacyReset & Connect Network Element . . . . . . . . .
16.5.2 LegacyReset & Connect Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
342
342
343
16.6 ALARM REALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.6.1 Alarm Realignment Network Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.6.2 Alarm Realignment Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
344
344
345
16.7 CONFIGURATION UPLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.7.1 Configuration Upload Network Element . . . . . . . . . . . . .
346
346
Contents
16.7.2
Configuration Upload Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
347
16.8 SNMP CONFIGURATION DOWNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.8.1 Configuration Download window Menu bar . . . . . . . . .
16.8.1.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.8.1.2 Command Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.8.1.3 Action Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
348
350
350
350
351
16.9 COMMUNICATION SERVER BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.9.1 Communication Server Board Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.9.2 Communication Server Board Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . .
352
352
353
16.10 LEGACY WORKSTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.10.1 LegacyWorkstation Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.10.2 LegacyWorkstation Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
354
354
355
16.11 LEGACY COMMUNICATION SERVER PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.11.1 LegacyCommunication Server Port Open . . . . . . . . . .
16.11.2 LegacyCommunication Server Port View . . . . . . . . . .
16.11.3 LegacyCommunication Server Port Close . . . . . . . . . .
357
357
358
359
16.12 LEGACY WORKSTATION PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.12.1 LegacyWorkstation Port Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.12.2 LegacyWorkstation Port View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.12.3 LegacyWorkstation Port Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
360
360
361
362
16.13 SNMP EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
363
16.14 PMP CLEAR ALARM TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
364
17. NMS6UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
365
18. HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
367
18.1 NMS5UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
368
18.2 ABOUT NMS5UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.2.1 NMS5UX Version Window Program list . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.2 NMS5UX Version Window Menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.2.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.2.2 Option Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.2.3 Command Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
369
369
369
370
370
370
Section 4
Appendix
19. RESUMING TABLE OF THE SIAE COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
371
373
XIII
Contents
XIV
20. AVAILABILITY OF THE SIAE COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
379
21. MENUS AND COMMANDS (SIAE AND HP OPENVIEW) . . . . . . .
385
22. SW TROUBLE REPORT (RQ961) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
401
22.1 TROUBLE REPORT FILLING INSTRUCTIONS (RQ961) . . . . . . .
401
Section
General description
1.
NMS5UX SYSTEM
The NMS5UX Network Management System 5 Unix (synonym of CEM Central Element
Manager) system has been developed by Siae Microelettronica and it is a supervisory system
able to control and to manage telecommunication equipment.
The user can dialogue with the supervisory system by means of a graphical interface called
NMS5UX graphical interface.
The NMS5UX system has been developed to be used with the UNIX operating system and it
uses all the functions present into such a system.
The NMS5UX graphical interface has been developed and integrated into HP OpenView
Windows Network Node Manager graphical platform (refer to paragraph 1.2.2) and it uses all
the graphical and functional characteristics present into such a platform.
1.1
RELEASE
The information present into this manual refers to the supervisory system and to the NMS5UX
graphical interface release 6.4.
The release of the currently used NMS5UX graphical interface can be checked into the opening
window of the interface itself (NMS5UX Login) or selecting the command About NMS5UX from
the Help menu, present into the map windows of the system (Siae World, etc.).
1.
NMS5UX SYSTEM
1.2
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE NMS5UX SYSTEM
1.2.1
Modular structure
The NMS5UX supervisory system is an highly versatile one because it is a system with a
modular structure.
It is composed by a group of main application programs to which, according to the Siae
equipment type to be managed, it is added an additional application program (called <equipment
type> Manager).
The group of the main application programs manages the NMS5UX graphical interface at
general level (map windows: Siae World, Container, WS, etc.) by means of such an interface,
the user can graphically display the network on the video, activate (and deactivate) the
connection with the equipment, check the functional status (current alarms and alarm history),
the results of the Performance Monitoring measurements, etc. At this level, the equipment is
considered as a whole unit.
The additional application program has the aim to provide, for the NMS5UX graphical interface,
the specific commands and functions with respect to the equipment type to be managed.
Each additional application program manages a specific equipment graphical interface
(Equipment main window refer to paragraph 2.1.2) through which the user can check the
equipment functional status and act directly on its management checking or changing the
configuration parameters and checking the quality parameters of the signal.
The NMS5UX supervisory system can be equipped with one or more Manager application
programs according to the equipment types present into its own network.
The access to the graphical interface at general level is executed with the startingup of the
NMS5UX graphical interface.
The access to the graphical interface at equipment level is executed opening the Equipment
window relevant to the equipment itself.
The access to the graphical interface at equipment level is controlled by the access to the
graphical interface at general level.
1.2.2
Integration of the NMS5UX graphical interface into the HP

OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform
The NMS5UX graphical interface release 6.4 is integrated into the HP OpenView Windows
Network Node Manager graphical platform.
This means that the NMS5UX interface is not provided with its own menus, but the commands,
necessary for the management of the Siae equipment 1, have been integrated into the menus
of the HP Open View Windows NNM graphical platform.
1.
NMS5UX SYSTEM
In such a way, it is possible to manage, into the same map (refer to paragraph 1.2.3), as Siae
equipment (Legacy and SNMP) as IP devices (peripheral units of other manufacturers that use
the IP/SNMP protocol).
Then, the Siae equipment managed with the SNMP protocol (refer to paragraph 1.3), are
detected by the Network Node Manager standard application programs. In fact for such
equipment, standard application programs are used valid as for the Siae equipment as for the
IP devices.
1.2.3
Maps
The NMS5UX supervisory system allows coupling a map to each single NMS5UX user. More
user can be associated to the same map.
The whole equipment network or a portion of it can correspond to a map. In this second case,
the user which the map is associated to, will receive only notifications coming from the
equipment contained in his portion of network.
To manage an equipment it is necessary to create a graphic symbol that represents it. The same
symbol can be created in more maps (creation of more copies of the symbol). In this way, the
equipment data are not duplicated in the database, but all the copies access to the same
information.
Then, it is possible to save objects of a map into a file and export/import object of a map to
another one.
1.2.4
Hardware and software requirements
The details of the hardware requirements (workstation/server type, etc.) and of the software
ones (version of the operating system, of the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical interface,
etc.) necessary for the NMS5UX supervisory system, are reported into the manual NMS5UX
Administrator Manual
1.2.5
Maximum number of equipment
The maximum number of equipment that can be managed at the same time by the NMS5UX
system depends on the code word requested by the user.
1.
Such commands are identified by the wording SIAE before the name of the command itself.
1.
NMS5UX SYSTEM
1.2.6
Maximum number of NMS5UX users
The maximum number of NMS5UX users that can open the NMS5UX graphical interface (using
the same map or different ones) depends on the code word requested by the user.
1.
1.3
NMS5UX SYSTEM
SIAE EQUIPMENT MANAGED BY THE NMS5UX SYSTEM

(Legacy and SNMP)
The NMS5UX system release 6.4 is able to manage at the same time Siae equipment that use
as equipmentsupervisory system communication protocol the following one:
D
a proprietary protocol 2.
Into the manual, such equipment are called equipment managed by the Legacy
protocol.
the SNMP standard protocol (Simple Network Management Protocol).

Into the manual, such equipment are called equipment managed with the SNMP
protocol.
1.3.1
Equipment managed with the Legacy protocol
The equipment managed with the Legacy protocol, manufactured by Siae Microelettronica, that
can be controlled by the NMS5UX system are the following ones:
D
G series Radio with Legacy interface.
B series Radio (Standard).
FAM (Flexible Access Multiplexer).
OLTME (Optical Line Termination Multiplexer Equipment).
CFAM (Compact Flexible Access Multiplexer). Compact version of FAM equipment.
1.3.2
Equipment managed with the SNMP protocol
The equipment managed with the SNMP protocol, manufactured by Siae Microelettronica, that
can be controlled by the NMS5UX system are the following ones:
1.3.2.1 Telecommunication equipment
2.
EL series Radio EasyLink (PDH)
AL series Radio Access Link (PDH)
ELFO radio EasyLink Full Outdoor (PDH)
This protocol complies with the international standards concerning the object modelling (object
displaying mode), the dialogue primitives conceptually based upon the CMIP and HDLC line
protocol (High Level Data Link Control).
1.
NMS5UX SYSTEM
US series Radio Urban Synchronous link (SDH)
ALS series Radio Access Link Synchronous (SDH)
SDH N+1 Radio (SDH)
ADMC Multiplexer Add Drop MultiplexerCompact (SDH)
ADM1 Multiplexer Add Drop Multiplexer1 (SDH)
EXP 63 Multiplexer Expansion 63 (SDH)
PMP system
Point to MultiPoint
1.3.2.2 Network equipment

D
CommServerS
IPBox
1.3.3
Equipment manuals
Subject user manual has the aim to describe the use and the operations that the user can
execute with the NMS5UX graphical interface at general level (refer to paragraph 1.2.1).
The use of the NMS5UX graphical interface at equipment level (Equipment window refer to
paragraph 2.1.2) changes according to the relevant equipment type. It is described into the
relevant user manuals. With details:
D
G series Radio terminal with Legacy interface Radio Manager (G series) user manual
B series radio (Standard) Radio Manager (SPU3) user manual
FAM FAM Manager user manual
OLTME OLTME Manager user manual
CFAM CFAM Manager user manual
EL series radio Radio PDH Manager user manual
AL series radio AL Manager user manual
ELFO radio ELFO Manager user manual
3.
By means of a single PMP object, one PMP sector is controlled and managed (together with the
master station, the peripheral station and the optional equipment).
4.
Support equipment for the physical connection between NMS5UX and the Siae equipment
(managed by Legacy protocol). CommServerS is equipped with serial ports (maximum 7).
5.
Support equipment for the physical connection between NMS5UX and the Siae equipment
(managed by SNMP protocol). IPBox is equipped with RS232 interface (serial), Ethernet Lan
and E1; depending on the required firmware, it can operate as IP or IPOSI router.
1.
US series radio US Manager user manual
ALS series radio ALS Manager user manual
SDH N+1 (SDH) Radio SDH N+1 Manager user manual
ADMC ADMC Manager user manual
ADM1 ADM1 Manager user manual
EXP 63 EXP 63 Manager user manual
PMP System PMP Manager user manual
CommServerS CommServerS Manager user manual
IPBox IPBox Manager user manual
NMS5UX SYSTEM
Warning. All the functions at disposal of the system administrator (user with superuser profile)
are described into the NMS5UX Administrator Manual manual.
1.
NMS5UX SYSTEM
1.4
FUNCTIONS OF THE NMS5UX SYSTEM
The NMS5UX system release 6.4 provides the following functions:

D
Monitoring of the equipment connected to the system; dynamic displaying of the

detection of an alarm and recording into the alarm history (resident on the machine
disk).
The displaying stored into the alarm history are related among them: the date/time
of detection and clearing of the alarm are indicated in the same record.
The alarm history can be saved and recovered later.
Management of the alarm log stored in the controller of the equipment: storing of the
log on the machine, deletion of the log from the controller.
Management and change of the seriousness level coupled to each equipment alarm.
Graphic (SiaeWorld window) or table (Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window)

representation of the network.
The representation of the network is executed by the user by means of a series of
predefined objects.
It is possible to add, delete, move or change the configuration parameters of the
objects anytime.
The network can be represented in a single map, or subdivided in more maps.
The objects of a map can be saved to file and, then, imported in a different map.
Management of the measures of Performance Monitoring (PM) of all the equipment

connected to the system:
activation/deactivation of the PM measures also contemporary for more

equipment of the same type.
check of the result of the measures in graphic format.
store on disk/tape the results. Then, the data can be restored, displayed and
saved (subdivided by month) on a file.
The saving operation can be executed for a single measurements of a single
equipment or for a measurement of all the equipment of the same type present
into the map.
10
Management of the equipment software/firmware: immediate or scheduled updating

of the sw/fw of the equipment connected to the system, check of the sw/fw versions.
Management of the equipment configuration: saving of the configuration of a real or

virtual equipment to file. Then, it will be possible to transfer the configuration to any real
or virtual equipment present in the network.
Management of the virtual equipment.
Command Executor: program that executes predefined sequences of SNMP
1.
NMS5UX SYSTEM
commands 6.
D
List of the application programs (browser, manager, etc. ), relevant to the NMS5UX
system, on progress at the choice of the command.
Possibility to require for or to force the closing of an aplication program on progress
(browser, manager, etc. ) of the NMS5UX system.
Access to the system with 5 different user profiles which determine the available
commands and the functions.
List of the NMS5UX users connected with the supervisory system.

Possibility to require for or to force the disconnection procedure (logout) of an user.
Possibility to forward messages to a single user or to all the users connected with the
supervisory system.
6.
Management of the LCT user list stored for each single equipment.
The predefined sequences of SNMP commands are provided at customers request by Siae
Microelettronica.
11
1.
1.5
NMS5UX SYSTEM
SERVICE
The service provided by Siae microelettronica will comply with the requirements specified into
the Software Maintenance Contract, if it has been defined.
To be able to use such a service, it is necessary to fill in entirely the Form for the signalling
of a SW failure (present in the last section of the subject manual) and to forward it to the
following address:
SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A.
via Michelangelo Buonarroti, 21
20093 Cologno Monzese Milano
www.siaemic.it
Fax
+ (39) 02 25391585
email siaemi@siaemic.it
12
2.
NMS5UX GRAPHICAL INTERFACE
The NMS5UX graphical interface, developed by Siae microelettronica, is integrated into the HP
OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform.
Then, it respects the conventions, relevant to the positions of the menus, the style and using
modes of the windows, the use of the keyboard and of the mouse, etc. typical of the HP
OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform.
Warning. This chapter describes only the elements of the graphical interface specific of the
NMS5UX supervisory system (use of the map windows for the network displaying, type of the
objects present into the map windows, their characteristics, etc.).
For the use of the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical interface, refer to the relevant
documentation.
13
2.
2.1
WINDOWS
The HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical interface uses a window mechanism that allows
easily passing from a general view to an always more detailed one.
This characteristic is used also by the NMS5UX graphical interface that using the window
mechanism (called map windows) allows passing from a general view of the map (network or
subnetwork) to a view continuously more detailed until to reach the view of the single
equipment (refer to paragraph 2.1.1).
The windows are used also to display the data (for instance the configuration and alarm
parameters of the equipment), to ask for the information necessary to complete an operation
(dialogue windows) or to inform the user on the result of a command (system windows and
confirmation windows).
The use of such windows, into the NMS5UX graphical interface, is the same one of the HP
OpenView Windows NNM graphical interface. For their description, refer to the specific
documentation.
Then, the windows are used to access to the NMS5UX graphical interface at equipment level
(Equipment windows refer to paragraphs 2.1.2 and 1.2.1).
2.1.1
Map windows
The map windows are the most important ones because they are used to display the map (refer
to paragraph 3.3.3) and they contain the commands, grouped in menus, that allow the user
working with the NMS5UX graphical interface at general level (refer to paragraph 1.2.1).
Here below, there is the description of the map windows for the NMS5UX system.
2.1.1.1 Container map windows

The Container map windows allow subdividing the network in hierarchical levels in such a way
that it is possible to pass from a general view until to reach the displaying of the single elements,
passing through some intermediate levels.
In fact the network is composed by some objects that the supervisory system has to manage
and to control and it can be considered under some different points of view.
14
2.
The network can be observed as a whole unit, as a distribution of elements into a geographic
area (for instance subnetworks) or it is possible to decide to involve a single object to display
its configuration; the user can decide which level and than with which details has to be used to
access to the network information.
The user has the maximum freedom for the creation of the number and of the type of the levels
that better comply with its own network.
Fig. 2.1 shows an example of network hierarchical structure.
Each level is coupled with one or more container windows according to the number of the
symbols present into the map with upper hierarchical level as pointed out into the figure.
2.1.1.2 Siae World map window

The Siae World map window is opened selecting the Siae World symbol 7 present into the Root
window (main window of the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical interface).
The opening of the window corresponds to the starting up of the NMS5UX graphical interface
and it constitutes the Container window with higher hierarchical level (refer to paragraph
2.1.1.1).
Each map is provided with its own Siae World window.
Only into such a window and into all the ones that will be opened by means of the selection of
the symbols present into it (Container windows with lower hierarchical level) there are the
specific commands of the NMS5UX graphical interface.
It is not possible to remove the Siae World object present into the Root map window.
Warning. The closing operation of such a window can also be not corresponding with the one
of the NMS5UX graphical interface.
In fact, it is closed when it is closed the last map window of the supervisory system (Siae World
window or Container window with lower hierarchical level) or when it is closed the HP OpenView
Windows NNM graphical interface.
7.
Also the Siae World object, by default, forwards the status information of the objects present inside
it (asterisk, flashing and colour of the icon refer to paragraph 2.2.6.7, 2.2.6.8 and 2.2.6.10).
Naturally, the status information are important only if the NMS5UX graphical interface has been
startedup.
15
2.
Higher hierarchical level.

On the video, it is possible
to display only one Siae
World window for each
single map
Clicking twice on a Container symbol (for instance Nord Italia), it is

opened the map window with lower hierarchical level (that will be
called for instance A level).
On the video, the system can display as many windows with A level
as are the Container object present into the Siae World map window.
Container
objects
Container
objects
Clicking twice on a
Container symbol (for
instance Milano), the
system opens the map
window with lower
hierarchical level (that will be
called for instance B level).
On the video, the system
can display as many
windows with B level as are
the Container objects
present into the Nord Italia
map window
Warning. It is possible to
create all the desired levels.
Then, for each level, it is
possible to create objects that
represent the equipment (NE
objects)
Fig. 2.1
16
2.
2.1.1.3 WS and CSB map window

The WS map window (refer to Fig. 2.2) is opened after the selection of a WS symbol (refer to
paragraph 5.1.3).
Inside such a window, there are the WS Port objects. These objects are automatically created
when the system creates the relevant WS object (refer to paragraph 9.1.4).
The number of the WS Port objects present into the WS window has to be defined at the creation
of the WS object.
The CSB map window (refer to Fig. 2.2) is opened after the selection of a CSB symbol (refer
to paragraph 5.1.3) coupled with a card of the CommServerF equipment 8.
Inside such a window, there are the CSB Port objects. These objects are automatically created
when the system creates the relevant CSB object (refer to paragraph 9.1.5).
Each CSB window contains 7 CSB Port objects numbered from 2 up to 8.
Warning. It is not possible to create any object into the WS and CSB map windows.
2.1.2
Equipment window
The choice of a Network Element object allows accessing to the graphical interface at equipment
level (refer to paragraph 1.2.1), such a level is represented by the Equipment window 9.
At this level, the user can enter into the equipment to check and to change the configuration
parameters, to execute the maintenance and testing operations (refer to Fig. 2.2).
Every type of Siae equipment, that can be actually managed by the NMS5UX system, is
characterized by its own Equipment window 10.
The detailed description of each single Equipment window and of the objects inside it is reported
into the relevant equipment manual (refer to paragraph 1.3.3).
The Equipment window of a specific equipment can be opened by more users at the same time.
The first user who opens the window will be able as to check the parameters as to set or to
change them (ReadWrite access). The other users will be able only to check the parameters
(Read Only access), (refer to paragraph 3.4.3).
Warning. In the equipment window with Read Only access, the alarms will not be dynamically
updated, it is necessary to require the updating selecting a proper command.
8.
The selection of a CSB object, coupled with a CommServerS equipment, opens the Equipment
window of the equipment.
9.
To open the Equipment window, quickly select twice the graphical symbol that represents the
equipment into the map window.
10.
The management of each single Equipment window is executed by a specific application program
called <equipment type> Manager. Such application programs are present into the NMS5UX
system and are provided at customers request.
17
2.
Warning. The Equipment window can be opened only if the equipment is actually connected or
if it has been connected at least one time.
These considerations can not be applied for the objects that represent virtual equipment. For
the virtual NEs, it is always possible to open the equipment window.
NMS5UX graphical interface
GENERAL level
EQUIPMENT level
Siae World
map window
Container
Network Element
WS
CSB (1)
CSB (2)
Container
map window
Equipment
window
[WS]
map window
CSB
map window
(1) CSB object that represents the CommServerS equipment.

(2) CSB object that represents a Board of the CommServerF equipment.
Fig. 2.2
18
2.
2.2
ELEMENTS OF THE MAP WINDOW
Fig. 2.3 shows the Siae World map window 11.

The elements pointed out into the figure and described into the following paragraphs
characterize all the map windows of the NMS5UX graphical interface.
TITLE bar
MENU bar
PUSHBUTTON bar
Object
(Symbol)
Asterisk
Icon
Name
STATUS bar
New Object Holding area
View area
Fig. 2.3
2.2.1
Title bar
It is an horizontal bar where the system points out the name of the map window.
The system automatically assigns, to the window, the object name (Container, WS or CSB) that
opens such a window (refer to paragraph 2.2.6.6).
11.
The first time that it is opened the Siae World window of a new map, the View area is empty (if
the system has not been configured by Siae microelettronica).
In such a case, before connecting the equipment, it is necessary to display graphically the
equipment network into its own map (refer to paragraph 5.3).
19
2.
2.2.2
Pushbutton bar
The subject bar contains the pushbuttons displayed into Fig. 2.4.
(1)
(2)
(11)
(12)
(3)
(4)
(13)
(5)
(14)
(6)
(7)
(15)
(16)
(8)
(17)
(9)
(18)
(10)
(19)
Fig. 2.4
Notes of Fig. 2.4
(1) The subject pushbutton closes the activated map window.
(2) The subject pushbutton opens and brings at front the map window defined as Home. Its selection
has the same consequences of the selection of the Window Home command.
(3) The subject pushbutton opens and brings at front the Root map window. Its selection has the same
effects of the selection of the Window Root command.
(4) The subject pushbutton brings at front the father window. Its selection has the same effects of the
selection of the Window Parent command.
(5) The subject pushbutton opens the Quick Navigator window. Its selection has the same effects of the
selection of the Window Quick Navigator command.
(6) The subject pushbutton opens the Panner window. Its selection has the same effects of the selection
of the View Pan and Zoom command.
(7) This command shows/hide the names of the connections. Its selection has the same effects of the
selection of the View Show Connection Labels On For This Submap/Off For This Submap
command.
(8) The subject pushbutton opens the Add Container Symbol window. Such a window allows creating
a new container. Its selection has the same effects of the selection of the Edit SIAE Objects Add
Container command.
(9) The subject pushbutton opens the Add Equipment window. Such a window allows creating a new
equipment. Its selection has the same effects of the selection of the Edit SIAE Objects Add
Network Element SNMP Managed command.
(10) The subject pushbutton opens the Graphical Performance Monitoring window. Such a window
allows checking the results of the PM measurements relevant to the selected equipment. Its selection
has the same effects of the selection of the Performance SIAE Performance Performance
Monitoring command.
20
2.
Warning. The subject pushbutton is available only if it has been selected an equipment.
(11) The subject pushbutton opens the Alarm History Browser window. Such a window allows checking
the alarm history. Its selection has the same effects of the selection of the Fault SIAE Logs
Network Alarm History command.
(12) The subject pushbutton opens the Current Alarms Browser window. Such a window allows checking
the alarms currently activated into the equipment. Its selection has the same effects of the selection
of the Fault SIAE Logs Network Current Alarms command.
(13) The subject pushbutton opens the Software Download window. Such a window allows executing the
updating of the software/firmware relevant to the selected equipment. Its selection has the same
effects of the selection of the Options SIAE Options SNMPNE Sw/Fw Download command.
(14) The subject pushbutton opens the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window. Such a window allows
checking the list of all the equipment known by the NMS5UX system. Its selection has the same
effects of the selection of the Locate SIAE Elements Equipment List/Locate command.
(15) The subject pushbutton opens the LINE TEST Command window. Such a window allows executing
the line test for the selected equipment. Its selection has the same effects of the selection of the SIAE
Commands Line Test Network Element command.
(16) The subject pushbutton opens the CONNECT Command window. Such a window allows connecting
the selected equipment. Its selection has the same effects of the selection of the SIAE Commands
Connect Network Element command.
(17) The subject pushbutton opens the DISCONNECT Command window. Such a window allows
disconnecting the selected equipment. Its selection has the same effects of the selection of the SIAE
Commands Disconnect Network Element command.
(18) The subject pushbutton opens the ALARM REALIGNMENT Command window. Such a window
allows executing the realignment of the alarms for the selected equipment. Its selection has the same
effects of the selection of the SIAE Commands Alarm Realignment Network Element
command.
(19) The subject pushbutton opens the About HP OpenView window. Its selection has the same effects
of the selection of the Help About HP OpenView command.
2.2.3
Status bar
Into this bar, the system points out the name of the actually open map and the access type to
the map itself (ReadWrite or Read Only refer to paragraph 3.4).
The other wordings that can be displayed into the status bar are typical of the HP OpenView
Windows NNM graphical interface. For their detailed description, refer to the relevant
documentation.
21
2.
2.2.4
New Object Holding Area
Into this area, the system parks the new objects, after their creation, waiting for their positioning
into the View area, done by the user.
2.2.5
Menu bar
It is an horizontal bar that contains the typical menus of the HP OpenView Windows NNM
graphical platform. Into such menus, there are the commands of the NMS5UX graphical
interface (refer to paragraph 1.2.2).
Each option, if it has been selected, opens a popup menu that lists a series of commands.
Some commands immediately execute the coupled operation, some other ones open some
additional popup menus (the commands followed by the symbol ").
When the system displays a command with grey colour instead of with the white one, it means
that such a command is not available.
The deactivation of a command can depend on the access type to the map (refer to paragraph
3.4) or on its own user profile (refer to paragraph 3.3.4). It does not provide the command use
or to make the command available, it is necessary to execute before another operation as, for
instance, to select a symbol.
The command of the NMS5UX graphical interface are preceded by the prefix SIAE before the
command name itself.
Warning. These commands are present only into the Siae World map window 12 and into the
system map windows that are opened by the selection of the objects (Container, WS or CSB)
present into such a window (map windows of the NMS5UX system).
The commands specific of the NMS5UX graphical interface are present into the following
menus:
12.
22
Map SIAE Map. This menu contains the command to export/import the elements of
a map to/from another one and to save on a file all the symbols (container, NE, etc.)
present into a map and the command to change the map.
Edit SIAE Objects. This menu contains the commands necessary to create, to
delete or to change the objects of the NMS5UX system (refer to paragraph 5.1).
Performance SIAE Performance. This menu contains the commands necessary

to display the results of the Performance Monitoring measurements relevant to the
equipment managed by the supervisory system.
With the exception of the Map SIAE Map menu that is available also into the Root map.
2.
Configuration SIAE Objects. This menu contains the commands necessary to

display the characteristics of a specific equipment.
Fault SIAE Logs. This menu contains the commands necessary to display the
current alarms and the alarm history relevant to the equipment present into the map.
Then, it is present the command to display the history of the operations executed by
the NMS5UX users.
Options SIAE Options. This menu contains the commands necessary to change
the alarm seriousness (network alarms and local ones), to execute the updating of the
equipment software/firmware, to manage the NMS5UX users and the maps (creation,
deleting, change).
Locate SIAE Elements. This menu contains the commands to display the list of all
the equipment, workstation and communication servers managed by the system and
to search an equipment into the open map.
Misc SIAE Tools. This menu contains the commands to save/restore/delete, from
tape to disk, the alarm history, the results of the Performance Monitoring
measurements and the database of the supervisory system.
Siae Commands. This menu contains the commands to manage the connection
between the equipment and the supervisory system and to execute the download of
the equipment configuration (virtual or real) to another equipment (virtual or real).
Help. This menu contains the commands to open the online manuals of the
supervisory system (NMS5UX) and to check the list of the software programs that
constitute the NMS5UX software package (About NMS5UX).
Warning. The detailed description of the commands present into the above listed menus is
reported into chapter 3 of the subject manual.
For the use and the description of the menus and of the commands typical of the HP OpenView
Windows NNM graphical platform refer to the specific documentation.
The NMS6UX menu is an optional menu. It is present in the map windows (also in the Root
window), ONLY if the NMS6UX module software is installed 13.
2.2.6
ViewArea
The View area is the part of the map window where the system displays the objects created
by the user.
13.
Software module realized by Siae Microelettronica for the contemporary management of more
NMS5UX systems.
The module integrates into a NMS5UX system (NMS6UX menu) from which the other NMS5UX
systems are managed.
23
2.
2.2.6.1 Objects
An object is the representation done by the supervisory system of a network element.
Two or more objects that represent parts of the network that execute the same function either
are similar one each other or are grouped into object classes.
Each object class is characterized by an assembly of parameters (or attributes) that define the
characteristics of the objects that belong to such a class. All the objects of the same class are
defined by the same assembly of parameters, each one with its own value.
Ther NMS5UX user has to consider each part of the network as an object that belongs to an
object class. Such a class is characterized by one or more attributes and a value is assigned
to each one of such attributes.
For instance, the network as a whole is an object, the container (subnetwork, station,
substation) where there are the equipment is an object, each single equipment is an object.
An object can be:
created
deleted
modified
moved. To move an object, it is sufficient to select it and, keeping pressed the left
pushbutton of the mouse, bring it to the new position.
It is possible to put the object in a new position inside the area (container) or it is
possible to move the objects from a container to the other (to select an object and
drag it into a container).
Warning. This second operation cannot be executed if the asterisk symbol is
present next to the equipment (see paragraph 2.2.6.7).
All the created objects and the relevant values of the parameters are stored into the database
of the NMS5LX system. They will be stored until the user deletes the object.
2.2.6.2 Objects of the NMS5UX system

The NMS5UX system provides a series of classes that group the objects that will allow to the
user to draw his own network and to provide to the system all the information necessary for the
supervisory and the monitoring of each single equipment.
The objects managed by the NMS5UX system and that can be displayed into this area are
shown by Fig. 2.5 with the exception of the Radio Link 14 object that is represented by the symbol
of a line (continuous line, broken line, etc.).
24
2.
CONTAINER
objects
NETWORK
ELEMENT
objects
WORKSTATION
object
COMMUNICATION
SERVER BOARD
object
WS PORT and
CSB PORT
objects
Fig. 2.5
Usually, an object can be present into every map window with some exceptions.
Tab. 2.1 points out all the objects managed by the NMS5UX system. For each object, it is
pointed out the type of the map window where such an object can be inserted.
Tab. 2.1
Object
Container Siae World
Window where the object can be inserted

Root window (window that represents the highest level into the HP
OpenView Windows NNM graphical interface).
Container
Network Element
Radio Link 14
Every map window with the exception off the [WS]

S and <IP address
CSB> map windows refer to Tab. 2.2.
Workstation
Communication Server Board
WS Port
[WS] map windows.
CSB Port
<IP address CSB> map window.
14.
Warning. The command for the creation of the Radio Link object is an optional one.
25
2.
2.2.6.3 Work with the objects

To execute an operation, it is often necessary to select the involved object (or objects).
the selected object is characterized by a dark grey square.
Such a square will keep the dark grey colour until when the user will select another symbol.
It is possible to select two or more symbols at the same time pressing the L.H. pushbutton of
the mouse and drawing an area that contains the involved symbols.
On the contrary, to move an object, it is sufficient to select it and, keeping pressed the central
pushbutton of the mouse, to take it on the new position.
2.2.6.4 Graphical displaying of the object: symbol

When the system creates an object, its graphical representation into the map is the symbol.
Usually, each object is coupled with a symbol only.
Warning. If the same object is created into another map, the system does not create really a new
object, but it creates only a new symbol of the object itself. In fact at the creation of the second
copy (symbol) of the object, the system does not insert again the values of the parameters into
the database of the supervisory system.
Then, more symbols present in different maps can correspond to the same object.
Each symbol is graphically represented by an icon and a name and conceptually by the following
elements: icon, name, asterisk, flashing, behaviour and colour.
Here below there are the general information concerning the use and the graphical
characteristics of the symbols.
2.2.6.5 Symbol elements: icon

The icon is the true graphical displaying of the symbol (refer to Fig. 2.5).
All the objects of the NMS5UX system are provided with their own icon.
2.2.6.6 Symbol elements: name

The name (or label) is the character string displayed at the base of the icon (refer to Fig. 2.5).
All the objects of the NMS5UX system are provided with a name.
26
2.
For the Container, Network Element, Radio Link and Workstation objects, it is possible to define
the name during the creation phases of the object (for some symbols also during the change
phase).
On the contrary, for the Communication Server Board, WS Port and CSB Port objects, it is not
possible to couple a generic name, but the system displays on the video the relevant IP address
(CSB) and the port number (WS Port and CSB Port).
For the Container, WS and CSB objects (that open a map window), the name of the object will
correspond also to the title of the relevant window.
Foe instance, if the user assign to a Container symbol the name Italy, at the double selection
of such an object, the system will open the map window with the title Italy.
The icon name is displayed inside a rectangle. Usually, the colour of the text string is black on
white background.
Such colours can be reversed, that is white wording on black background; this means that the
symbol has been pointed out after the choice of the HighLight Equipment On Map command
(refer to paragraph 12.1.2.3).
To remove the pointedout status, select the Clear HighLights command (refer to paragraph
12.1.2.3).
2.2.6.7 Symbol elements: asterisk

The asterisk (refer to Fig. 2.5) is an element that characterizes only the Container and NE
objects.
For the NE objects, the presence of the asterisk has the following meanings:
D
at least one alarm (current alarm and/or into the alarm history) relevant to the
equipment has not been marked (acknowledged).
To mark an alarm, refer to the paragraphs 12.1.2.2 e 12.2.2.2.
from the last time that has been opened the Equipment window of the equipment, the
LCT program has been connected to the NE at least one time in Configuration mode.
To remove (mark) this condition, open the Equipment window for the equipment under
examination.
the last Configuration Upload operation toward the equipment under examination has
not been successfully ended.
This condition is automatically removed (marked) at the first Configuration Upload
operation correctly executed.
Warning. The asterisk on the side of the icon points out that it is present at least ONE of the
above listed conditions. It is possible to check the status of each single condition into the
27
2.
Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window (refer to paragraph 14.1.1) and into the Equipment
Info/Find:... window (refer to paragraph 11.1.1).
By default, the asterisk points out the status of the above listed conditions.
It is possible to change the list of the conditions, coupling the presence (or the absence)
of the asterisk to two or to one only of the above mentioned conditions.
The change can be executed only by the user with the superuser profile. More detailed
information are reported into the documentation NMS5UX Administrator Manual.
For the NE objects, the absence of the asterisk points out that:
D
all the alarms (active or historic ones) of the equipment have been marked.
from the last time that it has been opened the Equipment window of the equipment,
the LCT has not been connected in Configuration mode.
the last Configuration Upload operation towards the equipment has been successfully
executed.
For the Container objects 15:

D
the presence of the asterisk points out that, into the relevant map window, there is at
least a NE object (or Container) with the asterisk.
the absence of the asterisk points out that, into the relevant map window, there is not
any NE object (or Container) with the asterisk.
2.2.6.8 Symbol characteristics: flashing

As an alternative to the asterisk, it is possible to couple to the symbol an intermittent flashing
to describe the same condition (refer to paragraph 2.2.6.7).
By default as a characteristic of the object, the system sets the asterisk. Then, it can be replaced
by the intermittent flashing.
The change can be executed only by the user with superuser profile. More detailed information
are reported into the documentation NMS5UX Administrator Manual.
Warning. As for the asterisk, the flashing characterizes only the Container 15 and the NE objects.
15.
28
It is comprised the Siae World object (refer to paragraph 2.1.1.2).
2.
2.2.6.9 Symbol characteristics: behaviour

The behaviour represents the action that is executed by the graphical interface when the user
clicks twice on the symbol.
Tab. 2.2 lists all the objects managed by the NMS5UX system. For each object, it is pointed out
the relevant behaviour.
Tab. 2.2
Object
Behaviour
Container Siae World
It opens the Siae World map window that represents the highest
level of the map.
Container
It opens a map window
Network Element
Radio Link
14
It opens the Equipment window (refer to paragraph 2.1.2).

It does not execute any action
Workstation
It opens the [WS] map window
If the icons refers to the equipment:

S CommServerF, it is opened the <IP address CSB> map
window.
S CommServerS, it is opened the Equipment window of the
equipment (refer to paragraph 2.1.2).
WS Port
CSB Port
2.2.6.10 Symbol characteristics: colour

The colour of the icon identifies the connection or alarm status of a symbol or of the symbols
present into it.
Tab. 2.3 lists all the objects managed by NMS5UX system. For each object, the system points
out the colours that can be used for the relevant icon and the description of the coupled statuses.
2.2.6.11 Symbol characteristics: function of the R.H. side pushbutton

If the operator selects a symbol and presses the R.H. side pushbutton of the mouse, the
system displays a contextual menu 16 that contains the HP OpenView commands (Open e
Delete).
If the operator selects a NE object, the system makes available the HP OpenView commands
16.
Into the menu heading, the system points out the name of the selected symbol.
29
2.
and also the following Siae ones 17:

D SIAE Delete. It deletes the selected object (Edit SIAE Objects Delete Network Element).
D SIAE Eq. Info. It opens the Equipment Info window (Configuration SIAE Objects Equipment
Info).
D SIAE NE Alarm History. It opens the Alarm History Browser window. Such a window contains
the history of the signals (alarm, event, status) relevant to the selected NE only (Fault SIAE Logs
NE Alarm History).
D SIAE NE Current Alarms. It opens the Current Alarms Browser window. Such a window contains
the signals (alarm, event, status) currently activated into the selected equipment (Fault SIAE
Logs NE Current Alarms).
2.2.6.12 Background of the View area

It is possible to couple to the View area a background in such a way that, at the opening of the
corresponding window, the system displays for instance a geographic map.
to execute such an operation, use the commands provided by the HP OpenView Windows NNM
graphical interface (refer to the relevant documentation).
17.
Between brackets, the system points out the command, present into the menus of the map
windows, that executes the same action.
30
2.
Tab. 2.3
Symbol
Container *
Network
Element **
Colour
Description
Blue
The relevant map window does not contain any Network Element
(NE), WS or CBS object in connected status
Green
The relevant map windows contains at least a NE, WS or CSB

object in connected status. No one NE has some alarms.
Light blue
The relevant map windows contains at least a NE object in

connected status where there is at least an activated alarm with
Warning seriousness level.
Yellow

Minor seriousness level.
Orange

Major seriousness level.
Red

Critical seriousness level or an NE in unreachable status.
Brown
The equipment is in disconnected status (refer to paragraph 6.4.1).
Green
The equipment is in connected status (refer to paragraph 6.4.2)

and it does not show some alarms.
Light blue
The equipment is in connected status and there is at least one

activated alarm with Warning seriousness level.
Yellow

activated alarm with Minor seriousness level.
Orange

activated alarm with Major seriousness level.
Red

activated alarm with Critical seriousness level.
Red
with X
The equipment is in unreachable status (refer to paragraph 6.4.3

).
Pink
The equipment is in maintenance status (refer to paragraph 6.4.4).

Warning. This condition is not extended to the icons of the
Containers that contain the NE (refer to paragraph 6.4).
White
The equipment is connected with the LOM or LCT program in

Configuration mode (refer to paragraph 6.5.1).
Containers that contain the NE (refer to paragraph 6.5.2).
Radio Link 14
Black
the colour is a fixed one and it does not point out any status
condition.
Workstation
Brown
The workstation is in disconnected status (refer to para. 6.1.3).
Green
The workstation is in connected status (refer to paraghaph 6.1.3).
Red
The workstation is in unreachable status (refer to para. 6.1.3).
31
2.
Tab. 2.3
Symbol
Communication
Server Board
(CommServer F)
(CommServerF)
Communication
Server Board **
Colour
Description
Brown
The CSB is in disconnected status (refer to paraghaph 6.1.3).
Green
The CSB is in connected status (refer to paraghaph 6.1.3).
Red with X
The CSB is in unreachable status (refer to paraghaph 6.1.3).
Brown
The CSB is in disconnected status (refer to paraghaph 6.1.3).
Green
The CSB is in connected status (refer to paraghaph 6.1.3) and it

does not show any alarm.
Light blue
The CSB is in connected status and there is at least one activated

alarm with Warning seriousness level.
Yellow

alarm with Minor seriousness level.
Orange

alarm with Major seriousness level.
Red

alarm with Critical seriousness level.
Red with X
The CSB is in unreachable status (refer to paraghaph 6.1.3).
Pink
The CSB is in maintenance status
(CommServerS)

Containers that contain the CSB.
White
The CommServerS is connected with the LOM or LCT program

in Configuration mode (refer to paragraph 6.5.1).
Containers that contain the CSB (refer to paragraph 6.5.2).
WS Port
CSB Port
Blue
The WS Port is in close status (refer to paragraph 6.1.3).
Green
The WS Port is in open status (refer to paragraph 6.1.3).
Blue
The CSB Port is in close status (refer to paragraph 6.1.3).
Green
The CSB Port is in open status (refer to paragraph 6.1.3).
By default, the colour of the icon points out always the colour of the object (present into
the icon itself) that has the most serious condition.
The status of the objects present into the icon is extended also to the Siae World object
**
By default, the colour of the icon points out always the colour of the most serious alarm
present into the equipment.
***
By default, the colour of the icon points out always the colour of the most serious alarm
present into the CommServerS.
32
3.
NMS5UX USERS
The NMS5UX graphical interface can be startedup at the same time on more XTerminals or
Workstations/Servers 18 connected one each other by means of an Ethernet connection 19.
In such a way, the displaying of the information relevant to the equipment network is executed
at the same time on all the terminals and the data insertion or the command forwarding executed
by an user can be done from all the terminals.
To open a copy of the NMS5UX graphical interface, it is necessary to have at disposal a
NMS5UX user.
The supervisory system is provided with a predefined NMS5UX user (refer to the following
page).
Then, it will be possible to create all the desired NMS5UX users.
18.
The word workstation/server usually identifies the machine on which it is installed the NMS5UX
system.
Warning. The execution of the application programs relevant to the NMS5UX system can be
remotized on different workstations or servers by means of a clientserver architecture.
More detailled information are reported into the Siae documentation NMS5UX Administrator
Manual.
19.
The NMS5UX system is based upon the UNIX operating system and it uses all the characteristics
provided by such an operating system. Among such characxteristics, there is the multiuser
function, that is the possibility to support the management of more users at the same time.
33
3.
3.1
NMS5UX USERS
RELATION BETWEEN UNIX USER AND NMS5UX USER
For each NMS5UX user to be created, it is necessary to create a UNIX user, because the users
of the NMS5UX system are a subassembly of the Unix users.
Then, between these two assemblies of users there is a specific connection: it is possible to
couple a single NMS5UX user to a Unix user.
Then, before creating the NMS5UX user, it is necessary to create the relevant UNIX one 20.
Warning. It is not necessary to create a UNIX user for the user with superuser profile (predefined
user provided with the supervisory system) because during the installation phases of the
NMS5UX system, it is created a UNIX user with username and password nms5ux to which
it is coupled a NMS5UX user with username and password nms5ux (refer to paragraph 4.4).
20.
34
The Unix users have to be defined by the System Administrator (root).
3.
3.2
NMS5UX USERS
PREDEFINED NMS5UX USER
During the installation of the supervisory system, it is created the NMS5UX user with the
following characteristics:
D
username nms5ux
password nms5ux
map nms5ux
profile superuser
password timeout Not expired
35
3.
NMS5UX USERS
3.3
CHARACTERISTICS OF A NMS5UX USER
Each NMS5UX user is characterized by a username, password, map and profile.

The username (refer to para. 3.3.1) and the password (refer to para. 3.3.2) allow to the system
to detect the user as a NMS5UX user authorized to startup the NMS5UX graphical interface.
These data are requested when a user wants to access to the Siae World map window
(startingup of the NMS5UX graphical interface) from the Root map window of the HP
OpenView Windows NNM graphical interface (refer to paragraph 4.3).
Warning. The same NMS5UX user can open more NMS5UX graphical interfaces (on different
XTerminals/Workstations or on the same one) using the same username and password.
Each user is coupled with a map. The supervision system, on the startup of the NMS5UX
graphical interface, opens a map on its choice or the map associated to the user that executed
the operation (refer to paragraph 3.3.3 and 3.4.).
On the contrary, the profile allows startingup the NMS5UX graphical interface when some
specific commands and functions are available (refer to paragraph 3.3.4).
3.3.1
Username
Each NMS5UX user is characterized by a name.

The name of the NMS5UX superuser is defined during the installation of the system. The name
of the other NMS5UX user is defined during the creation of the relevant user
After their creation, it is possible to change the name of every NMS5UX user 21.
3.3.2
Password
Each NMS5UX user is characterized by a password.

The password of the NMS5UX superuser user is defined during the installation of the system.
The password of the other NMS5UX users is defined during the creation of the relevant user.
The users with privileged, advanced, normal or entry profile (refer to paragraph 3.3.4) can
change their own password. If a user forgets his own password, superuser can define a new
one.
The user with superuser profile can change his own password and the ones of all the other
NMS5UX users. If the user with superuser profile forgets his own password, it is necessary to
contact Siae microelettronica (refer to paragraph 1.5).
21.
36
Warning. The operation is available only for the superuser (refer to para. 13.4.1.2).
3.
NMS5UX USERS
3.3.2.1 Password expiring time

The NMS5UX system manages the functionality of periodical password change, which
consists in requiring to the user to change his own password each N days (for example each
6 months).
The functionality can be activated/deactivated by the system administrator, who, if he actives
the functionality, sets the interval between a password change and the next one.
If the functionality is activated, 5 days before the expiry of the password, a message is displayed
at the opening of the NMS5UX interface, which allows the user changing its password. In detail,
the message:
D
Your Password is going to expire on <data>. Please change it, points out that ones
password is expiring.
This window is displayed 5 days before the expiry of the user password. It will be
displayed each time the user starts the graphic interface until the user changes the
password or this one expires.
Password expired. Please change it to login, points out that ones password is expired.
To open the NMS5UX interface, it is necessary to change the password
Warning. The activation of the periodical password change does not influence the expiry date
of the user, that can be set during the creation of a NMS5UX user.
The two functionalities are independent and can exist contemporarily.
3.3.3
Maps
The map corresponds to a network or to a part of a network graphically displayed and it is

managed by the supervisory system. It can be arranged by the user according to his needs.
Each map is provided with its own Siae World window (refer to paragraph 2.1.1.2).
The supervisory system can manage at the same time more maps.
The map, where he can operate, is associated to each NMS5UX user.
The access to a map takes place at the startup of the NMS5UX graphical interface. In detail,
for the entry, normal and advanced users, the map associated to the NMS5UX user who
required the start of the graphical interface is automatically opened. The privileged and
superuser users are required to point out the map to open (among the available one).
It is possible to couple a map to each NMS5UX user, at his creation. Such a map will constitute
the default one of the user.
The users with superuser or privileged profile can open their own default map or every map
managed by the supervisory system (refer to paragraph 3.3.4.1 and 3.3.4.2).
37
3.
NMS5UX USERS
The users with advanced, normal and entry profile can open their own default map only (refer
to paragraph 3.3.4.3, 3.3.4.4 and 3.3.4.5).
At the installation of the supervisory system, it is created the nms5ux map (refer to paragraph
3.3.3.1). Then, it will be possible to create a new map.
To change or to delete a map, it is necessary to use the controls of the HP OpenView Windows
NNM graphical interface (by default such commands are available only for the user with
superuser profile) 22.
It is possible to couple more NMS5UX users to the same map (more users will have the same
default map), such users can open and use the map at the same time 23.
In this case, only one user will be have the Read Write access to the map, all the other users
will have the Read Only access (refer to paragraph 3.4).
Warning. What just said rules for the users with superuser, privileged or advanced profile. The
normal and entry users has always Read Only access to the map, even if they are the first to
open it.
The same NE, WS or CSB object can be created on more maps. In this case, at the creation
of the first copy of the object into a map, the system will have to set all the parameters of the
object itself.
At the creation of the successive copies, it will be sufficient to fill in the object address (IP
address, physical or logic address) and the system, at the object detection, will automatically
set the parameters and couple, to the object itself, the connection status of the twin object
already present into a map.
3.3.3.1 nms5ux map

During the installation of the system, it is created the nms5ux map coupled with the user with
superuser profile called nms5ux 24.
This map will result the default map of the nms5ux user but, as all the other maps, it can be
opened also by privileged users and be assigned, as default map, to other users.
22.
The HP OpenView controls allow creating a new map.

However, for the creation of the maps into the NMS5UX system, it is NECESSARY to use the map
creation function provided by the supervisory system.
23.
The maximum number of NMS5UX users that can access at the same time to the same map
depends on the code word requested by the customer.
24.
Warning. The name of the user with superuser profile can be always changed by the user itself.
38
3.
3.3.4
NMS5UX USERS
Profile
The NMS5UX system can be startedup with different operating levels.

Each level (called also profile), corresponds to a group of enabling for the use of the controls,
the execution of the operations, etc.
The profile that characterizes each NMS5UX user is defined at the creation of the user itself.
After its creation, it is possible to change the profile of each NMS5UX user, with the exception
of the superuser one.
The NMS5UX system provides 5 operating levels (profiles): Superuser, Privileged, Advanced,
Normal, Entry.
The description of such profiles is reported into the following paragraphs.
Warning. The availability of the menus and of the controls specific of the NMS5UX system
depends on the profile of the NMS5UX user who has open the map.
Section 3 points out, for each described control, the profile that the NMS5UX user has to have
to be able to use such a control.
Section 4 points out the list of the Siae commandmenus and their availability according to the
profile of the NMS5UX user who has opened the map.
3.3.4.1 Superuser
The superuser can startup the NMS5UX graphical interface relevant to all the maps managed
by the supervisory system.
In each map, the superuser can access both in ReadWrite and Read Only modality and can
verify/set/modify all the parameters (the detail of the commands/operations available to the
superuser are reported in Tab. 20.1).
The detail of the operations that the superuser can execute in the equipment window is reported
in the specific equipment user manual.
The NMS5UX system manages ONLY one superuser. It is created during the installation of the
supervisory system.
Then, it will not be possible to delete the user or to change its profile, but it will possible to change
the username and the password.
3.3.4.2 Privileged
The privileged user can startup the NMS5UX graphical interface relevant to all the maps
managed by the supervisory system.
39
3.
NMS5UX USERS
In each map, the privileged user can access both in ReadWrite and Read Only modality and
can verify/set/modify all the parameters ad eccezione dei comandi di gestione degli utenti (the
detail of the commands/operations available to the privileged user are reported in Tab. 20.1).
The detail of the operations that the privileged user can execute in the equipment window is
reported in the specific equipment user manual.
At the installation of the supervisory system, it is not present any user with privileged profile.
Each NMS5UX user has to be created by the user with superuser profile.
Warning. At the creation of a NMS5UX user with privileged profile, it is possible to couple it with
an already existing map or to create a new one.
It is possible to create all the desired users with privileged profile.
3.3.4.3 Advanced
The advanced user can startup the NMS5UX graphical interface relevant relevant only to the
map coupled with the specific NMS5UX users (the NMS5UX userprofilemap coupling is
executed at the user creation).
In his own map, the advanced user can access both in ReadWrite and in Read Only modality
and can verify/set/modify all the parameters, except the commands for the users management.
The details concerning the commands and the operations available for the user with advanced
profile are reported into Tab. 20.1).
The detail of the operations that the advanced user can execute in the equipment window is
At the installation of the supervisory system, it is not present any user with advanced profile.
Each NMS5UX user has to be created by the user with superuser profile.
Warning. At the creation of a NMS5UX user with advanced profile, it is possible to couple it with
an already existing map or to create a new one.
It is possible to create all the desired users with advanced profile.
3.3.4.4 Normal
The normal user can startup the NMS5UX graphical interface relevant relevant only to the map
coupled with the specific NMS5UX users (the NMS5UX userprofilemap coupling is executed
at the user creation).
In his own map, the user can access only in Read Only modality and verify/modify quite all the
parameters. The details concerning the commands and the operations available for the user
with normal profile are reported into Tab. 20.1.
The detail of the operations that the normal user can execute in the equipment window is
40
3.
NMS5UX USERS
At the installation of the supervisory system, it is not present any user with normal profile. Each
NMS5UX user has to be created by the user with superuser profile.
It is possible to create all the desired users with normal profile.
3.3.4.5 Entry
The entry user can startup the NMS5UX graphical interface relevant relevant only to the map
coupled with the specific NMS5UX users (the NMS5UX userprofilemap coupling is executed
at the user creation).
In its own map, the entry user can access only in Read Only modality and verify all the
parameters. The details concerning the commands and the operations available for the user
with entry profile are reported into Tab. 20.1.
The detail of the operations that the entry user can execute in the equipment window is reported
in the specific equipment user manual.
At the installation of the supervisory system, it is not present any user with entry profile. Each
NMS5UX user has to be created by the user with superuser profile.
It is possible to create all the desired users with entry profile.
3.3.5
User (account) expiring
During the creation of a NMS5UX user, it is possible to assign to the relevant user (also defined
account) a validity of n days, where n can be configured (refer to paragraph 13.4.1.2).
After the end of such a time, at the starting up of the NMS5UX graphical interface, the system
displays the message Account expired.
Warning. The displaying of such a message prevents the opening of the Siae World
window.
In such a case, superuser can change the validity time of the NMS5UX user (refer to para.
13.4.1.2).
If the message is displayed when the NMS5UX graphical interface is startedup by the user with
superuser profile, it is necessary to contact Siae microelettronica (refer to paragraph 1.5).
41
3.
NMS5UX USERS
3.4
ACCESS TO THE MAP (READ WRITE OR READ ONLY)
As it has been described at the beginning of the subject chapter, the NMS5UX graphical
interface relevant to the same map can be startedup on more terminals (XTerminal and
Workstation) at the same time.
To prevent conflicts between the graphical interfaces startedup on different terminals that use
the same map, it is possible to access to the supervisory system by means of two different
modes:
D
ReadWrite. The user that accesses to the map by means of this mode can add,
remove, move the symbols present into the map windows and change the
characteristics of the symbols themselves.
Read Only. The user that accesses to the map by means of this mode can check the
status of the map windows and of the symbols present into such windows but he can
not create, delete or move any symbol or execute any change on the symbols
themselves.
The access in ReadWrite mode, for each map, is assigned to a single user at a time.
Such a user corresponds to the first NMS5UX user that opens the NMS5UX graphical interface
(and then the coupled map) on one of the terminals connected to the workstation/server on
which it is installed the supervisory system.
All the users that will be connected later to the same map will have the access in Read Only
mode.
The access mode is pointed out into the lower bar of the window on the side of the open map
name (refer to paragraph 2.2.3).
Warning. The map can be opened in ReadWrite modality only by a superuser, privileged
or advanced user. A normal or entry user, even if he is the first user that access to the
map, will open the map in Read Only modality.
the availability of the menus and of the specific controls relevant to the NMS5UX system
depends on the access mode to the map.
Section 3 points out, for each described control, the map access necessary to be able to use
the control itself.
Section 4 points out the list of the Siae commandmenus and their availability according to the
access type to the map.
3.4.1
Updating of the Read Only map windows
The Read Only map windows can not be directly changed by the NMS5UX system.
In fact, when the system changes the icon of a symbol or its name, or if the user, in ReadWrite
mode, adds, deletes, changes a symbol or moves it, the system does not dynamically update
the windows open on the video of the user in Read Only mode.
42
3.
NMS5UX USERS
To update the information of a map in Read Only mode, it is necessary to select the Refresh
command present into the Map menu.
For the description of the Refresh command and/or of the Map menu, refer to the
documentation of the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical interface.
3.4.2
Passage from the Read Only mode to the ReadWrite mode
If the user with ReadWrite access closes its own copy of the graphical interface, the
ReadWrite access becomes available for all the other users (Read Only) that have the
NMS5UX interface relevant to the same map activated.
The user that wants to change his mode from Read Only to ReadWrite, has to select the
Refresh command present into the Map menu.
The first user that executes the refresh of the maps changes his access mode from Read Only
to ReadWrite.
For the description of the Refresh command and/or of the Map menu, refer to the
documentation of the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical interface.
Warning. The availability of the ReadWrite access is not signalled to the Read Only users.
It is possible to require for (or to force 25) the disconnection of an user with ReadWrite access
(refer to paragraph 13.5). If the user approves the request, the system closes his map and the
ReadWrite access will be available.
3.4.3
Access mode to the Equipment window
The access mode obtained at the startingup of the NMS5UX interface, is valid into the
Container, Workstation, Communication Server Board map windows.
On the contrary, the ReadWrite access mode into the Equipment window (refer to
paragraph 2.1.2) is get by the first user (independently if his starting access mode has
been ReadWrite or Read Only) that takes on the equipment that is opens the Equipment
window (refer to Fig. 3.1).
The Equipment window of a specific equipment can be opened by more users at the same time.
All the users who open later the same Equipment window will have the access in Read Only
mode.
The Equipment window can be opened only if the equipment is connected or it has been
connected at least one time. This rule does not apply for the objects that represent virtual
equipment.
25.
Operation available for the superuser user only.
43
3.
NMS5UX USERS
Warning. The closing of the Equipment window is not signalled on the video.
It is not possible to request or to force the closure of the equipment window in Read Write
modality, but it is possible to require or force the closure of the relevant Manager application.
NMS5UX graphical interface

GENERAL level
EQUIPMENT level
Siae World
map window
Container
Network Element
WS
CSB (1)
CSB (2)
Container
map window
Equipment
window
[WS]
map window
CSB
map window
The FIRST superuser, privileged or advanced user who
starts the NMS5UX graphical interface at general level
gets the access in ReadWrite modality to the map
windows represented in this area.
The OTHER users will be able to access to such
windows in Read Only mode.
The normal and entry users has always access to the
map windows in Read Only modality..
The FIRST user that takes on

the equipment (open the
relevant Equipment window)
gets the access to the window
itself in ReadWrite mode.
The OTHER users will be able
to access to window in Read
Only mode.
(1) CSB object that represents the CommServerS equipment.

(2) CSB object that represents a Board of the CommServerF equipment.
Fig. 3.1
44
Section
Operative
procedures
45
46
4.
STARTUP OF THE GRAPHICAL

INTERFACE
This chapter contains the startingup procedures of the NMS5UX graphical interface.
The installation and startingup procedure of the NMS5UX supervisory system is reported into
the Siae manual NMS5UX Administrator Manual.
At the first startingup of the NMS5UX graphical interface, after the system installation, it is
necessary to execute the procedure described at the paragraph 4.4.
Warning. Execute the procedure pointed out at the paragraph 4.4, also at the first startingup
of the NMS5UX graphical interface after the version updating of the supervisory system.
The next times, execute the startingup procedure described at paragraph 4.3.
Warning. It is possible to startup more NMS5UX graphical interfaces on more XTerminals or

Workstations or on the same XTerminal or Workstation.
The maximum number of NMS5UX graphical interface that can be startedup at the same
time depends on the code word requested by the customer.
47
4.
4.1
STARTUP OF THE GRAPHICAL INTERFACE
HP CDE GRAPHICAL INTERFACE
The management of the HP workstations/servers is a complex one and needs for specific
behaviours concerning the Unix operating system.
For this reason, the HP workstations are equipped with the operating system and also with a
graphical interface called HP CDE (Common Desktop Environment) that allows using, in an
extremely easy way, all the functions available for the HPUX operating system 26.
Here below, there is the description of the startingup modes and the description of some
elements of the HP CDE graphical interface necessary for the startingup of the NMS5UX
graphical interface.
For the detailed description and the use of the HP CDE graphical interface, refer to the specific
documentation.
26.
The HP CDE grasphical interface is available starting from the release 10 of the HPUNIX
operating system. If the operator has at disposal the release 9 of the HPUNIX operating system,
the graphical interface will be HP VUE (Visual Environment).
48
4.
4.2
HP
OPENVIEW
INTERFACE
WINDOWS
NNM
GRAPHICAL
The NMS5UX graphical interface release 6.4 is an integral part of the HP OpenView Windows
Network Node Manager graphical platform 27.
Then, its opening depends on the opening of the graphical platform.
here below there are only the startingup modes and the description of some elements of the
HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform necessary for the execution of the startingup
procedure of the NMS5UX graphical interface.
For the description and the use of the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform, refer
to the specific documentation.
27.
For more detailled information concerning the integration of the NMS5UX interface into the HP
OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform, refer to paragraph 1.2.2.
49
4.
4.3
STARTINGUP
INTERFACE
OF
THE
NMS5UX
GRAPHICAL
To startup the NMS5UX graphical interface, execute the following procedure.

Warning. The operations described here below require that, on the workstation/server, it has
already been installed the NMS5UX supervisory system and that it has already been activated
the processes necessary for the starting up of the graphical interface.
Then, it is necessary that it has already been created the UNIX users 28 and the corresponding
NMS5UX ones 29, to be used for the startingup of the graphical interface.
1.
Startup the XTerminal 30 or the workstation.

The operating system, after having executed all the initializing inner procedures,
displays the login window that allows startingup the HP CDE interface (refer to
paragraph 4.1).
2.
Type into the text box your UNIX user user name.
3.
Press the OK pushbutton.

Warning. If the operator has at disposal two or more UNIX users, use the user name
(and the relevant password) of the UNIX user coupled with the NMS5UX user to be
used to open the map. This operation is necessary because each UNIX user is stiffly
coupled with a NMS5UX user. At the startingup of the NMS5UX graphical interface,
the system will check that the typed user name of the NMS5UX user is the one coupled
with the UNIX user that has startedup the HP CDE graphical interface. If the users
are not compatible one each other, it will not be possible to startup the NMS5UX
graphical interface 31.
4.
Type into the text box your UNIX user password.
5.
Press the OK pushbutton. If the inserted data are the correct ones, the system
displays the frontal panel of the HP CDE graphical interface.
6.
Click on the Terminal icon to open a terminal window.
7.
At the commandline prompt of the terminal window type:

cd /opt/nms5ux/start
./nmsWinMenu
8.
Press Enter.
28.
For the creation of a UNIX user, refer to the documentation provided with the operating system.
29.
For the creation of a NMS5UX user, refer to the paragraph 13.4.1.2 (the operation can be executed
only by the NMS5UX user with superuser profile).
30.
The supervisory system is installed on the workstation/server, then, before opening the NMS5UX
graphical interface on an XTerminal, it is necessary to startup the terminal itself and also the
workstation/server.
31.
The coupling UNIX userNMS5UX user is defined during the creation of the NMS5UX user (refer
to paragraph 13.4.1.2).
50
4.
The TMNMENU window, shown in Fig. 4.1 opens.

9.
Double click on the icon:

D
NMS5UX Application Login, to start the NMS5UX graphic interface.

If the user, used to start the interface, has profile:
Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is the first user to access the map
32, this one is opened in ReadWrite modality.
Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is not the first user to access to the
map 32, this one is opened in Read Only modality.
Normal or entry, the default map relevant to ones user is opened in Read Only
modality 33.
NMS5LX Application Login R/O, to start the NMS5UX graphic interface; the
default map, relevant to ones user, is opened in Read Only modality.
The NMSMENU window opens.

10. Warning. If the UNIX user used to access to the HP CDE interface, is coupled with a
NMS5UX user with profile:
D
superuser or privileged 34, the system displays at the common line the answer Do
you want to enter a map different from default one (y/n)? ==>. Type:
y and press enter, if the operator wants to startup the NMS5UX graphical
interface opening a different map from the default one coupled with its users.
The system displays at the common line the answer Enter map name ==>.
Type the name of the desired map and press enter.
The system startsup the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical interface.
The system displays on the video the Root map window (continue the
procedure from step 11.).
the operator has to press enter or type n and press enter, if he wants to
startup his own default map.
The system startsup the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical interface.
The system displays on the video the Root map window (continue the
procedure from step 11.).
advanced, normal or entry, the system startsup the HP OpenView Windows

NNM graphical interface.
The system displays on the video the Root map window (continue the procedure
from step 11.).
11. Wait some seconds for the system to end the initializing procedure of the HP OpenView
32.
For superuser and privileged users: any map among the available ones. In fact these users, during
the start of the graphic interface, it is possible to choose the map to open.
For advanced user: default map relevant to his user.
33.
Warning. Remember that the normal and entry users access to the relevant map always in Read
Only modality.
34.
This feature is present because only the NMS5UX users with superuser and privileged profiles
have the possibility to access to different maps. More information are reported at the para. 3.3.3.
51
4.
The system displays the NMS5UX Login window.

12. Type, into the Login text box, the user name of his own NMS5UX user.
Warning. If the operator has at disposal two or more NMS5UX users, type the user
name of the NMS5UX user coupled with the UNIX user used to startup the HP CDE
graphical interface.
13. Type, into the Password text box, the password of the NMS5UX user.
14. Press the OK pushbutton.
If a message is displayed , read the paragraph 4.3.1.
15. Into the Root window, click twice on the Siae World icon.
The system displays Siae World window and SIAE Map Manager Status window 35
(described at paragraph 15.9.).
Icons for the management of the
database and of the NMS5UX platform (1)
Icons for the start of the NMS5UX

graphic interface (2)
(1) The description and the use of these icons is reported in the NMS5UX administrator manual.
(2) The selection of the icon:
S NMS5UX Application Login, allows starting the NMS5UX graphic interface.
If the user used to start the interface has profile:
Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is the first user that access to the map 32, this
one is opened in ReadWrite modality.
Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is not the first user that access to the map 32,
this one is opened in Read Only modality..
Normal or entry, the default map relevant to ones user is opened in Read Only
modality 33.
S NMS5UX Application Login R/O, allows starting the NMS5UX graphic interface; the default
map relevant to ones user is opened in Read Only modality.
Fig. 4.1
35.
The window under examination can be closed through the File Close command. To open it
again, select the Misc SIAE Tools Map Manager Status command.
52
4.
4.3.1
Messages
The displaying of the message:

D
Incorrect Login, points out that the typed name of the NMS5UX user is incorrect.
Wrong Password, points out that the typed password of the NMS5UX user is incorrect.
Wrong Unix User, points out that the used NMS5UX user is not compatible with the
Unix user used for the startup of the operating system.
Account expired! ..., points out that the user is expired 36. Contact the superuser user
to set a new user or modify the validity period of the current one.
Warning. If, after more attempts, the Incorrect Login, Wrong Password or Wrong Unix User
message is displayed for three times consecutively, the Login window is automatically closed.
To start the graphic interface, it is necessary to execute again the procedure of the step 9.
The displaying of a window with the message:

D
Your Password is going to expire on <date>. Please change it. 37, points out that ones
password is expiring 38.
To change it:
Type, in the Old password box, the current password.
Type, in the New password box, the new password (alphanumeric string,
minimum 6 characters and maximum 21 characters).
Type again, in the Confirm New Password box, the new password.
Select the Ok pushbutton.

Warning. If the Cancel pushbutton is pressed, the password is not changed and
the map window opens.
On the next start of the NMS5UX graphic interface, the window for the change of
the password will be displayed again.
Password expired. Please change it to login

expired.
37,
points out that ones password is
To change it:
36.
During the creation of a NMS5LX user, it is possible to define a date when the user expires.
37.
This message is displayed only if the periodical password change functionality is active. It
consists in requiring to the user to change his own password each N days (for example each 6
months).
The functionality can be activated/deactivated by the superuser user, who, if he activates the
functionality, sets the interval between a password change and the successive one.
Warning. The activation of the periodical password change does not influence the expiry date
of the user, which can be set during the creation of a NMS5UX user. The two functionalities are
independent and can coexist at the same time.
38.
This window is displayed 5 days before the expiry of the user password. It will be displayed each
time the user starts the graphic interface until the user changes the password or this one expires.
53
4.
Type, in the Old password box, the current password.
Type, in the New password box, the new password (alphanumeric string,
minimum 6 characters and maximum 21 characters).
Type again, in the Confirm New Password box, the new password.

Warning. If the Cancel pushbutton is pressed, the password is not changed and
the map window opens.
To change the password and start the graphic interface, execute the procedure
of step 9. again.
54
4.
4.4
AT THE FIRST STARTINGUP OF THE NMS5UX

GRAPHICAL INTERFACE
To execute for the first time the startingup procedure of the NMS5UX graphical interface after
the system installation 39, it is necessary to respect the following procedure.
Warning. The operations described here below require that, on the workstation/server, it has
already been installed the NMS5UX supervisory system and that it has already been activated
the processes necessary for the startingup of the graphical interface 40.
1.
Startup the XTerminal 30 or the workstation.

The operating system, after having executed all the inner initializing procedures,
displays the login window that allows startingup the HP CDE interface (refer to
paragraph 4.1).
2.
Type the name of the Unix user: nms5ux.
3.
Press OK.
4.
Type the password of the Unix user: nms5ux.
5.
Press OK.
If the data have been correctly inserted, the system displays the front panel of the HP
CDE graphical interface.
6.
Click on the Terminal icon to open a terminal window.
7.
At the commandline prompt of the terminal window, type:

cd /opt/nms5ux/start
./nmsWinMenu
8.
Press Enter.
The TMNMENU window, shown in Fig. 4.1 opens.
9.
Double click on the NMS5UX Application Login icon.

The window NMSMENU opens.
At the common line, the system displays the answer Do you want to enter a map
different from default one (y/n)? ==>.
10. Press Enter or type n and press Enter.

The systems startsup the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical interface and it
displays on the video the Root window.
39.
Warning. Execute the subject procedure also at the first startingup of the NMS5UX graphical
interface after the version updating of the supervisory system.
40.
It is not necessary to create a UNIX user for the first startingup of the graphical interface because
during the installation phases of the NMS5UX system, it is created the UNIX user and the
NMS5UX user with the user name nms5ux.
55
4.
11. Wait some seconds for the system to end the initializing procedure of the HP OpenView
The system displays the NMS5UX Login window.
12. Into the Login text box, type the user name nms5ux.
13. Into the Password text box, type the password nms5ux.
If the system displays the message:
Incorrect Login, points out that the typed name is incorrect.
Wrong Password, points out that the typed password is incorrect.
Warning. If, after more attempts, the Incorrect Login or Wrong Password message is
displayed for three times consecutively, the Login window is automatically closed. To
start the interface, it is necessary to execute again the procedure of the step 9.
15. Into the Root window, click twice on the Siae World icon.
The system displays the Siae World window of the nms5ux map, that, if the system
has not been preconfigured by Siae microelettronica, will result empty 41.
Then, the system displays the SIAE Map Manager Status window
paragraph 15.9.
35
described at
Warning. The system assigns, to the nms5ux user used to startup the NMS5UX
graphical interface, the superuser profile. It is advisable, above all and as first operation,
to change the password coupled with such a user 42.
41.
The operations to display on the video the relevant equipment network are reported at para. 5.3.
42.
The procedure is reported at paragraph 13.4.1.2.
56
5.
GRAPHICAL DISPLAYING OF THE

EQUIPMENT NETWORK
After having installed the NMS5UX system, it is necessary to configure it.

To configure the system means to create the objects that represent the physical and logic parts
of the involved network (subnetworks, stations, equipment) and of the supervisory system
itself (workstation, communication server, etc.).
Create an object means to choose the object type between the ones provided by the system,
to define the values of the attributes that characterize it and to position the symbol that
represents such a system into the relevant map window.
The network configuration can be executed as by Siae microelettronica as by the customer.

When the network has already been configured by Siae, it is not necessary the reading of the
subject document because the network itself will be already displayed on the video.
Usually the NMS5UX system is forwarded to the customer without any information concerning
the network (empty databases). In this case, it is mandatory the reading of the following pages
because they explain the subdivision of the network into objects and the correct creation of such
objects.
To prevent confusion and mistakes in relation to every map, one user at a time can change the
network configuration into the specific map. Such a user is the one that can access to the system
in ReadWrite mode (ReadWrite user).
Warning. All the changes executed by the ReadWrite user, are NOT dynamically displayed also
on the map windows of the users who can access to the same map in Read Only mode.
To update the information of a map in Read Only mode, it is necessary to execute a map refresh
(refer to paragraph 3.4.1).
57
5.
GRAPHICAL DISPLAYING OF THE EQUIPMENT NETWORK
5.1
AVAILABLE OBJECTS FOR THE NETWORK DISPLAYING
The NMS5UX system provides a series of predefined objects.

Such objects are the base elements that the user will have to use to draw his own network inside
a map and to provide to the system all the information necessary for the supervisory operations
and the monitoring of each single equipment.
The available objects can be conceptually divided into the groups described here below.
5.1.1
Network Element objects
The Network Element (NE) objects need for the identification of the equipment itself.
This object class is really composed by different classes: one class for every Siae equipment
type that the NMS5UX system is able to manage.
5.1.2
Container objects
The Container objects need as containers for NEs, for other containers, for graphical symbols,
for WSs and for CSBs.
The system does not assign any particular meaning to these objects. Such ones have been
inserted to help the user during the network management and the equipment localization.
In fact, they allow having a better idea of the network because they allow grouping together the
network elements according to criteria that can be geographical or logic ones, for instance they
group equipment that all belong to the same department or are positioned into the same area.
5.1.3
WS, CSB, WS Port, CSB Port objects
The Workstation (WS), Communication Server Board (CSB), WS Port, CSB Port objects need
for defining the connection line that physically couples each single equipment, managed by
means of the Legacy protocol, to the supervisory system.
Usually, all these users has a coupled physical element.
58
5.
The Communication Server Board object represents the CommServerS equipment and the CS
Boards present into the CommServerF equipment.
The WS Port and CSB Port objects respectively represent the serial ports of the WS and the
serial ports of the CSB.
Warning. The WS, CSB, WS Port and CSB Port objects are necessary for the control of the
equipment managed with Legacy protocol (FAM, OLTME, Radio Standard and Radio G series).
5.1.4
Radio Link objects
The Radio Link objects need for representing the connections between NE objects of the same
type (for instance two SDH Radio objects and two PDH Radio ones).
Warning. The command for the creation of the Radio Link objects is an optional one.
59
5.
5.2
MODES FOR THE OBJECT CREATION
All the objects listed at paragraph 5.1 have to be created by the user by means of the controls
present into the SIAE Objects Add menu (refer to paragraph 9.1) 43.
It is possible to create all the network equipment into a single map or to subdivide them and
create them into different maps 44.
Then, an equipment object, created into a map, is visible and can be managed also into other
maps naturally if it has been created also into such ones. In fact, more copies of the same
equipment can exist of the relevant NE object present into different maps 45 (refer to paragraph
5.3.4).
It is possible to create new NE objects also if these last ones have not been physically installed
on the network for instance because they are foreseen for a future installation. In this case, it
will not be possible to set any communication because it does not exist a correspondence
between NE objects and physical equipment (then, it will not be possible to open the relevant
Equipment window refer to paragraph 2.1.2).
While it is possible to create virtual NE objects that is objects that have a corresponding
equipment present into the network, but for which it is possible to open the relevant Equipment
window 46 and that can be configured as a normal NE. then, such a configuration could be
transferred to every equipment (real or virtual one) that is compatible with the virtual NE (refer
to paragraph 16.8).
It is possible to save on file the objects created into a map and then, to import them into a different
map (refer to paragraph 9.1).
Warning. When it is created a NE, WS or CSB object, the system does not automatically get
the equipment coupled with such an object, but it is necessary to activate the connection
between the supervisory system and the element itself (refer to paragraph 6.1 and 6.2).
The network displaying is a dynamically one: this means that the user can add and move the
icons relevant to containers, NEs, etc. but he can also always remove them (refer to paragraph
9.3).
Then, for some objects after their creation, it is possible to change the values of the parameters
(refer to paragraph 9.2).
43.
With the exception of the WS Port and CSB Port objects that are automatically created when the
system creates the relevant WS and CSB objects (refer to paragraph 9.1).
44.
More detailled information concerning the maps are reported at the paragraph 3.4.
45.
The above said characteristic is valid also for the CSB and WS objects.
46.
To execute this operation for the real equipment, it is necessary to activate the connection between
the system and the equipment itself.
60
5.
5.3
EXAMPLES OF NETWORK GRAPHICAL DISPLAYING
Let us suppose to have to graphically display a certain Italia network in such a way to be able
to execute its supervisory operations by means of the NMS5UX system.
In the first example, the Italia network is composed only by equipment managed with SNMP
protocol (refer to paragraph 5.3.1).
In the second example, it is composed only by equipment managed with the Legacy protocol
While in the third example, such a network is composed by equipment managed with Legacy
protocol and equipment managed with SNMP one (refer to paragraph 5.3.3).
According to the equipment type present into his own network, the user has to refer to the
specific relevant example.
Warning. Into the example described here below, the entire equipment network will be
displayed into the same map and it is assumed that such a map has already been created
(during the creation of a NMS5UX user refer to paragraph 13.4.1.2).
It is possible to subdivide the equipment network into two or more parts and to couple to such
parts two or more maps. In this case at the opening of each map, it will be visible, and it will be
possible to manage it, only the part of the network coupled with the map under examination. An
example is pointed out at paragraph 5.3.4.
61
5.
5.3.1
Network composed by equipment managed with SNMP protocol
The Italia network, shown into Fig. 5.1, is composed by Radio SDH type, Radio PDH type and
PMP type equipment.
The NMS5UX system is loaded on a Workstation that it is connected to the equipment by means
of an Ethernet LAN.
The system has locally assigned the specific IP address by means of LOM/LCT to each
equipment.
Workstation
Lan
Equipment
type
SDH Radio
10.10.10.20
PDH Radio
10.10.10.30
SDH Radio
10.10.10.21
PDH Radio
10.10.10.31
SDH Radio
10.10.10.22
SDH Radio
10.10.10.32
PMP
10.10.10.40
Local
IP Address
of the
equipment
Fig. 5.1
Before creating the objects that will allow the system to manage the equipment, it is necessary
to subdivide the network into containers, objects, etc.
During such an operation, it is advisable to take into account the connection mode of the
equipment one each other and their positioning on the field.
Warning. Into the subject example, it is supposed that all the network equipment have been
created into the same map. If the operator wants to subdivide the equipment into more maps,
he has to respect the indication reported at the paragraph 5.3.4.
A possible subdivision of the network is shown in Fig. 5.2.
62
5.
Nord Italia
(container)
1
Milano
(container)
Sud Italia
(container)
Workstation
Torino
(container)
4
Lan
5
8
SDH Radio
10.10.10.20
PDH Radio
10.10.10.30
PDH Radio
10.10.10.31
Logic
address
of the
NE
10
SDH Radio
10.10.10.22
PMP
10.10.10.40
9
SDH Radio
10.10.10.21
11
SDH Radio
10.10.10.32
IP Address
of the NE
Fig. 5.2
In Fig. 5.2, it has been coupled with the containers the name that identifies a geographic area
or a town.
It is possible to assign every name to the Container objects, but it is advisable to set a name
that has a geographical reference.
In such a way, it will be possible to detect the position of the equipment already by means of the
name of the container symbol.
The system has assigned, to each NE object, an IP Address and a logic address different for
each created NE object.
ONLY if the equipment are inserted into an OSI network 47, it will be necessary to set also the
GOSIP address (Government OSI Profile) of the equipment.
The IP Address and the possible GOSIP Address, have to coincide with the IP Address and the
GOSIP Address locally set (by means of the LCT program) for the relevant equipment 48.
The logic address corresponds to the equipment name that is displayed under the relevant
icon. Also in this case, as for the Container objects, it is possible to assign every value. However,
it is advisable to assign a name that makes easier the equipment detection.
47.
The OSI network is a network that uses, as communication protocol between the network
elements, also the OSI (Open System Interconnection) protocol.
48.
If the values are not the same ones, after, it will not be possible to activate the connection with the
equipment.
63
5.
At the end, it is necessary to take into account that after having created the object (Container,
NE, etc.) into a well defined map window, it is not possible to move it into another map window.
Now, it is possible to execute the creation of the objects.
Warning. During the operation, it is necessary to follow a predefined order because it is not
possible to create an object, for instance a NE, if before it has not been created the Container
object that allows opening the map window that has to contain it.
The first symbols to be created are the objects inside the Siae World map window (Container
objects: Nord Italia and Sud Italia).
Then, open, for instance, the Nord Italia map window and create the objects present into it, and
so on.
In Fig. 5.2, all the object that have to be created by the user, in such a way that each equipment
of the Italia network can be managed by the NMS5UX system, are identified by a number (1,
2, etc.) placed on the R.H. upper square.
In Tab. 5.1, for each object present in Fig. 5.2 and identified by a number, there are some
information that allow understanding how and where it is necessary to create the symbols.
With details, it is pointed out the type of the object that has to be created, which values have
to be assigned to the parameters of the object 49 and into which map window it has to be inserted
the symbols.
Then, the order used for the object listing respects a possible creation order that ensures the
creation of the Container objects before the creation of the objects that have to be contained
into the relevant map window.
Warning. In every map window, it is possible to add Radio Link objects.
49.
Warning. The system does not points out all the parameters, but only the ones that have strictly
to be set for the object creation.
64
5.
Tab. 5.1
Object
Object type
to be created
Map window
where the object
has to be created
Setting of the values

relevant to the
main parameters
Container
Siae World
Label: Nord Italia
Container
Siae World
Label: Sud Italia
Container
Nord Italia
Label: Milano
Container
Nord Italia
Label: Torino
Network Element
SNMP Managed
Milano
IP Address: 10.10.10.30
Logical Address: PDH 30 *
Gosip Address: **
Type: Radio pdh
Network Element
SNMP Managed
Milano
IP Address: 10.10.10.31
Gosip Address: **
Type: Radio pdh
Network Element
SNMP Managed
Milano
IP Address: 10.10.10.32
Gosip Address: **
Type: Radio pdh
Network Element
SNMP Managed
Torino
IP Address: 10.10.10.20
Logical Address: SDH 20 *
Gosip Address: **
Type: Radio sdh
Network Element
SNMP Managed
Torino
IP Address: 10.10.10.21
Osi Address: **
Type: Radio sdh
10
Network Element
SNMP Managed
Torino
IP Address: 10.10.10.22
Gosip Address: **
Type: Radio sdh
11
Network Element
SNMP Managed
Sud Italia
IP Address: 10.10.10.40
Logical Address: PMP 40 *
Type: Pmp
It is possible to set a generic value, different from the pointed out one.
** Set the GOSIP Address of the equipment only if it is inserted into a OSI network (refer to paragraph 9.1.2.1).
The creation of every object causes the displaying on the video of the symbol into the relevant
map window.
By means of the Container symbols, it is possible to display the details of the network that
contains the equipment, for instance as shown in Fig. 5.3, for the PMP 40 equipment of the Italia
network.
65
5.
Clicking twice on the PMP 40

symbol, the system does not open
the relevant Equipment window.
This operation will be possible only
after the first equipment connection.
Fig. 5.3
Now the NMS5UX system knows all the information that will allow it to get each single equipment
at the time of its connection.
66
5.
5.3.2
Network composed by equipment managed with the Legacy

protocol
The Italia network shown in Fig. 5.4, is composed by FAM, OLTME and G series Radio type
equipment.
The NMS5UX system is loaded on a Workstation which, by means of Ethernet LAN, is
connected to a CommServerS.
The physical address has been locally assigned by means of LOM (Local Operator Manager),
to each equipment.
The relevant IP Addresses have been assigned to the Workstation and to the CommServerS
during their configuration.
IP Address
of the WS
Workstation
143.1.1.1
1
n
CommServerS
Lan
IP address
of the CS
143.1.1.2
2
8
Serial ports
Serial ports
RS232
RS232
Radio
10
RS232
Radio
11
FAM
6
Equipment
type
Oltme
21
Equipment
local address
RS485
FAM
8
RS485
FAM
7
EOC
Radio
12
Fig. 5.4
Before creating the objects that will allow to the system the equipment managing, it is necessary
to organize and to subdivide the network into containers, objects, etc.
During this operation, it is advisable to take into account the equipment connection mode and
their position on the field.
Warning. Subject example supposes that all the network equipment are created into the same
map. If the operator wants to subdivide the equipment into more maps, he has to respect the
indications pointed out at paragraph 5.3.4.
Fig. 5.5 shows a possible subdivision of the network.
67
5.
Nord Italia
(container)
1
Milano
(container)
Sud Italia
(container)
2
9
5
Workstation
1
CommServerS
143.1.1.1
n
143.1.1.2
8
Palermo
(container)
6
Radio
10
Torino
(container)
8
Radio
12
11
12
FAM
6
4
14
7
Radio
11
FAM
8
13
FAM
7
10
Oltme
21
NE logic
address
NE
physical
address
Fig. 5.5
In Fig. 5.5, the containers have been coupled with a name that identifies a geographic area or
a town.
A generic name can be assigned to the Container objects, but it is advisable to set a name that
has a geographic reference.
In such a way, it will be already possible to detect the position of the equipment by means of the
name of the container symbol.
To each NE object, the system has assigned a physical address and a logic one different for each
created NE object.
The physical address (Physical Address parameter refer to paragraph 9.1.2.3) has to be equal
to the locally set address (by means of the LOM) for the relevant equipment 50.
The logic address corresponds to the name of the equipment that is displayed under the
relevant icon. Also in this case as for the Container objects, it is possible to assign every value.
However, it is advisable to assign a name that make easier the equipment detection.
To each NE object, during its creation, it is necessary to couple all the information necessary
to allow the equipment reaching. Such information are the IP Address of the CSB or of the WS
and the number of the used port.
50.
68
If the values are not the same, later, it will not be possible to activate the connection.
5.
Warning. For the equipment not directly connected to the serial port 51, it has to be set the IP
Address of the WS or of the CSB and the number of the port to which it is connected the
equipment installed upstream of the equipment chain to which belongs the equipment itself.
NE, etc.) into a specific map window, it is not possible to move it into another map window.
Now, execute the creation of the objects.

Warning. During this operation, it is necessary to respect a well defined order because it is not
object that allows opening the map window that has to contain such an object.
The first symbols that have to be created are the objects inside the Siae World map window
(Container objects: Nord Italia and Sud Italia).
Then, open for instance the Nord Italia map, create the objects present into such a map and so
on.
In Fig. 5.5, all the objects, that have to be created by the user in such a way that each equipment
if the Italia network can be managed by the NMS5UX system, are identified by a number (1, 2,
etc.) placed on the upper R.H. corner.
In Tab. 5.2, for each object present into Fig. 5.5 and identified by a number, there are some
With details, it is pointed out the type of the object to be created, which values have to be
assigned to the parameters of the object 52 and in which map window it is necessary to insert
the symbols.
Then, the order used to list the objects respects a possible creation order that ensures the
creation of the Container objects before the creation of the object that have to be contained into
the relevant map window.
Warning. The WS Port and CSB Port objects are automatically created during the creation
procedure of the relevant WS and CSB objects.
Then, it is possible to add Radio Link objects into every map window.
51.
The equipment can be connected to the supervisory system, directly or undirectly by means of
EOC or other dedicated connection lines creating, in such a way, equipment chains.
52.
Warning. The system does not points out all the parameters, but only the ones that have to be set
to allow the object creation.
69
5.
Tab. 5.2
Object
Object type to be created
Map window where it

is necessary to
create the object
Setting of the values relevant to

the main parameters
Container
Siae World
Label: Nord Italia
Container
Siae World
Label: Sud Italia
Container
Nord Italia
Label: Milano
Container
Nord Italia
Label: Torino
Workstation
Milano
Network Element
Legacy Protocol Managed
Milano
Network Element
Milano
Network Element
Torino
Communication Server
Board
Network Element
Sud Italia
11
Container
Sud Italia
Name: WS *
IP Address: 143.1.1.1
Physical Address: 10
Logical Address: Radio 10 *
CS/WS Ip Address: 143.1.1.1
CS/WS Port: 1
Type: Radio G
Logical Address: Radio 11 *
CS/WS Port: 1
Type: Radio G
Logical Address:Radio 12 *
CS/WS Port: 1
Type: Radio G
Gosip Address: **
Logical Address: Oltme 21 *
CS/WS Port: 8
Type: Oltme
Label: Palermo
12
Network Element
Palermo
13
Network Element
Palermo
14
Network Element
Palermo
10
Sud Italia
Physical Address: 6
Logical Address: Fam 6 *
CS/WS Port: 2
Type: Fam
Physical Address: 7
CS/WS Port: 2
Type: Fam
Physical Address: 8
CS/WS Port: 2
Type: Fam
* It is possible to set a generic value, different from the pointed out one.
** Set the GOSIP Address of the CommServerS only if it is inserted into a OSI network (refer to paragraph 9.1.5).
map window.
70
5.
contains the equipment, for instance as shown by Fig. 5.6, for the Oltme 21 equipment of the
Italia network.
Clicking twice on the Oltme 21

symbol, the system does not open the
relevant Equipment window.
This operation will be possible only
after the first equipment connection.
Fig. 5.6
71
5.
5.3.3
Network composed by equipment managed with Legacy protocol

and equipment managed with SNMP protocol
The Italia network shown in Fig. 5.7, is composed by equipment managed with Legacy protocol
(FAM) and equipment managed with SNMP protocol (Radio SDH).
The NMS5UX system is loaded on a Workstation that is connected, by means of Ethernet LAN,
to a CommServerS and to the equipment.
To each equipment, it has been assigned the specific local address by means of LOM/LCT.
The relevant IP addresses have been assigned to the Workstation and to the CommServerS
Workstation
Lan
CommServerS
SDH Radio
10.10.10.20
143.1.1.2
2
8
Serial ports
SDH Radio
10.10.10.21
RS232
Equipment
type
SDH Radio
10.10.10.22
Local IP
Address of the
equipment
IP address
of the CS
FAM
6
FAM
9
Local address of
the equipment
RS485
FAM
8
RS485
Equipment type
FAM
7
Fig. 5.7
to organize and to subdivide the network into containers, objects, etc.
During this operation, it is advisable to take into account the equipment connection mode and
their position on the field.
Warning. Subject example supposes that all the network equipment are created into the same
map. If the operator wants to subdivide the equipment into more maps, he has to respect the
indications pointed out at paragraph 5.3.4.
Fig. 5.8 shows a possible subdivision of the network.
72
5.
Nord Italia
(container)
1
Sud Italia
(container)
Workstation
2
Lan
7
CommServerS
Torino
(container)
3
2
4
NE logic
address
SDH Radio
10.10.10.20
143.1.1.2
8
Palermo
(container)
9
10
FAM
6
5
SDH Radio
10.10.10.21
12
6
NE IP
address
FAM
8
SDH Radio
10.10.10.22
8
FAM
9
NE logic
address
11
FAM
7
NE physical
address
Fig. 5.8
In Fig. 5.8, the containers have been coupled with a name that identifies a geographic area or
a town. A generic name can be assigned to the Container objects, but it is advisable to set a
name that has a geographic reference. In such a way, it will be already possible to detect the
position of the equipment by means of the name of the container symbol.
To each NE object, the system has assigned a physical address (IP Address for the NEs
managed with SNMP protocol 53 and physical address with the NEs managed with Legacy
protocol) and a logic one different for each created NE object.
The IP Address has to be equal to the IP Address locally set (by means of the LCT program)
for the relevant equipment 54.
The logic address corresponds to the name of the equipment that is displayed under the
relevant icon. Also in this case as for the Container objects, it is possible to assign every value.
However, it is advisable to assign a name that make easier the equipment detection.
45.
ONLY if the equipment are inserted into an OSI network, it will be necessary to set also the GOSIP
address of the equipment.
54.
If the values are not the same, later, it will not be possible to activate the connection.
73
5.
Only for the NE objects relevant to the equipment managed with the Legacy protocol, during
their creation, it is necessary to couple all the informations necessary to allow the equipment
reaching. Such information are the IP Address of the CSB or of the WS and the number of the
used port.
Warning. For the equipment not directly connected to the serial port 55, it has to be set the IP
Address of the WS or of the CSB and the number of the port to which it is connected the
equipment installed upstream of the equipment chain to which belongs the equipment itself.
NE, etc.) into a specific map window, it is not possible to move it into another map window.
Now, execute the creation of the objects.

Warning. During this operation, it is necessary to respect a well defined order because it is not
object that allows opening the map window that has to contain such an object.
The first symbols that have to be created are the objects inside the Siae World map window
(Container objects: Nord Italia and Sud Italia).
Then, open for instance the Nord Italia map, create the objects present into such a map and so
on.
In Fig. 5.8, all the objects, that have to be created by the user in such a way that each equipment
if the Italia network can be managed by the NMS5UX system, are identified by a number (1, 2,
etc.) placed on the upper R.H. corner.
In Tab. 5.3, for each object present into Fig. 5.8 and identified by a number, there are some
With details, it is pointed out the type of the object to be created, which values have to be
assigned to the parameters of the object 56 and in which map window it is necessary to insert
the symbols.
Then, the order used to list the objects respects a possible creation order that ensures the
creation of the Container objects before the creation of the object that have to be contained into
the relevant map window.
Warning. The CSB Port objects are automatically created during the creation procedure of the
relevant CSB object.
Then, it is possible to add Radio Link objects into every map window.
55.
The equipment can be connected to the supervisory system, directly or undirectly by means of
EOC or other dedicated connection lines creating, in such a way, equipment chains.
56.
Warning. The system does not points out all the parameters, but only the ones that have to be set
to allow the object creation.
74
5.
Tab. 5.3
Object
Object type to be created
Map window where it

is necessary to
create the object
Setting of the values relevant to

the main parameters
Container
Siae World
Label: Nord Italia
Container
Siae World
Label: Sud Italia
Container
Nord Italia
Label: Torino
Network Element
SNMP Managed
Torino
IP Address: 10.10.10.20
Gosip Address: **
Type: Radio sdh
Network Element
SNMP Managed
Torino
IP Address: 10.10.10.21
Gosip Address: **
Type: Radio sdh
Network Element
SNMP Managed
Torino
IP Address: 10.10.10.22
Gosip Address: **
Type: Radio sdh
Board
Sud Italia
Gosip Address: ***
Network Element
Sud Italia
Physical Address: 9
CS/WS Port: 8
Type: Fam
Container
Sud Italia
Label: Palermo
10
Network Element
Palermo
Physical Address: 6
CS/WS Port: 2
Type: Fam
11
Network Element
Palermo
Physical Address: 7
CS/WS Port: 2
Type: Fam
12
Network Element
Palermo
Physical Address: 8
CS/WS Port: 2
Type: Fam
It is possible to set a generic value, different from the pointed out one.
** Set the GOSIP Address of the equipment only if it is inserted into a OSI network (refer to paragraph 9.1.2.1).
*** Set the GOSIP Address of the CommServerS only if it is inserted into a OSI network (refer to paragraph 9.1.5).
Warning. In Tab. 5.3 there is not the WS object (relevant to the workstation present into the
network refer to Fig. 5.7) because it is not necessary for its creation. It should be necessary
75
5.
only in the case some equipment managed with Legacy protocol have been connected to the
WS ports.
map window.
contains the equipment, for instance as shown by Fig. 5.9, for the FAM 9 equipment of the Italia
network.
Clicking twice on the FAM 9 symbol, the system

does not open the relevant Equipment window.
This operation will be possible only after the first
equipment connection.
Fig. 5.9
76
5.
5.3.4
Network subdivided into more maps
The Italia network shown by Fig. 5.10, is composed by FAM, OLTME, G series Radio type
equipment (equipment managed with Legacy protocol) and by SDH Radio, PDH Radio and PMP
type equipment (equipment managed with SNMP protocol).
The NMS5UX system is loaded on a Workstation that is connected, by means of Ethernet LAN,
to a CommServerS and to the equipment.
To each equipment, it has been assigned the specific local address by means of LOM/LCT.
The relevant IP addresses have been assigned to the Workstation and to the CommServerS
Lan
IP Address
of the WS
Workstation
1
IP address
of the CS
CommServerS
143.1.1.1
n
143.1.1.2
8
Serial ports
Serial ports
RS232
RS232
RS485
Equipment type
Radio
10
FAM
6
EOC Radio
11
Equipment
local address
RS485
RS232
Radio
12
Oltme
21
FAM
7
FAM
8
Equipment type
SDH Radio
10.10.10.20
SDH Radio
10.10.10.21
SDH Radio
10.10.10.22
PMP
10.10.10.40
PDH Radio
10.10.10.30
Local IP
address of the
equipment
PDH Radio
10.10.10.31
SDH Radio
10.10.10.32
Fig. 5.10
77
5.
to subdivide the network.
Let us suppose to subdivide the network into two subnetworks and to draw each subnetwork
into a different map.
For instance, the equipment managed with Legacy protocol and all the elements necessary for
their management will be inserted into the A subnetwork and drawn into the A map.
While the equipment managed with the SNMP protocol will be inserted into the B subnetwork
and drawn into the B map, as shown in Fig. 5.8.
Lan
Workstation
1
Radio
12
CommServerS
143.1.1.1
n
143.1.1.2
8
Radio
10
FAM
6
Radio
11
FAM
7
SDH radio
10.10.10.20
SDH radio
10.10.10.21
SDH radio
10.10.10.22
Oltme
21
A Subnetwork
A Map
FAM
8
PMP
10.10.10.40
PDH radio
10.10.10.30
PDH radio
10.10.10.31
B Subnetwork
B Map
SDH radio
10.10.10.32
Fig. 5.11
78
5.
Now, execute the following procedure:

1.
Create the A map.

The operation has to be executed by the user with superuser profile. Such a user,
during the creation of the first NMS5UX user who will use the A map, creates the map
itself (refer to paragraph 13.4.1.2).
Warning. To be able to create the map, the new user has to have the advanced or
privileged profile.
2.
Subdivide the equipment of the A map into containers and identify the objects that have
to be created (a possible subdivision is shown in Fig. 5.5).
3.
Create the objects (as pointed out in Tab. 5.2).
Warning. The execution of the steps 2 and 3 is the same one described at paragraph 5.3.2.
4.
Create the B map.

The operation has to be executed by the user with superuser profile. Such a user,
during the creation of the first NMS5UX user who will use the B map, creates the map
itself (refer to paragraph 13.4.1.2).
Warning. To be able to create the map, the new user has to have the advanced or
privileged profile.
5.
Subdivide the equipment of the B map into containers and identify the objects that have
to be created (a possible subdivision is shown in Fig. 5.2).
6.
Create the objects (as pointed out in Tab. 5.1).
Warning. The execution of the steps 5 and 6 is the same one described at paragraph 5.3.1.
After having created the maps and drawn the subnetworks, at the opening of each map
it will be possible to see and to manage only the network part coupled with the open map.
Warning. It is possible to create the symbol of an object that represents an element of

the network (equipment, WS, CSB) into two different maps.
In this case, it is necessary to create the symbol, into both maps, assigning it the same
characteristics (address, type, etc.).
At the creation of the second symbol, the object is already present into OpenView map
and then it will automatically get the status of the already existing twin symbol.
It is possible to save on file the objects created into a map and then, to import them into
a different map (refer to paragraph 9.1).
79
5.
80
6.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
After having created all the objects necessary for the NMS5UX system to get the several
equipment 57, it is necessary to activate the connection, then the dialogue, between the
supervisory centre (logic NE objects created by the user) and the peripheral units (physical
equipment).
Warning. For the equipment managed with the Legacy protocol (FAM, OLTME, Radio
Standard, G series Radio), the connection phase (described at paragraph 6.2) is preceded by
the opening of the serial ports (described at paragraph 6.1) that are physically connected to
the equipment themselves.
For the equipment managed with the SNMP protocol (Radio PDH, Radio PDHAL, Elfo,
Radio SDH, ALS, SDH N+1, ADMC, ADM1, EXP 63, PMP) execute immediately the
connection (described at paragraph 6.2) because it is assumed that the connection between the
equipment and the supervisory system is ensured by the TCP/IP network.
57.
The creation modes of the objects are reported at paragraph 5.3 and 9.1.
81
6.
6.1
OPENING OF THE SERIAL PORTS
Warning. The opening of the serial ports is NECESSARY ONLY for the equipment
managed with Legacy protocol.
For the equipment managed with SNMP protocol, do not execute this operation, but pass
immediately to the connection (described at paragraph 6.2).
For the equipment managed with Legacy protocol, before starting the connection procedure,
it is necessary to activate the management processes of the serial ports to which the equipment
themselves are physically connected.
This procedure is usually defined to open a serial port.
It is possible to connect the equipment managed with Legacy protocol to the supervisory centre
by means of the serial ports of the Workstation or by means of the ones of the CommServerS
or the ones of the Board inserted into the CommServerF.
According to the hardware elements provided with the system, it will be necessary to open the
serial ports of the workstation (represented by the WS Port symbols present into the [WS]) map
window and/or the serial ports of the CommServerS (represented by the CSB Port symbols
present into the Equipment window of the CommServerS) and/or the serial ports of the Board
of the CommServerF (represented by the CSB Port symbols present into the map window of
the CSB).
Warning. It is not necessary to open all the serial ports present into the network but only the ones
connected with the equipment to be managed.
6.1.1
Opening modes of the serial ports
Before opening the serial ports, it is necessary to activate the connection of the logic objects
that contain the ports themselves and that are managed by a software process that has to be
activated.
Then, before opening the WS ports and the CSB ports, it will be necessary to activate the
connection of the relevant Workstation and CS Board objects.
With details, the opening sequence of the ports is the following one.
WS port objects (Workstation)
82
1.
Connect the Workstation (refer to paragraph 16.10.1).
2.
Open the WS Port (refer to paragraph 16.12.1).
6.
CSB port objects (CommServerF)

1.
Connect the Communication Server Board (refer to paragraph 16.9.1).
2.
Open the CSB Port (refer to paragraph 16.11.1).
CSB port objects (CommServerS)

1.
Connect the Communication Server Board (refer to paragraph 16.9.1).
2.
Open the CSB Port.

Warning. the procedure to open the CSB Ports of the CommServerS, is described into
the Equipment window relevant to the CommServerS 58.
The opening procedure of the serial port involves the management of the polling process
relevant to the equipment group connected to the port under examination. The HDLC polling
process and the return of the alarms/events will be activated at the connection of the equipment.
During the opening of each single port, the user will have to set the values of the T and N
parameters that define respectively the time and the transceiving number of a message before
that the system would consider an equipment as an unreachable one. The default values are
T=10 and N=2.
Then, only for the CSB Ports (of the CommServer edition 2.0 or next ones) is possible to define
the time range between the polling of an equipment and the next one.
Usually the opening procedure of the serial port, if the connection of the relevant WS or CSB
object has been successfully ended, is correctly executed.
If the connection procedure of the WS or of the CSB has not been successfully executed, check
the following conditions:
58.
The IP Address assigned to the logic object (WS or CSB) is equal to the one assigned
during the local configuration.
The physical element (WS, CommServerF or CommServerS) is turned on and

correctly connected to the supervisory system.
ONLY if the logic object refers to a CommServerS inserted into an OSI network, check
that the Gosip Address assigned to the object coincides with the Gosip Address
assigned during its local configuration.
For more detailled information refer to the CommServerS Manager equipment manual.
83
6.
6.1.2
Closing modes of the serial ports
After having opened a serial port, it is possible to close it (it is deactivated the relevant managing
process) 59.
Warning. The operation is not accepted if there is also a single NE in connected status (refer
to paragraph 6.4.2) connected to the port to be closed.
Closing the serial port, it will not possible longer to connect the equipment physically connected
to the port itself. Then, the polling process, relevant to the equipment group connected to the
port under examination, is not managed longer.
Also the WS or the CSBs can be always disconnected if any of the serial ports present into them
is in open status.
Warning. A WS Port or CSB Port object can be automatically closed by the system after a
supervisory loop 60 or for an overflow of alarm signals on the serial port itself.
The automatic closing procedure is executed independently from the connection status of the
equipment connected to such ports.
At the end of the procedure, the equipment connected to the port under examination will results
unreachable, with the exception of the ones that were disconnected before the procedure; Such
ones do not change their status.
59.
The procedure:
S to disconnect a WS object is reported at paragraph 16.10.2.
S to disconnect a CSB object is reported at paragraph 16.9.2.
S to close a WS Port is reported at paragraph 16.12.3.
S to close a CSB Port of the CommServerF is reported at paragraph 16.11.3.
S to close a CSB Port of the CommServerS is reported in the equipment manual (refer to
paragraph 1.3.3).
60.
The supervisory network is overplaced to the transmission network enabling the proper interfaces.
The transmission network can be configured as a loop, on the contrary the supervisory network
does not allow this configuration type.
In a loop configuration, the propagation mode of a message causes the retyping of the message
itself, after having run into the entire loop, into the same supervisory port from which it has
entered. In such a way, it will reach the most upstream equipment present into the propagation
chain of the messages, until to reach the serial port from which such a message has been
forwarded.
Usually, when the supervisory system receives the same message that it has forwarded, it
automatically disables the serial port. In such a way, the message forwarded by the centre
continues to run into the loop. This situation is called supervisory loop.
84
6.
6.1.3
Connection statuses of the WS, CSB, WS Port and CSB Port

objects
On the video, the connection status of the WS and CSB objects and the opening and the closing
of the CSB Ports and WS Ports is represented by the colour of the relevant icon (refer to Fig. 6.1
and Fig. 6.2).
The actually status of the object affects the operations that the user can execute; for instance
it is not possible to delete a WS object if it is in connected status.
WS and WS Port objects

Fig. 6.1 shows the different statuses that can be get by the a WS object and by a WS Port one,
the relevant colour of the icon, the operations that can be executed into every statuses and the
conditions and the commands that define the passage from a status to another one.
After opening a WS Port, it is necessary to connect the relevant Workstation.
CSB and CSB Port objects

Fig. 6.2 shows the different statuses that can be get by the a CSB object and by a CSB Port one,
the relevant colour of the icon, the operations that can be executed into every statuses and the
conditions and the commands that define the passage from a status to another one.
After opening a CSB Port, it is necessary to connect the relevant Communication Server Board.
Warning. If the CSB object represents the CommServerS equipment, the relevant symbol can
get also the maintenance status (refer to paragraph 6.4.4).
85
6.
WS symbol present in a Container map window
DISCONNECTED
CONNECTED
Status
(colour of the WS icon:
brown)
Possible operations:
STo connect the WS
STo delete the WS object
STo change/check the
values of the WS object
attributes
UNREACHABLE
Status
(colour of ther WS icon:
red)
STo delete the Ws object
attributes
STo disconnect the WS
Status
(colour of the WS icon:
green)
Connection
command
STo disconnect the WS
(only if no one WS Port
is in open status
attributes
Disconnection
command
when the WS is
automatically
connected by the
system or manually
by the user
when the WS is automatically

disconnected by the system
WS Port symbol present into a [WS] map window
CLOSE
Status
(colout of the WS Port icon:
blue)
STo open the WS Port
OPEN
opening
command of
the port
closing
command of
the port
Status
(colour ofthe WS Port icon:
green)
STo close the WS Port
STo chekc the
configuration
parameters of the port
Fig. 6.1
86
6.
CSB symbol present into a Container map window
DISCONNECTED
Status
(colour of the CSB icon:
brown)
STo connect the CSB
STo delete the CSB
object
values of the CSB
object attributes
UNREACHABLE
Status
(colour of the CSB icon:
red with X)
possible operations:
STo delete the CSB
object
values of the CSB
object attributes
STo disconnect the CSB
CONNECTED
Status
(colour of the CSB icon
refer to paragraph 2.2.6.10)
Connection
command
STo disconnect the CSB
(only if no one CSB Port
is in open status
values of the CSB
object attributes
Disconnection
command
when the CSB is

automatically
connected by the
system or manually
by the user
when the CSB is autoamtically

disconnected by the system
CSB Port symbol present into a CSB map window (CommServerF)

or into the specific Equipment window (CommServerS)
CLOSE
Status
(colour of the CSB Port
icon: blue)
STo open the CSB Port
OPEN
opening
command of
the port
closing
cxommand of
the port
status
(colour of the CSB Port
icon: green)
STo close the CSB Port
STo check the
configuration
parameters of the port
Fig. 6.2
87
6.
6.2
CONNECTION PROCEDURE
The connection of the equipment is the last operation that the user has to execute to let the
supervisory system to get the equipment and to control it.
The operations that the user has to execute to connect an equipment are the following ones:
1.
To select the icon of the NE to be connected.
2.
To choose the SIAE Commands Connect Network Element command.

the using mode of such a command is described at paragraph 16.2.1.
Warning. it is possible to forward the connection command to more NEs at the same
time (refer to paragraph 16.2.2).
After having connected the equipment, the user can disconnect it and connect it again
according to his own needings.
After the connection, the system automatically gets the equipment and insert it into the
polling cycle (refer to paragraph 7.1.1).
Here below, there are the descriptions of the phases used by the system to execute the
connection and its behaviour according to the answering messages forwarded by the
equipment.
Connection
When the user forwards the Connect command, the system above all forwards a message to
check the equipment reachability (Line Test command).
If the test has a negative result, the procedure is stopped and the connection will result failed.
The equipment does not change its connection status.
If the test has a positive result, the system will forward the network global parameters and then
will ask to the remote equipment to forward to the system itself the current values of the
attributes relevant to the configuration and to the alarms.
At the first connection, since no one information is stored into the database, the system gets
all the information that will considered as the real configuration.
At the end of the connection procedure (if it has been successfully ended) the supervisory centre
has the whole overview concerning the alarm status and the equipment configuration.
Then, if the equipment is managed with the Legacy protocol, the system will forward the
messages relevant to the configuration only when it is changed a parameter.
88
6.
On the contrary, the alarm status is periodically get by means of a polling cycle (refer to
paragraph 7.1.1).
If the equipment is managed with the SNMP protocol, the equipment itself will spontaneously
inform the supervisory system about possible changes concerning the configuration or the
status of the alarms (SNMP trap).
A polling cycle from the supervisory system is kept only to check the reachability status of the
equipment.
The connection of an equipment causes the automatic insertion of the equipment itself into the
specific polling cycle.
Then, the system forwards to the equipment the network time (hours/minutes/seconds).
Warning. Only now, after having connected an equipment at least one time, it is possible to open
the relevant Equipment window (refer to paragraph 2.1.2).
89
6.
6.3
COMMANDS FOR THE CONNECTION MANAGEMENT
To change the connection status of an equipment or to execute some tests or also to align again
the information stored into the database, the user has at disposal some commands: Line Test,
Connect, Disconnect, Alarm Realignment, Configuration Upload, LegacyReset &
Connect.
Here below there is the description of such commands.
6.3.1
Line Test
This command check the effective reachability of the remote equipment. The procedure
consists of the forwarding, executed by the system, of a test message to the equipment. If the
message is checked by the equipment, the test can be considered as passed.
all the equipment independently from their connection status have been programmed to answer
to the test message.
The test does not affect the connection or alarm status of the equipment.
The using mode of the command is reported at paragraph 16.1.
6.3.2
Connect
This command activates the connection between the supervisory system and the equipment.
If the command forwarding has a positive result, such a forwarding changes the connection
status of the equipment: from disconnected, unreachable it becomes connected.
It is not possible to forward to connect an equipment that is in connected status.
Warning. The Connect command, toward an equipment in unreachable status, is automatically
forwarded by the system at regular times.
6.3.3
Disconnect
This command deactivates the connection between the NMS5UX system and the equipment.
The command forwarding changes the connection status of the equipment: from connected, it
becomes disconnected.
90
6.
6.3.4
Alarm Realignment
This command aligns again the information relevant to the alarms stored into the database with
the ones really present into the equipment.
The procedure forces the system to ask to the remote equipment to forward the current status
of the alarms present into the equipment itself.
These information will later replaced by the ones recorded into the database.
The realigning request of the alarms does not affect the connection status of the equipment
or its configuration and it is applicable only for the equipment in connected status.
The total alarm status of the equipment (then the colour of the NE icon and of the Container icons
that contain it), will be defined by the seriousness level of the received alarms.
The using mode of the Alarm Realignment command is reported at the paragraph 16.6.
6.3.5
Configuration Upload
This command aligns again the information relevant to the alarms and to the configuration stored
into the database with the ones really present into the equipment.
The execution mode of the procedure is fundamentally equal to the one used for the execution
of the realigning procedure on the alarms (refer to paragraph 6.3.4); the only difference is that
the system requires to the equipment the status of the alarms and also the configuration
information relevant to all the objects known by the equipment itself.
Also in this case, the information replace the ones recorded into the database.
The Configuration Upload command does not affect the connection status of the equipment
and it applies only for the equipment in connected status.
The total alarm status of the equipment (then the colour of the NE icon and of the Container icons
that contain it), will be defined by the seriousness level of the received alarms.
Warning. If the Configuration Upload command fails, the equipment, if it is managed with the:
D
Legacy protocol, switches to unreachable status
SNMP protocol, does not change its status. The failure of the operation is pointed out
into the relevant Equipment window (refer to paragraph 2.1.2), into the Equipment
Browser [List/Locate] window (refer to paragraph 14.1.1) and by the asterisk on the
side of the NE icon (refer to paragraph 2.2.6.7).
91
6.
6.3.6
Legacy Reset & Connect
Warning. The command is forwarded only if it has been selected one or more equipment
managed with the Legacy protocol. For the equipment managed with the SNMP
protocol, the forwarding of the command under examination is not available because
it could be equal to the forwarding of the Connect command.
This command removes all the information stored into the database, relevant to the equipment
configuration and then activates the connection between the supervisory system and the
equipment itself.
If the command forwarding has a positive result, such a forwarding changes the connection
status of the equipment: from disconnected, unreachable it becomes connected.
Warning. It is not possible to forward the Legacy Reset & Connect command toward an
equipment in connected status.
92
6.
6.4
CONNECTION STATUSES OF THE EQUIPMENT
The connection status of an equipment essentially points out to the user if the equipment is or
not managed by the supervisory system and if it is, its functional status (alarms).
The different statuses that characterize an equipment are the following ones: disconnected,
connected, unreachable and maintenance.
On the video, the current status of an equipment is pointed out by means of the colour of the
relevant NE symbol. In fact one or more colours correspond to every status.
The colour of the NE icon affects also the colour of the icons relevant to the Container objects
that contain the equipment. In fact the Container objects reflect the connection or functioning
status of the equipment present into such objects according to the following rules:
D
If into a Container window there is at least a connected NE, the relevant icon will get
the colour relevant to the connected status 61.
If into a Container window there is at least a Container object with at least a connected
NE, the relevant icon will get the colour relevant to the connected status.
If into a Container window there are more connected NEs o other Container objects,
the colour of the icon will be defined by the colour of the NE or Container symbol where
it is present the most serious alarm.
Warning. The colour of the NE icon in maintenance status (refer to paragraph 6.4.4) does not
affect he colour if the Container icons where it is present the NE 62.
Here below for each status, it is pointed out: a brief description, the operations that the user can
execute, the conditions or the commands that define the passage from a status to another one
and the colour coupled to the NE icon.
6.4.1
Disconnect
It is the beginning status of an equipment just after its creation; then, it is the status that it is
reached after a disconnection command.
In this condition, the equipment is not managed by the system: no one message is forwarded
or received and the polling procedure is not executed (refer to paragraph 7.1.1).
61.
The description of the colours that characterize the NE or Container symbols is reported at
paragraph 2.2.6.10.
62.
For instance, if into a Container window there is a NE in connected status (green colour) and a
NE in maintenance status (pink colour), the Container icon will get the colour relevant to the
connected status (green).
93
6.
Operations
The operations that the user can execute into this status are the following ones:
D
To forward the Line Test, Connect, LegacyReset & Connect command 63.
To delete the NE symbol (refer to paragraph 9.3.2).
To open the Equipment window (only if the equipment has been connected for at least
one time) because the disconnection procedure does not involve the deleting of the
database relevant to the configuration and alarm information (alarm history).
However, in this case, the status and the values of the attributes, relevant to the objects
present into the window, will not refer to the current condition of the equipment but at
the last known configuration.
Passage from a status to another one

After the forwarding, executed by the user, of the Connect or LegacyReset & Connect
command:
D
if the command is successfully executed, the equipment switches on connected status.
if the command fails, the equipment switches on unreachable status.
Icon colour
The icon colour coupled with the disconnected status is BROWN.
6.4.2
Connect
It is the status reached by the equipment after a connection procedure that has been correctly
executed.
In this condition, the equipment answers correctly to the system queries.
During the connection period of the equipment, the user is able to forward commands and to
ask for information.
The only exception for this rule is the presence of the LOM/LCT in Configuration mode (refer
to paragraph 6.5).
Then, when the NE is in connected status, it is assumed that there is a misalignment between
the alarm and/or configuration information known by the system and the real situation present
into the equipment, the user can align again the information choosing the Configuration
Upload or Alarm Realignment command (refer to paragraph 6.3).
63.
94
Only for the equipment managed with the Legacy protocol.
6.
Operation
D
To open the Equipment window and to execute all the configuration operations
(creation, deleting and change/check of the values relevant to the attributes) of the
objects present into the NE.
The status and the values of the attributes of the objects present into the Equipment
window refer to the real configuration of the equipment.
To forward the Disconnect, Configuration Upload, Alarm Realignment, Line Test

command.
ONLY for the equipment managed with the SNMP protocol:

D
To change the forwarding status of the alarms/traps from the NE to the supervisory
system and to change the local seriousness level of the NE alarms (SNMP
Equipment Severity Code command refer to paragraph 13.3).
To execute the updating of the equipment software/firmware (sw/fw) of the NE (SNMP

NE Sw/Fw Download command refer to paragraph 13.9).
To change the SCT/LCT user list of the selected Network Element (SNMP LCT
Equipment Users command refer to paragraph 13.6).
To display the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected with the NE (SNMP
LCT Logged Users command refer to paragraph 13.7).
To display/change the remote equipment list stored in the controller of the NE (SNMP
NE Remote Element Table command refer to paragraph 13.8).
To transfer the NE configuration to another NE (real or virtual one) of the same type
(SNMP Configuration Download command refer to paragraph 16.8).
Warning. For the PMP type equipment, it is not possible to execute this operation.
ONLY for the equipment managed with the Legacy protocol:

D
To execute the updating of the equipment software/firmware (sw/fw) of the NE

(Legacy NE Sw/Fw Download command refer to paragraph 13.12).
To set the hysteresis parameters that characterizes the ringing alarms (Legacy
Network Alarm Hysteresis command refer to paragraph 13.1).

After the forwarding, executed by the user, of the Disconnect command, the equipment
switches in disconnected status.
After a query of the system, if the equipment does not forward any answer, the status switches
from connected to unreachable.
95
6.
Icon colour
The colour of the icon coupled with the connected status depends on the alarms present into
the equipment itself. According to the seriousness level of the current alarms the colour can be
the following one:
D
green, the equipment does not present alarms.
light blue, into the equipment there is at least an alarm with Warning seriousness level
(simple signal).
yellow, into the equipment there is at least an alarm with Minor seriousness level
(alarm).
orange, into the equipment there is at least an alarm with Major seriousness level
(serious alarm).
red, into the equipment there is at least an alarm with Critical level (extremely serious
alarm).
If into the equipment there are more alarms at the same time with different seriousness levels,
the colour of the NE icon will represent the most serious alarm.
6.4.3
Unreachable
It is the status that is reached when the equipment, also with the automatic repetition of the
message, does not answer to the queries of the supervisory system or forwards unknown
messages.
In this condition the NE is not managed by the NMS5UX system, that however automatically
forwards a connection command at regular times.
Operations
D
To forward the Disconnect, Line Test, Connect, LegacyReset & Connect

command 63.
To open the Equipment window (only if the equipment has been connected for at least
one time).
But, in this case, the status and the values of the attributes relevant to the objects
present into the window does not refer to the current condition of the equipment but
to the last known configuration.
96
To delete the NE symbol (refer to paragraph 9.3.2).
6.

After the forwarding of the Connect command (executed by the user or by the supervisory
system: automatic reconnection process):
D
if the connection is successfully executed, the equipment switches on connected

status.
if the connection fails, the equipment remains on unreachable status.
After the forwarding of the Disconnect command (executed by the user):

D
if the disconnection is successfully executed, the equipment switches on disconnected

status.
if the disconnection fails, the equipment remains on unreachable status.
Icon colour
The colour of the NE icon coupled with this status is RED with an X on the symbol.
6.4.4
Maintenance
The equipment gets this status during the execution of an operation, for instance during the
connection.
In fact, this status points out a temporaneous condition. at the end of the operation on progress,
the NE will get the status coupled with its condition (connected, disconnected, unreachable).
Operations
When the NE is in this status, the system can not execute any operation.
Icon colour
The colour of the NE icon coupled with this status is PINK.
97
6.
6.5
LOM/LCT
The word LOM/LCT identifies the software application program, loaded on PC or on portable
device (PCD), designed by Siae to manage and to locally configure its own devices.
Each type of equipment is provided with its own LOM Local Operator Manager or LCT Local
Craft Terminal program 64.
The operations that can be executed by means of the LOM/LCT are mainly the ones that can
be executed by means of the NMS5UX system.
Warning. More detailed information concerning the use of the LOM or LCT programs are
reported into the specific User Manuals, here below there are only some indications
concerning the relations between LOM/LCT and the NMS5UX system.
6.5.1
Connection types between LOM/LCT and equipment (Monitoring,

Configuration)
The local user can activate the connection between LOM/LCT and equipment by means of two
different modes: Monitoring 65 or Configuration 66.
In Monitoring mode, it is possible to check the configuration and the parameters of the
equipment, but it is not possible to execute any change or to ask for the execution of an
operation.
On the contrary, in Configuration mode, it is possible to check and to change the configuration
and the parameters of the connected equipment.
The local activation of a connection between LOM/LCT and equipment in Monitoring mode does
not affect the alarm acquiring or the command forwarding executed by the system: the NMS5UX
user can open the Equipment window (refer to paragraph 2.1.2) and execute reading (get) and
writing (set) operations.
On the contrary, when it is locally activated a connection between LOM/LCT and equipment in
Configuration mode, if the NE under examination is:
64.
LCT is an additional software module of the SCT program Subnetwork Craft Terminal. Each Siae
equipment is provided with its own additional software module called LCT <equipment
denomination>.
More detailled information concerning the SCT/LCT... program are reported in the relevant Siae
manuals.
65.
Warning. For SCT program, the Monitoring modality corresponds to the activation of the
SCTequipment connection with Read Only user profile.
66.
Warning. For SCT program, the Configuration modality corresponds to the activation of the
SCTequipment connection with Station Operator or System user profile.
98
6.
managed with Legacy protocol, it is not possible to change the configuration

parameters or to forward commands: the NMS5UX user can not open the Equipment
window.
managed with SNMP protocol 67, it is not possible to change the configuration
parameters or to forward commands with some exceptions: the NMS5UX user can
Open the Equipment window and execute reading (get) operations on all the
parameters and writing (set) operations only on the following attributes 68:
6.5.2
Execute the software reset of the equipment. The operation consists of the
reinitializing operation of all the communication channels (for instance with
the supervisory system) of the equipment.
Transfer the equipment configuration (memorised into the database of the

supervisory system) to another equipment (real or virtual one) of the same
type (refer to paragraph 16.8).
Program the updating of the equipment software/firmware (refer to paragraph

13.9).
Force the disconnection procedure (logout) of an user (refer to paragraph

13.7).
Indication to the NMS5UX user of the LOM/LCT presence
During the period when the connection is activated in Configuration mode, it is not signalled to
the supervisory system any change relevant to the alarms.
When the local connection between LOM/LCT and equipment is deactivated the NMS5UX
system automatically executes a realigning procedure of the configuration (forwarding of the
Configuration Upload command) to see the possible changes executed by the local user and
to get all the current alarm signals.
If the local user has changed the configuration of the remote equipment, the new values are get
and replaced to the ones stored before into the database.
The activation and the deactivation of the local connection, as in Monitoring mode as in
Configuration mode, are spontaneously communicated by the equipment to the NMS5UX
system and signalled to the user:
D
into the map window, it is pointed out an asterisk on the side of the NE icon (refer to
paragraph 2.2.6.7).
Warning. This information is forwarded also to the Container icons that contain the
NE symbol.
67.
With the exception of the PMP type equipment, for which it is not possible to open the
Equipment window.
68.
For the description of the commands present into the Equipment window refer to the User Manual
relevant to the equipment type connected with the window (refer to paragraph 1.3.3).
99
6.
into the Alarm History Browser window (refer to paragraph 12.1).
into the Current Alarms Browser window (refer to paragraph 12.2).
into the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window (refer to paragraph 14.1.1).
into the Equipment Info/Find: physical address ... window of the NE under examination
into the Equipment window of the NE under examination (only for the equipment
managed with SNMP protocol).
Then, the activation of the local connection in Configuration mode is signalled in the following
way:
D
into the map window, the NE icon gets the white colour (refer to paragraph 2.2.6.10).
Warning. This information is not forwarded to the Container icons that contain the NE
symbol 69.
6.5.3
Enabling/disabling of
Configuration mode
the
LCTequipment
connection
in
Warning. The description reported here below can be applied only for the equipment
managed with the SNMP protocol.
The NMS5UX user can enable (or disable) the LCT user (by means of the LCT program) for the
connection with the equipment (LCT Config parameter) in Configuration mode (refer to
paragraph 6.5.1).
With details if the parameter has the following value:
D
Enabled means that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment as
in Monitoring mode as in Configuration one.
Disabled means that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment in
Monitoring mode only.
Warning. Without taking into account the above mentioned setting, when the equipment is
turned off and turned on again or when it is reset the LCT Config parameter, it is automatically
set with the Enabled value.
The command to execute the operation is present into the Equipment window of the NE under
examination.
Warning. For each equipment, the status of the LCT Config parameter is pointed out into the
relevant Equipment window also into the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window (refer to
paragraph 14.1.1).
69.
100
For instance if into a Container window there is a NE in connected status (green colour) and a NE
connected with the LCT program in Configuration mode (white colour), the icon of the Container
will get the colour relevant to the connected status (green).
7.
ALARM AND PERFORMANCE

MONITORING MANAGEMENT
The subject chapter describes the management, the acquisition and the displaying, executed
by the NMS5UX system, of:
D
the alarms and the events present into the equipment controlled by the system itself
the results of the Performance Monitoring measurements activated into the equipment
controlled by the system itself (refer to paragraph 7.2).
101
7.
ALARM AND PERFORMANCE MONITORING MANAGEMENT
7.1
ALARMS
The primary importance functions of the NMS5UX system are the detection, the visual signalling
and the centralized memorization of the alarm/status/event signals present into the managed
equipment.
The word alarm identify the failure signal created by an error or by a malfunctioning of the NE
or of one of its elements.
The words status and event identify the signals that do not point out a malfunctioning but a
status change, an operation on progress or a functioning condition. With details:
D
The status signals are spontaneously communicated by the NE to the supervisory

system, for instance:
the activation/deactivation of the connection between the LOM/LCT and the

NE (refer to paragraph 6.5);
the beginning/end of the equipment software/firmware updating (refer to

paragraph 13.9 e 13.11);
the activation/deactivation of the manual operations.
the activated/standby status of doubled parts of NE.
The event signals are created by the supervisory system itself, for instance the
beginning of a realigning operation of the alarms.
Warning. In the following part of the chapter, the generic word alarm refers to the alarm, status
and event signals.
7.1.1
Alarm acquiring
The acquiring process of the alarms changes according to the type of protocol used by the
equipment. With details for the equipment:
D
managed with the Legacy protocol, the acquiring of the alarms is executed by means
of a polling process by the supervisory centre, through the serial interfaces of the
Workstation (WS Port) or of the Communication Server Board (CSB Port), toward all
the equipment in connected status.
managed with SNMP protocol, the detection and reset signals of an alarm are
spontaneously forwarded to the supervisory centre by the equipment (trap SNMP).
A polling process executed by the supervisory centre is kept only to check the
reachability status of the equipment.
102
7.
Warning. The equipment in disconnected, unreachable or undefined status are not involved into
the polling process.
The alarm status can be acquired also forwarding the Alarm Realignment command (refer
to paragraph 16.6) or the Configuration Upload command (refer to paragraph 16.7).
Into the alarm history, it is possible to configure the maximum number of records (value that can
be set by the superuser) that can be memorised into the Alarm History table.
During the day, the system memorizes into the table all the alarms forwarded by the equipment
(also if their number exceeds the maximum value of records). At midnight, the system checks
the number of records; if such a value exceeds the maximum set value, the system will delete
the oldest records among the displayed and reset signals only.
Warning. If inside the alarm history all the alarms are activated and not yet reset ones and their
number exceeds the maximum set value, the system DOES NOT delete any record.
Polling execution
Warning. The contents of the subject paragraph refer to the equipment managed with
the Legacy protocol (FAM, OLTME, Radio standard, G series Radio). For the equipment
managed with SNMP protocol (PDH Radio, SDH Radio, PDHAL Radio, ADMC, PMP) the
polling process executes only the checking of the reachability of the equipment
themselves, and does not collect the alarms.
Each CSB/WS port autonomously executes the polling process relevant to the local equipment
(directly connected) and to the remote ones (connected in cascade by means of EOC, service
channels, etc.).
In such a way, the acquiring times of the alarms are strongly reduced because for a high
dimension network it is not executed a single polling process but as much processes as are the
managed and in open status CSB/WS ports.
The polling process is managed by a properly devoted program, loaded into the CommServer
for the CSB ports and into the Workstation for the WS ports. Such a programs makes cyclically
available the connection line for each single equipment connected to the same CSB/WS port.
The equipment involved into the polling cycle communicates to the supervisory system all the
detected changes, if the alarm status has changed from the last polling time.
After having forwarded all the information, the connection line will become available for the next
equipment. The duration of the polling cycle changes according to the number of equipment
connected to the CSB/WS port and to the quantity of the transmitted signals.
Though every signal is timestamped (by the remote equipment at the occurrence of such an
alarm), the duration of the polling cycle or the query sequence of the equipment into such a cycle
will not affect the correct displaying of the alarm information for the user.
103
7.
Polling and command forwarding

The polling procedure, executed between CS/WS and equipment, is completely transparent for
the user: it is automatically executed without affecting the operations executed by the NMS5UX
user.
But since the connection line between the serial port and the relevant equipment group is a
single one, the forwarding of a command executed by the centre is a priority one with respect
to the cyclic polling process. In fact, when it is forwarded a command (for instance, the change
of a parameter), to an equipment A, if the polling process of an equipment B is on progress, the
system waits for the end of the polling operation on the equipment A. After that it executes the
command and then restart again the polling procedure from the step it has been suspended on
the equipment B.
Polling and LOM/LCT activation

The activation of the local connection between the equipment and the LOM/LCT program does
not affect the automatic acquiring of the alarms for the equipment under examination.
7.1.2
Alarm displaying
7.1.2.1 Dynamic displaying of the alarms

For each change of the alarm status relevant to the equipment present into the network, the
NMS5UX system, by means of the graphical interface, informs the user executing the following
operations:
D
If it is present, into the open map window, the symbol of the NE where it has been
detected the signal, the colour of the symbol dynamically changes according to the
seriousness level coupled with the alarm (refer to paragraph 2.2.6.7).
Warning. If into the equipment there is an alarm with a seriousness level higher than
the one of the detected alarm, the icon does not change colour because such a colour
is defined by the alarm with the most seriousness level present into the equipment.
The NE icon contains also the information that there is an alarm not yet
displayed/accepted by a user (refer to paragraph 2.2.6.7).
104
The NE status (colour change and presence of an alarm not yet displayed/accepted)
is pointed out also into the Container map windows that contain the NE under
examination (the colour of the Container icons changes).
7.
Warning. The colour of the Container symbol, is defined by the colour of the NE symbol
present into it that at its turn contains the most serious alarm.
D
The system dynamically adds into the Alarm History Browser window (refer to
paragraph 12.1.1), if it is open, the record relevant to the detected signal.
Warning. If there are some active filters, it is possible that the record is not added
because it does not comply with the set filter criteria.
The system dynamically adds into the Current Alarm Browser window (refer to
paragraph 12.2.1), if it is open, the record relevant to the detected signal.
If it is open, into the Equipment window with Read Write access (refer to paragraph
2.1.2) relevant to the equipment where it has been detected the signal, the system
graphically changes the symbol of the NE 70.
Warning. If the Equipment window has Read Only access, the system does not signal
the alarm, because the window is not dynamically updated. To update the alarms, it
is necessary to ask for a new reading of the table relevant to the current alarms.
7.1.2.2 Displaying of the current alarms and of the alarm history

The user can always display the following elements:
D
the alarm history 71 relevant to all the equipment (Network Alarm history command
refer to paragraph 12.1) or only to the selected one (NE Alarm history command
refer to paragraph 12.4).
the list of the alarms currently activated into all the equipment (Network Current
alarms command refer to paragraph 12.2) or only into the selected one (NE Current
alarms command refer to paragraph 12.5).
7.1.3
Alarm correlation
The wording alarm correlation means the feature to correlate, into the table of the equipment
alarms, the activation signal of an alarm with its reset one.
This new feature has changed the philosophy used to display the alarms into the Alarm History
Browser window (refer to paragraph 13.1.1).
70.
The description of the Equipment window is reported into the relevant equipment Manual (refer
to paragraph 1.3.3).
71.
The alarm history is the list of the signals acquired and recorded by the supervisory system
during the time. Into the alarm history, the system memorizes as the detection signal as the alarm
reset one.
105
7.
In fact, into the previous versions of the supervisory system, the notification for the
activation/reset of an alarm was displayed into the window with two different records and it was
not immediately possible to get an eventual correlation without using some complex processes.
Then, after a forced alignment of the alarm status 72, the system recorded newly all the
notifications relevant to the activated alarms on the equipment and the possible new alarms.
Then, it was possible to have into the window some different consecutive activation signals
relevant to the same alarm without having a corresponding reset signal.
With the implementation of the feature alarm correlation, the system displays the activation
notification of an alarm into the window through one record. Such a record points out the
activation date/time of the alarm itself. The system points out the reset of the same alarm adding
to the already present record the indication of the deactivation date/time (refer to paragraph
13.1.1).
Then, after a forced alignment of the alarm status, the system does not newly record all the
notification of the activated alarm on the equipment, but only the possible new alarms. Then,
at the end of the forced realignment, the system will automatically insert, into the relevant
record, the deactivation date/time for the alarms that do not result activated longer.
Warning. If an equipment has been disconnected, the system removes all the signals (activation
and activation/reset ones) relevant to such an equipment from the alarm history.
7.1.4
Alarm saving
It is possible to save the alarm history, stored into the database of the supervisory system, on
tape/disk or on file. With details, it is possible:
D
to save on tape and/or on disk the entire alarm history present into the database
(Alarm history backup command refer to paragraph 15.1).
Then, it will be possible to restore the data (Alarm history restore command refer
to paragraph 15.2) and to display them into a proper window (Old alarm history
command refer to paragraph 12.3).
72.
106
to save on file:
the entire alarm history (or a part of it) present into the database of the system
(Export command into the Alarm History Browser window refer to
paragraph 12.1.2.1).
the entire alarm history (or a part of it) restored from tape or disk (Export
command into the Old History Browser window refer to paragraph 12.3.2.1).
New reading of the configuration and of the alarm status after unreachable equipment conditions
or after local operator output or however with explicit operators operations.
7.
7.1.5
Seriousness level of the alarms
Every one of the alarm roots known and detected by the NMS5UX system is coupled with a
seriousness level that defines the alarm importance.
Each level is identified with a name and a colour, as reported into Tab. 7.1.
Tab. 7.1
Seriousness level
Name
Colour
Extremely serious alarm
Critical
Red
Serious alarm
Major
Orange
Alarm
Minor
Yellow
Warning
Light blue
Light alarm
The seriousness level of the alarms is the criterion used by the supervisory system to graphically
display for the user the functional status of the equipment and of the corresponding objects.
In fact, when an alarm occurs into a connected equipment, the icon that represents the
equipment changes its colour according to the seriousness level of the active alarm present into
the equipment itself. Also the colour of the Container symbols that contain the NE points out
the current alarm condition.
If into the equipment, there are more alarms with different seriousness levels at the same time,
the colour of the icon will represent the most serious alarm; the same feature is valid for the icons
of the containers.
Then, the seriousness level is reported also into the Alarm History Browser window (refer to
paragraph 12.1.1) and Current Alarm Browser window (refer to paragraph 12.2.1).
7.1.5.1 Change of the seriousness level

Warning. The contents of the subject paragraph can be applied only for the equipment
The supervisory system allows changing for each alarm, the network seriousness level and
the local seriousness level.
The network seriousness level is the level that characterizes the alarm when it is displayed by
the NMS5UX system.
107
7.
For each alarm, the network seriousness level is COMMON for all the NEs of the same type
present into all the OpenView maps.
To change the network seriousness of an alarm, use the SNMP Network Severity Code
command (refer to paragraph 13.2) 73.
Warning. This command is available only for the user with superuser profile.
The local seriousness level is the level that characterizes the alarm when it is stored into the
controller of the NE and displayed by the local management system (LOM/LCT).
For the same alarm, it is possible to define a local seriousness level different for the several
NEs.
To change the local seriousness level of an alarm, use the SNMP Equipment Severity Code
command (refer to paragraph 13.3).
Example
Let us suppose to have connected, to the NMS5UX system, two SDH Radio type NEs: NEA
and NEB.
By means of the SNMP Equipment Severity Code command, it is locally defined that the x
alarm for the NEA has Normal seriousness level, while for the NEB, it has Minor seriousness
level.
On the contrary, using the SNMP Network Severity Code command, it is defined that the x
alarm, for all the SDH radio type NEs has Critical seriousness level.
Into the NEA, the detection (or the reset) of the x alarm will be stored into the controller of
the NE and seen from the local management group (LOM/LCT) with Normal seriousness level,
while it will be seen by the NMS5UX system with Critical seriousness level.
While into the NEB, the detection (or the reset) of the x alarm will be stored into the controller
of the NE and seen from the local management group (LOM/LCT) with Minor, seriousness
level, while it will be seen by the NMS5UX system with Critical seriousness level.
7.1.5.2 Change of the seriousness level for the User Input Alarm
The description reported at paragraph 7.1.5.1 can be applied for all the alarm signals (of all the
types of equipment managed with the SNMP protocol) with the exception of the alarms for the
user inputs.
The seriousness level of the User Input Alarm is defined by means of a specific command
present into the Equipment window.
Such a level represents as the network seriousness level as the local seriousness one. This
means that, if, for instance, it is defined that the alarm User Input x for a NE has Critical
seriousness level, at its detection, the alarm will be stored into the controller of the NE, seen
by the LCT program and by the NMS5UX system with Critical seriousness level.
73.
108
The change of the network seriousness level for an alarm is not communicated to the NE
controller because the new setting affects exclusively and only the alarm indication into the
NMS5UX supervisory system.
7.
The setting of the seriousness level is independent for each User Input Alarm, and it is local to
the NE selected for the operation. This means that the setting has to be executed for each single
User Input Alarm of each single NE.
More detailed information concerning the user inputs and the command to change their
seriousness level are reported into the Equipment Manuals of the NMS5UX system (refer to
paragraph 1.3.3).
7.1.6
Alarm enabling/disabling
Warning. The contents of the subject paragraph are valid only for the equipment
The NMS5UX system allows enabling/disabling the alarms and/or the forwarding of the relevant
traps 74. With details, it is possible:
D
to disable the alarm; in this case the detection (or the reset) of the alarm signal is neither
recorded into the NE controller nor communicated to the supervisory program: as if the
alarm was never occurred.
to disable the forwarding of the trap; in this case the detection (or the reset) of the alarm
signal is recorded into the NE controller but it is not communicated to the supervisory
system.
Warning. If it is forwarded a Configuration Upload command to the NE, the system will
get also the alarm signals with the forwarding of the relevant trap disabled.
to enable the alarm and the forwarding of the trap; in this case the detection (or the
reset) of the alarm is recorded into the NE controller and communicated to the
supervisory system (with the forwarding of the relevant trap) that will display it into the
current alarms and into the alarm history (default condition).
Warning. The enabling/disabling of the alarm and the forwarding of the trap is independent for
each alarm, and it is local to the NE selected for the operation. This means that the setting has
to be executed for each single alarm of each single NE.
To enable/disable the alarms and to forward the traps of an equipment, use the SNMP
Equipment Severity Code command (refer to paragraph 13.3).
Then, it is possible to check the NEs that have at least an alarm/trap disabled opening the
Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window (refer to paragraph 14.1.1).
74.
The word trap means the message (in this case concerning the detection or the reset of the alarm
signal) spontaneously forwarded by the NE to the supervisory system.
The word alarm means the detection signal (or the reset one) of an alarm that is stored into the
NE controller.
109
7.
7.1.7
Ringing alarms
In some cases, into an equipment, it is possible to have an alarm activated and reset several
times within a short time range.
The instability that characterizes these alarms, called ringing alarms, produces a quantity of
signals such as to be able to saturate the network. In fact, at each activation/reset of the alarm,
the supervisory system memorizes a signal.
For such a reason, before recording an alarm signal, the system checks the stability of the signal
itself.
The criterion used to detect is an alarm is or not a ringing alarm is the following one: NMS5UX
considers an alarm as a ringing one when, during a t time range, it records that the number
of activations relevant to such a signal is higher than the thr_in threshold.
The system will not consider longer an alarm as a ringing one if, during the next t time range,
the number of the deactivations relevant to such an alarm is lower than the thr_out threshold.
Example. Lets us suppose to have set the values t=120, thr_in=3, thr_out=1. The A alarm during
the time range equal to 120 seconds, is activated and reset twice and at its third activation
(thr_in=3) the supervisory system marks it as a ringing alarm: the system will not record the
next activations/resets into the Alarm History table.
During the next time range of 120 seconds, if the A alarm is activated and reset one time only
(thr_out=1), the supervisory system will not consider longer the A alarm as a ringing one.
The superuser can change the t parameter and the thr_in and thr_out thresholds. Their
default values are: t = 120 sec., thr_in = 3, thr_out =1.
Into the Alarm History Browser window, when an alarm exits from the ringing status and the
last signal arrived from the equipment points out the alarm deactivation, the system will execute
the signal management without changes the respect to a normal signal of reset alarm: the
system correlates the alarm to the preceding signal.
While, when an alarm exits from the ringing status and the last signal arrived from the
equipment points out the alarm activation, the system will execute the management in the
following way: at first, it will transmit a signal of reset alarm that will be correlated to the preceding
signal of ringing alarm and later it will transmit a new signal of activated alarm. Into the Alarm
History Browser window, the system will display a record of reset ringing alarm followed by a
record of activated alarm.
Warning. The system does not reset the ringing condition relevant to an alarm at the forced
realignment of the alarm status.
110
7.
7.2
PERFORMANCE MONITORING
The quality of the signal concerning the telecommunication equipment manufactured by Siae
microelettronica can be checked by means of Performance Monitoring (PM) measurements.
A PM measurement consists on the recording, during a predefined time (observation time), of
the values concerning some specific control parameters 75 (BER, error counting, etc.).
Some threshold limits 76 have been assigned to such parameters.
The exceeding of the threshold limit points out a signal degradation, more or less serious. This
condition creates an alarm, that is stored and managed by the equipment and by the NMS5UX
supervisory system as any other alarm.
7.2.1
Activation (and deactivation) of the PM measurements
It is possible to activate (and to deactivate) the measurements relevant to a single equipment

at a time or simultaneously for more equipment (of the same type).
Then, for each equipment, more measurement types are usually available, it is possible to
independently activate (and deactivate) each single measurement.
The command to activate (and to deactivate) singly the PM measurements, is present into the
specific Equipment window of the NE 77.
The command to activate (and to deactivate) simultaneously the measurements for more
equipment (of the same type) is View/Modify PM Status.
Warning. the number and the type of the PM measurements and the relevant control parameters
are specific for each type of NE. For their description, refer to the relevant Equipment Manual
When it is activated a PM measurement, the main controller of the equipment starts the
memorization of the values relevant to the check parameters.
The results of the measurements are subdivided into records. Each record contains the values
recorded into a welldefined time (observation time).
75.
The parameters under examination change according to the type of equipment and
measurements supported by such an equipment. Usually, all the executed measurements refer
to ITUT Reccomandations (for instance G.828, G.826, etc.).
76.
The setting of the threshold limits can be changed by the NMS5UX user.
The setting mode of the threshold limits relevant to the control parameters is reported into the
Equipment manuals relevant to the NE types managed by the supervisory system (refer to
paragraph 1.3.3).
77.
The description of the Equipment window and the activation/deactivation procedure of the PM
measurements are reported into the equipment manuals relevant to the NE type under
examination (refer to paragraph 1.3.3).
111
7.
If at the end of the observation time the measurement has not yet deactivated, the system starts
another observation time and so on until when the measurement is stopped.
When the supervisory system makes a query to the equipment, the equipment itself will forward
to the system the records (daily and primary ones) that it has stored.
The Siae equipment group the results of the PM measurements into observation times of 15
minutes (primary records) and of 24 hours (daily records).
The observation times are not synchronized with the instant when the measurement is
activated, but they refer for the primary records, to the quarter of an hour of the solar day (00.00,
00.15, 00.30, etc) and for the daily records to the 00.00 time of the solar day.
For instance, if a measurement starts at 11.40, the first primary record will have as observation
time the period 11.40...11.45 (corresponding to the range 11.30...11.45), while the first daily
record will have as observation time the period 11.40...00.00.
For each measurement type, the equipment keeps stored the last 16 primary records
(corresponding to the last 4 hours) and the last 2 daily records (corresponding to the last 2 days).
The proceeding records are overwritten.
If an equipment has some PM measurements on progress and it is started again or turned off,
later, when it starts up again or it is turned on again, the measurements that have been activated
before the turning off, will be automatically startedup again.
the records (primary and daily), relevant to the period when the measurement has been stopped,
will result empty and if the system has reached the limit of 16 primary records and 1 daily one,
they will be overwritten on the proceeding ones.
7.2.2
Acquiring of the PM measurement results
The results relevant to the PM measurements will be get by the NMS5UX system by means of
a polling process equal to the one used for the alarm acquiring of the equipment managed with
the Legacy protocol 78 with the only difference that the alarm polling cycle is cyclically executed
while the PM querying action is executed at regular times that can change from 1 up to 4 h
(default 2 hours) 79.
The PM querying process is managed by means of a dedicated program that executes the
queries and has also the function to define which equipment have to be involved into the
querying operations.
78.
The PM query operation functions in the same way of the alarm polling as for the mode used for
the message forwarding as for the relation between PM querycommand forwarding and the
relation between PM queryLOM presence (referr to paragraph 7.1.1).
79.
The frequency used for the PM information request, executed by the supervisory centre to the
equipment, is defined by the function Tx15 minutes. By defaulf, the T value is 8 (8x15min=2h), but
it can be changed by the superuser user ranging from 4 (4x15min=1h) up to 16 (16x15min=5h).
112
7.
An equipment involved into the querying cycle has to comply with the following rules:
D
Equipment type. Not all the equipment managed by the NMS5UX system supports the
PM function. Such equipment are not involved into the PM polling cycle.
Equipment status. The system involves in the query procedure only the equipment in
connected status. The equipment in disconnected, unreachable or undefined
status are not involved in the query procedure.
Status of the PM measurements. The system involves in the query procedure only the
equipment that have at least one active measurement on progress when it is executed
the PM polling.
After a PM query, the involved equipment forwards the daily and primary records relevant to the
measurements on progress.
If the measurement has been deactivated, at the query of the NMS5UX system, the equipment
forwards all the records (primary and daily ones) calculated till that time, with the exception of
the last record.
For instance, if the measurement has been activated at 9.27 and deactivated at 18.42, the
record relevant to the observation period 9.15...9.30 is transferred to the supervisory system
in incomplete status, while the record relevant to the period 18.30...18.45 is not forwarded.
If the measurement has been activated and deactivated more times during the same
observation period, the system will forward to the NMS5UX system, the record that groups the
results concerning the last executed measurement.
For instance, if the measurement has been activated at 9.02 and deactivated at 9.07, and then
it is activated again at 9.09, the record relevant to the observation period 9.00...9.15 will contain
the results of the measurements relevant to the period 9.09...9.15, while the system will not
forward the results relevant to the period 9.02...9.07.
7.2.3
Displaying of the PM measurement results
The NMS5UX user can always display the results of the PM measurements into a specific
equipment subdivided into daily or primary records of the last 6 months.
To display the daily records, select the equipment into the map window and choose the
Performance Monitoring command (refer to paragraph 10.2.1).
To display the primary records, execute the procedure described at paragraph 10.2.2.
It is possible to display also the results of the PM measurements that have been previously
saved on tape or disk by means of the Old Performance Monitoring command (refer to
paragraph 7.2.4 and 10.3).
113
7.
7.2.4
Saving of the PM measurement results
It is possible to save the results of the PM measurements, stored into the database of the
supervisory system, on tape/disk or on file.
With details, it is possible:
D
To save on tape and/or disk all the results of the PM measurements relevant to a month,
present into the database (Pm backup command refer to paragraph 15.4).
Then, it will be possible to restore the data (Pm restore command refer to paragraph
15.5) and to display them into a proper window (Old Performance Monitoring
command refer to paragraph 10.3).
To save on file:
the results (present into the system database) relevant to a specific

measurement for all the selected NEs of the same type (Export
Performance Monitoring command refer to paragraph 10.4)
During the saving operations, it is possible to forward the file to a user, via email.
the data are saved in ASCII format, that can be detected by the great part of the text
processing programs and of the electronic sheets.
114
Section
Menu and
commands
115
116
Warning
The commands of the NMS5UX release 6.4 graphical interface, are integral
parts into the HP OpenView Windows Network Node Manager graphical
platform.
Into the Siae World map window and into all the other map windows of the
supervisory system, there are all the menus and commands provided for the
two graphical interfaces.
In this section, there is ONLY the description of the menus and of the
commands specific for the NMS5UX graphical interface (options
proceeded by the wording SIAE).
For the description and the use of the menus and of the commands of the HP
OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform, refer to the specific
documentation.
The options preceded by the wording:
D
Legacy ..., point out the commands relevant to the Siae equipment
managed with the Legacy protocol only.
Warning. The Legacy... commands are present into the menus only
if the software modules for the management of the Legacy
equipment have been installed.
SNMP ..., point out the commands relevant to the Siae equipment
managed with the SNMP protocol only.
The commands with the label that does not point out the Legacy or SNMP
wording, are relevant to all the Siae equipment.
Some commands described here below are optional ones. Therefore, such
commands can be absent into the specific menu of its own NMS5UX system.
117
118
8.
MAP SIAE MAP
The Map Siae Map menu contains the following commands:

D
Import/Export, command allows the following operations:

D
to save on file the objects present into the open map or into a container of the map.
to open a file that contains the memorised objects of a map (or of a container) and
to import such objects into the currently open map.
Warning. The command is available for the superuser, privileged and advanced
user profile only.
D
Change Map, it allows changing the map.

Warning. The command is available for the superuser and privileged user profile
only.
Here below there is the description of the commands.

For each command, it is pointed out the access mode to the system (Read Only, ReadWrite)
and the user profile (Entry, Normal,...) necessary to be able to use the command itself.
If the command opens a window that contains some parameters, the system specifies also the
type of the operation that can be executed. The wording Read points out that it is possible to
check the parameters; the wording Write that it is possible to set or to change them.
119
8.
MAP SIAE MAP
8.1
IMPORT/EXPORT
System access
User profile
Read Only, ReadWrite

Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
The Import/Export command allows the following operations:

D
to save on file the objects present into the open map or into a container of the map.
to open a file that contains the memorised objects of a map (or of a container) and to
import such objects into the currently open map.
8.1.1
To save on a file the objects of a map
1.
Start up the supervisory system and open the map to be saved.
2.
Into the Root window, select the Siae Word object.
3.
Select the Map SIAE Map Import/Export option.

The system displays the Export Import SubMap window.
The SubMap Selection field points out the name of the selected map.
4.
Select the Export pushbutton.

The system displays the Select File window.
5.
Type into the Selection box, the name of the file with the extension eim (for instance
map01.eim), into which the user wants to save the map.
Warning. The system saves the file into a default folder: the user can change this
setting.
6.
Choose the OK pushbutton.

Into the Export Import SubMap window (area positioned under the pushbuttons), the
system displays a record for each object memorised into the file.
With details, the system points out for each object, the following data: type (container
or symbol), logical address/name, saving result (No error, Error).
8.1.2
1.
120
To save on file the objects of a container

Start up the supervisory system and open the map that contains the container to be
saved.
8.
2.
Select the container.
3.
MAP SIAE MAP

The SubMap Selection field points out the name of the selected container.
4.
Select the Export pushbutton.

5.
Type into the Selection box, the name of the file with the extension eim (for instance
map02.eim), into which the user wants to save the map.
Warning. The system saves the file into a default folder: the user can change this
setting.
6.

system displays a record for each object memorised into the file.
or symbol), logic address/name, saving result (No error, Error).
8.1.3
To import into a map the objects memorised on a file
1.
Start up the supervisory system and open the map where the objects memorised on
the file have to be imported (according to the procedure shown into paragraph 8.1.1
or 8.1.2).
2.
Into the Root window, select the Siae Word object.
3.

The SubMap Selection field points out the name of the selected map.
4.
If the user wants that the objects present into the file replace the ones present into the
open map, he has to activate the Clear SubMap box.
The user has not to activate the box, if he wants to add the object present into the file
to the ones present into the open map. The system does not add the identical objects
present into the same container.
5.
Select the Import pushbutton.

6.
Select into the Files area, the desired file with eim extension.
Warning. The system suggests the files present into the default folder. If it is necessary,
change the path.
121
8.
MAP SIAE MAP
7.

system displays a record for each object imported into the map.
or symbol), logic address/name, saving result (No error, Error, Symbol already present
in submap).
8.1.4
To import into a container the objects memorised on a file
1.
Start up the supervisory system and open the map that contains the container where
the objects memorised on the file have to be imported (according to the procedure
shown into paragraph 8.1.1 or 8.1.2).
2.
Select the container.
3.

The SubMap Selection field points out the name of the selected container.
4.
If the user wants that the objects present into the file replace the ones present into the
container, he has to activate the Clear SubMap box.
The user has not to activate the box, if he wants to add the object present into the file
to the ones present into the selected container. The system does not add the identical
objects.
5.
Select the Import pushbutton.

6.
Select into the Files area, the desired file with eim extension.
Warning. The system suggests the files present into the default folder. If it is necessary,
change the path.
7.

system displays a record for each object imported into the container.
or symbol), logic address/name, saving result (No error, Error, Symbol already present
in submap).
122
8.
8.2
MAP SIAE MAP
CHANGE MAP
System access
User profile

Privileged, Superuser
The Change Map command allows closing the currently open map and opening another one.
To execute such an operation:

1.
Select the Map SIAE Map Change Map command.

The system displays the Available Maps window that list the available maps. With
details:
Map name column points out the map name.
Permission column points out the available access type. With details:
Read/Write wording points out that the operator can open the map with
Read/Write or Read Only access.
Read wording points out that the operator can open the map only with Read
Only access (the Read/Write access has already been seized).
Comment column points out some additional notes. The (Current Map) wording
points out the currently open map.
2.
Select one map from the list.
3.
If the operator has selected a map with the following access:
Read/Write, select the following pushbutton:
Open Map READ/WRITE to open the map with Read Write access.
Open Map READ/ONLY to open the map with Read Only access.
Read Only, select the Open Map READ/ONLY pushbutton to open the map with
Read Only access.
The Open Map READ/WRITE pushbutton is not available.
At the selection of the pushbutton, the system automatically closes the map and
opens the new one.
4.
At the displaying of the NMS5UX Login window, type the name (Login box) and the
access code (Password box) relevant to its own user.
5.
123
8.
124
MAP SIAE MAP
9.
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
The Edit Siae Objects menu contains the following commands:

D
Add, it creates objects (Network Element, Container, Radio Link 80, Workstation,
Communication Server Board) 81 for the graphical displaying of the network into the
map windows.
Modify/View, it displays and/or changes the characteristics of the objects (Network

Element, Container, Radio Link 80, Workstation, Communication Server Board).
Delete, it deletes an objects from the graphical displaying of the network.
Arrange Symbols, it align in vertical or horizontal direction the selected symbols.
Map Realignment, it allows creating, into the currently open map, the copy of a NE,
WS, CSB object present into another map.
Generate Info for WEB, allows to check the database information necessary to the
Siae RAN (Remote Access Nms5ux) application 82.
Warning. The command is OPTIONAL.
Warning. The above listed commands are necessary to display graphically the involved
equipment network into the maps and to provide, to the NMS5UX system, all the information
necessary for the supervisory operations and for the monitoring of each single equipment.
Before use such commands, the operator has to read chapter 5.3 that points out the modes to
correctly and quickly configure his own supervisory system.

80.
Optional command.
81.
The NMS5UX system is equipped with a series of predefined objects. Such objects are the base
elements that the user will have to use to draw his own network inside the map.
82.
For more information, refer to the specific Siae documentation.
125
9.
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
9.1
ADD
System access
User profile
ReadWrite
The Add command allows creating an object into the activated map window.
The command choice opens a menu that contains the following options:
D
Container, it creates a Container object as pointed out at paragraph 9.1.1.

The Container objects are used as containers for equipment or for other containers.
The system does not couple any particular meaning to these objects. They have been
inserted to help the user with the network organization in such a way to be able to detect
quickly the equipment.
In fact, the Container objects allow having a better overall view of the network because
they allow grouping the network elements according to geographical criteria or simply
according to logic ones, for instance they group equipment that belong all to the same
department or are all positioned into the same area.
It is possible to create all the desired Container objects.
Network Element, it creates a Network Element (NE) object as pointed out at

paragraph 9.1.2.
The NE object need for the identification of the network telecommunication system:
SDH Radio, PDH Radio, etc.
The command choice opens an additional menu. According to the protocol that
manages the equipment (SNMP or Legacy) and according to the equipment type (an
equipment really present into the network or a virtual one) select the proper command.
The maximum number of NE objects that can be created depends on the code word
requested by the customer.
Radio Link for Scoreboards, it creates a Radio Link object as it is pointed out into
the paragraph 9.1.3.
The Radio Link objects need to represent graphically a logic connection between two
NE objects of the same type (for instance two SDH Radio objects or two PDH Radio
ones).
The system points out the list of the created Radio Link objects into the Radio Link
Brower window (refer to paragraph 15.8).
It is possible to create all the desired Radio Link objects.
Warning. The Radio Link for Scoreboards command is OPTIONAL.
Legacy Workstation, it creates a Workstation (WS) object as pointed out at

paragraph 9.1.4.
The WS objects need for the identification of the local machine (workstation and
server) on which it is loaded the NMS5UX system and of all the workstations and/or
servers that can be present into the network.
126
9.
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
When the operator creates a WS object, the system automatically creates the
corresponding WS Port objects into the relevant [WS] window. Each WS Port object
is characterized by the number of the port displayed at the bottom of the icon.
Warning. The creation of the WS object is MANDATORY if into the network there are
some equipment managed with Legacy protocol and physically connected with the
ports of the WS (refer to paragraph 5.1.3 and 5.3.2).
It is possible to create all the desired WS objects.
Warning. The subject command is present into the menu only if the software modules
for the management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
D
Communication Server Board, it creates a Communication Server Board (CSB)

object as pointed out at paragraph 9.1.5.
The CSB objects need for the identification of the CommServerS equipment and of
the CS Boards present into the CommServerF equipment.
When the operator creates a CSB object, the system automatically creates the
corresponding CSB Port (also called CSP) objects into the relevant CSB map window
(each window contains 7 CSB Port objects numbered from 2 up to 8). Each CSB Port
object is characterized by the number of the port displayed at the base of the icon.
Warning. The creation of the CSB object is MANDATORY if into the network there are
some equipment managed with Legacy protocol and physically connected with the
ports of the ports of the CSB (refer to paragraph 5.1.3 and 5.3.2).
It is possible to create all the desired CSB objects.
Warning. After its creation the symbol of an object is displayed ONLY into the map
actually open (the map where it has been created). If the user wants that the new object
is present into two different maps, he has to create the relevant symbol into both maps.
then, if the created symbol (NE, WS or CSB type) is already present into a OpenView map,
it will automatically get the status of the already existing object.
For instance, if into the map A there is the symbol NE1 in connected status, at the creation of
the symbol NE1 (same IP or physical address) into the map B, the symbol will result connected
because it gets the status of the twin symbol.
9.1.1
Add Container
This command allows creating a Container object, as described here below:

1.
Open the window map where it has to be created the new Container object.
Warning. It is possible to create every type of container into every map window with
127
9.
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
the exception of the [WS] and [CSB] windows 83.

2.
Open the Add Container menu.

The system displays the Add Container Symbol window.
3.
Into the Label text box, type the name to be assigned to the object (alphanumeric string
with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 30 characters).
The name will be displayed under the object symbol and will constitute the name of the
map window that is opened at the double selection of the symbol.
4.
Into the Type box, select the container type to be created among the following options:
Subnetwork, Station, Substation or Communication Server.
5.
Into the Comment box, type possible information relevant to the object (max 500
characters).
The setting of this parameter is not mandatory.
6.

The system displays the new symbol into the New Object Holding Area of the activated
map window. Move the icon on every point of the window.
9.1.2
Add Network Element
The Add Network Element command allows creating a Network Element object into the
activated map window.
Its choice opens an additional menu that contains the following options:
D
SNMP Managed, it creates a Network Element object managed with the SNMP
protocol (refer to paragraph 9.1.2.1).
Warning. Use this command when the NE object to be created has a corresponding
equipment present into the network.
SNMP Managed (Virtual), it creates a virtual Network Element object managed with
SNMP protocol (refer to paragraph 9.1.2.2).
Warning. Use this command when the NE object to be created does not have a
corresponding equipment present into the network.
Legacy Protocol Managed, it creates a Network Element object managed with

Legacy protocol (refer to paragraph 9.1.2.3).
Warning. Use this command when the NE object to be created has a corresponding
equipment present into the network.
83.
128
Legacy Protocol Managed (Virtual), it creates a virtual Network Element object

managed with Legacy protocol (refer to paragraph 9.1.2.4).
The map windows that are opened respectively selecting a WS object and a CSB one.
9.
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
Warning. Use this command when the NE object to be created does not have a
corresponding equipment present into the network.
Warning. A NE is not automatically managed by the NMS5UX system at the creation of the
relevant object, but it is necessary to forward a connection command (refer to paragraphs 6.2
and 16.2.1). The only exception is if the created NE is already present into a OpenView map
in connected status; in this case, the NE, just after its connection, will automatically get the
condition of the same symbol present into the other map.
9.1.2.1 Add Network Element SNMP Managed

This command allows creating a NE object managed with SNMP protocol, as described here
below:
1.
Open the map window where it has to be created the new object.
Warning. It is possible to create a NE object into every map window with the exception
of the [WS] and [CSB] windows 83.
2.
Open the Add Network Element SNMP Managed menu.

The system displays the Add Equipment window.
3.
Into the IP Address text box, type the IP address to be assigned to the NE.
If the user wants to create a PMP object, he has to type into the IP Address box of the
Proxy interface used for the connection to the desired master station.
Warning. After the NE creation, the value can not be changed.
The IP address set into this box has to CORRESPOND to the IP address of the NE,
locally defined by means of the LCT. If the addresses are not the same ones, it will not
be possible to forward any command to the NE itself.
It is not possible to assign the same value to two different NEs also if they are two
different type ones.
Warning. If into an OpenView map there is already a NE object with the same IP
Address set into the field, the system will automatically point out, into all the other fields
of the Add Equipment window, the values assigned to the same object present into the
other map.
4.
Into the Logical Address text box, type the logic address (alphanumeric string with
maximum 32 characters) to be assigned to the new NE.
Warning. After the creation of the NE, the value can not be changed.
The logic address will be displayed under the symbol of the NE.
129
9.
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
It is possible to assign, as logic address, the same value assigned to the IP Address
parameter, while it is not possible to assign the same logic address to two NEs.
5.
ONLY if the new NE is inserted into a OSI network 84, activate the Osi Address box
and set the GOSIP (Government OSI Profile) address of the equipment, as pointed
out in the GOSIP address of the SNMP object paragraph.
6.
Into the Type box, select the NE SNMP type to be created among the available ones
(refer to Fig. 9.1).
In the area, there will be present only the types of SNMP NE that can be managed by
ones NMS5UX system.
Warning. After the creation of the NE, such a value can not be changed.
G series Radio with

SNMP interface
SDH N+1
Radio
AL series
Radio
ADMC
Multiplexer
ELFO
Radio
ADM1
Multiplexer
EXP 63
Multiplexer
US series
Radio
Point MultiPoint
system
ALS series
Radio
IPBOX
equipment
Fig. 9.1
7.
ONLY if the equipment is managed by Proxy Agent and the Siae Proxy Agent
application is installed, select the Proxy Address pushbutton.
At the choice of the pushbutton, the system displays the Proxy Address window.
8.
Type into the Proxy NE IP Address box, the address used by the Proxy Agent to
acknowledge the equipment.
9.
Only if the following parameters are different from the default ones configured by the
system administrator (see manual NMS5UX System Administrator), type in the box:
Spec. Primary Trap Dest. text box, the address of the machine to which the
Proxy Agent forwards the traps coming from the equipment.
Spec. Secondary Trap Dest. text box, the address of an additional machine
to which the Proxy Agent forwards the traps coming from the equipment.
10. Press the Done pushbutton to close the window.

11. Into the Comment box, type additional information (max. 500 characters).
84.
130
The OSI network is a network where it is used, as communication protocol between the network
elements, also the OSI (Open System Interconnection) protocol.
9.
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
The new symbol is displayed into the New Object Holding Area box of the activated
map. Move the icon on a generic point of the window.
GOSIP address of the SNMP object

The GOSIP Address, according to the GOSIP V2, is composed by two parts: IDP (Initial Domain
Part) and DSP (Domain Specific Part).
Each part is composed by parameters.
The values of these parameters, represented by one or more bytes, can be changed.
Each byte is represented by means of two characters that are the exadecimal value of the two
byte nibbles as pointed out into Tab. 9.1.
Tab. 9.1
Byte
Default
Changeable
number
value
by the user
AFI (Authority and Format Identifier)
Yes
IDI (Initial Domain Identifier)
Ver (Version)
Auth (Authority)
Reserved
Domain (Routing Domain)
Area
System ID (Network Element Identification)
Sel (Selector)
1
3
2
2
2
6
1
39
Country
Code
82
1D
Part
IDP
DSP
Parameter
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
To change the AFI, IDI, VER, Auth, Domain, Area parameters (default part of the GOSIP
Address):
1.
Press the Setup Default button present into the box of the Add Equipment window.
The system opens the Gosip Default Option window.
2.
To change the AFI, IDI, VER, Auth parameters, type, into the relevant boxes, the value
of the corresponding byte/s.
3.
To change the Domain parameter, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and
select the desired value from the list.
To add a value to the list:
Press the Add pushbutton.

The system displays the Domain Settings window.
Into the Label box, type a name for the domain under examination.
Into the Hex value boxes, type the values of the bytes that represent the
domain and press OK.
To remove a value form the list:
131
9.
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
4.
Select the value to be removed and press the Remove pushbutton.
To change the Area parameter, press the arrow on the side of the box and select the
desired value into the list.
To add or to remove a value from the list, execute the procedures pointed out for the
Domain parameter.
5.
Press OK.
To change the System ID parameter:

1.
Press the Settings pushbutton present into the Add Equipment window.
The system opens the Settings window.
2.
Type into the boxes the value of the 6 bytes that compose the System ID and press
OK.
Into the text box on the side of the Settings pushbutton, the system points out the
value of the set System ID.
9.1.2.2 Add Network Element SNMP Managed (Virtual)

This command allows creating a virtual NE object managed with the SNMP protocol, as
described here below:
1.
Open the map window where the user wants to create the new virtual NE object.
Warning. It is possible to create a virtual NE object into every map window with the
exceptions of the [WS] and [CSB] windows 83.
2.
Open the Add Network Element SNMP Managed (Virtual) menu.

The system displays the Add Virtual Equipment window.
3.
Into the Logical Address text box, type the logic address (alphanumeric string with max.
32 characters) to be assigned to the new virtual NE.
Warning. After the NE creation, such a value can not be changed.
The logic address will be displayed under the symbol of the equipment.
It is not possible to assign the same logic address to two different NEs.
4.
Into the Type box, select the type of the virtual NE managed with the SNMP protocol
to be created among the available ones (refer to Fig. 9.1).
Warning. After the creation of the NE, this value can not be changed.
5.
Select the Additional Info, pushbutton to insert some information relevant to the
created equipment.
The choice of the pushbutton opens the Additional Info window where the user can
insert some information respectively into the Additional info #1, ... #2 e ... #3 boxes.
Press Done to close the window.
132
9.
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS

6.
Into the Comment box, type additional information (max. 500 characters).
7.

map window. Move the icon on a generic point of the window.
9.1.2.3 Add Network Element Legacy Protocol Managed

This command allows creating a NE object managed with Legacy protocol, as described here
below:
1.
2.
Open the Add Network Element Legacy Protocol Managed menu.

The system displays the Add Equipment window.
3.
Into the Physical Address text box, type the physical address comprised between 2 and
60000 (the value 1 is not allowed), to be assigned to the new NE.
Choosing the Auto pushbutton, the system automatically sets as value of the
parameter the first available address. It is possible also to set a value into the Physical
Address field and then to press the Auto pushbutton; in this case, the system will
automatically display the first available address that follows the set value.
The physical address set into this field has to CORRESPOND to the NE address,
locally defined by means of the LOM. If the addresses are not the same one, it will not
be possible to forward any command to the NE itself.
It is not possible to assign the same address to two different NEs also if they are two
different type ones.
Warning. If into an OpenView map there is already a NE object with the same physical
of the Add Equipment window, the values assigned to the same object present into the
other map.
4.
Into the Logical Address text box, type the logic address (alphanumeric string with
maximum 32 characters) to be assigned to the new NE.
The logic address will be displayed under the symbol of the equipment.
133
9.
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
It is possible to assign, as logic address, the same value assigned to the Physical
Address parameter, while it is not possible to assign the same logic address to two
NEs.
5.
Into the CS/WS Ip Address text box, type the IP address of the Communication Server
Board or of the Workstation to which it is (or it will be) connected the Legacy NE.
The box under examination is equipped with a contextual menu (accessible by means
of the R.H. pushbutton of the mouse) that lists all the addresses of the created WSs
and CSBs, then well known by the system (connected and not connected ones).
The Local Ip Address option corresponds to the address of the local machine where
it is loaded the NMS5UX system. The choice of an address automatically sets the
CS/WS Ip Address box.
Warning. The setting of this parameter is not mandatory but, if it is not set or it is not
correctly set, it will not be possible to forward any command (Connect, Line Test, etc.)
toward the NE under examination.
6.
Into the CS/WS Port text box, type the number of the port of the Communication Server
Board or of the Workstation to which it is (or it will be) connected the NE.
7.
Into the Type box, select the NE type to be created among the available ones (refer
to Fig. 9.2).
In the area, there will be present only the types of Legacy NE that can be managed by
ones NMS5UX system.
Multiplexer
FAM e
CFAM
Multiplexer
OLTME
Radio serie G
con interfaccia
Legacy
Radio serie B
(Standard)
Fig. 9.2
8.
ONLY if the equipment is managed by Proxy Agent and the Siae Proxy Agent
application is installed, select the Proxy Address pushbutton.
Warning. The Proxy Agent manages only G series Radio equipment with Legacy
interface.
At the choice of the pushbutton, the system displays the Proxy Address window.
9.
Type into the Proxy NE IP Address box, the address used by the Proxy Agent to
acknowledge the equipment.
10. Only if the following parameters are different from the default ones configured by the
system administrator (see manual NMS5UX System Administrator), type in the box:
134
Spec. Primary Trap Dest. text box, the address of the machine to which the
Proxy Agent forwards the traps coming from the equipment.
9.
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
Spec. Secondary Trap Dest. text box, the address of an additional machine
to which the Proxy Agent forwards the traps coming from the equipment.
11. Press the Done pushbutton to close the window.

12. Into the Comment box, type additional information (max. 500 characters).
map. Move the icon on a generic point of the window.
9.1.2.4 Add Network Element Legacy Protocol Managed (Virtual)

This command allows creating a virtual NE object managed with the Legacy protocol, as
1.
2.
Open the Add Network Element Legacy Protocol Managed (Virtual) menu.
The system displays the Add Virtual Equipment window.
3.
Into the Logical Address text box, type the logic address (alphanumeric string with max.
32 characters) to be assigned to the new virtual NE.
The value will be displayed under the symbol of the equipment.
It is not possible to assign the same logic address to two different NEs.
4.
Into the Type box, select the type of the virtual NE managed with the Legacy protocol
to be created among the available ones (refer to Fig. 9.2).
5.
Select the Additional Info pushbutton to insert some information relevant to the
created equipment.
The choice of the pushbutton opens the Additional Info window where the user can
insert some information respectively into the Additional info #1, ... #2 e ... #3 boxes.
Press Done to close the window.
6.
7.
135
9.
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
9.1.3
Add Radio Link for Scoreboards
Warning. The Radio Link for Scoreboards command is optional.

This option allows creating a Radio Link object according to the following procedure:
1.
Open the map window where it has to be created the new Radio Link object.
Warning. It is possible to create every type of Radio Link object into every map window
with the exception of the [WS] and [CSB] windows 83.
2.
Select the two NE objects of the same type (for instance two SDH radio objects or two
PDH radio ones) between which the connection has to be traced.
Warning. If the user selects one object only or more than two ones, the option is not
available.
3.
Open the Add Radio Link for Scoreboards menu.

The system displays the Add Link window.
4.
Into the Label text box, type the name to be assigned to the connection (alphanumeric
string composed by a minimum of 1 character and a maximum of 30 ones).
It is possible to assign the same label to more connections also if they are connections
of different type.
The setting of this attribute is not a mandatory one.
5.
Into the Connection Type area, select the line type (broken line, dot line, etc.) to be
connected to the link.
6.
Into the Comment area, type possible information (500 character maximum).
The setting of this parameter is not a mandatory one.
7.
9.1.4
Add LegacyWorkstation
This command allows creating a Workstation (WS) object, as it is described here below:
1.
Open the map window it has to be created the new WS object.

Warning. It is possible to create a Workstation object into every map window with the
exception of the [WS] and [CSB] windows 83.
136
9.
2.
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
open the Add LegacyWorkstation menu.

The system displays the Add Workstation window 85.
3.
Into the IP Address text box, type the IP address of the Workstation.
Warning. After the creation of the WS, this value can not be changed.
It is not possible to assign the same IP Address to two different Workstations.
Warning. If into an OpenView map there is already a WS object with the same IP
of the Add Workstation window, the values assigned to the same object present into
the other map.
4.
Into the Name text box, type the name to be assigned to the object (alphanumeric string
with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 30 characters).
It is not possible to assign the same name to two different Workstations.
The name will be displayed under the object symbol and it will constitute the name of
the [WS] map window that is opened at the double selection of the symbol.
5.
Define the total number of the serial ports equipped with the Workstation moving the
cursor Number of Serial Ports: along the horizontal bar.
For each different position of the cursor, the system displays a different number of
ports. It can be set a value between 1 and 100 (default value 8).
Warning. After the creation of the WS, this value can not be changed.
6.
Into the Comment box, type possible information relevant to the WS (max 500
characters). The setting of this parameter is not mandatory.
7.

Warning. A WS is not automatically managed by the NMS5UX system at the creation of the
and 16.10.1).
The only exception is if the created WS is already present into a OpenView map in connected
status; in this case, the WS, just after its connection, acquires the condition of the same symbol
present into the other map.
85.
Warning. During the creation of the first WS, if the operator types, into the Name box, the name
of the WS (assigned by the System Administrator root), the supervisory system automatically
sets the relevant value into the IP Address field.
The name IP address correspondance is obtained by the etc/hosts file.
137
9.
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
9.1.5
Add Communication Server Board
This command allows creating a Communication Server Board object (CSB), as described here
below:
1.
Open the map window it has to be created the new CSB object.
Warning. It is possible to create a CSB object into every map window with the exception
It is advisable to create the CSB objects into the Communication Server container map
window.
2.
Open the Add Communication Server Board menu.

the system displays the Add CS Board window.
3.
Into the IP Address text box, type the IP address of the CSB.
Warning. After the creation of the CSB, the IP address can not be changed.
It is not possible to assign the same IP Address to two different CSBs 86.
The IP Address will be displayed under the object symbol and it will constitute the name
of the map window that is opened at the double selection of the symbol.
Warning. If into an OpenView map there is already a CSB object with the same IP
of the Add CS Board window, the values assigned to the same object present into the
other map.
4.
ONLY if the new object refers to a CommServerS inserted into an OSI network 84,
activate the Osi Address box and set the GOSIP address (Government OSI Profile)
of the equipment, as it is pointed out into the paragraph GOSIP address of the SNMP
object (refer to paragraph 9.1.2.1).
5.
6.

Warning. A CSB is not automatically managed by the NMS5UX system at the creation of the
and 16.9.1).
The only exception is if the created CSB is already present into a OpenView map in connected
status; in this case, the CSB, just after its connection, acquires the condition of the same symbol
present into the other map.
86.
138
For the CommServerF equipment, it is not possible to assign the same address to two different
CS Boards, also if they have been inserted into different CommServerF ones.
9.
9.2
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
MODIFY/VIEW
System access
User profile
Reading Read Only, ReadWrite

Reading/Writing ReadWrite
Reading Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
Reading/Writing Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
The Modify/View command allows displaying and possibly changing the values of the
parameters relevant to the selected object.
Warning. If the same object has been created into two different maps, at the changing of the
parameter values of such an object into a map, the system automatically CHANGES the values
of the parameters relevant to the same object into the other map.
The choice of the Modify/View command opens a menu where there are the following options:
Container, Network Element, Radio Link for Scoreboards 80, LegacyWorkstation,
Communication Server Board, that are described into the following paragraphs.
Warning. The values of some parameters can nor be changed. If the operator has to change
such parameters, it is advisable to remove the object and then to create it again assigning the
new values to the parameters.
9.2.1
Modify/View Container
This command allows displaying/changing the parameters of the selected Container object, as
1.
Select the Container object into the map window.
2.
Open the Modify/View Container menu.

The system displays the View/Modify Container Symbol window.
3.
It is possible to change the Label, Type, Comment parameters.

The descriptions and the setting modes of the parameters are the same ones pointed
out at paragraph 9.1.1.
4.
139
9.
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
9.2.2
Modify/View Network Element
This command allows displaying/changing the parameters of the selected NE object, as

1.
Select the NE object into the map window.
2.
Open the Modify/View Network Element menu.

The system displays the View/Modify Equipment window.
3.
If it has been selected a:

D
NE managed with the SNMP protocol, it is always possible to change the Proxy
Address, Comment parameters while the Osi Address parameter can be changed
ONLY if the NE is in disconnected status (brown icon).
Warning. It is not possible to change the Ip Address, Logical Address, Type
parameters.
The description and the setting mode of the parameters are the same ones
pointed out at paragraph 9.1.2.1.
virtual NE managed with SNMP protocol, it is possible to change the Additional

Info, Comment parameter.
Warning. It is not possible to change the Logical Address,Type parameters.
NE managed with Legacy protocol, it is always possible to change the

Comment parameter, while the CS/WS Ip Address, CS/WS Port, Proxy Address
parameters can be changed ONLY if the NE is in disconnected status (brown
icon).
Warning. It is not possible to change the Physical Address, Logical Address, Type
parameters.
Virtual NE managed with Legacy protocol, it is possible to change the

Additional Info, Comment parameter.
Warning. It is not possible to change the Logical Address, Type parameters.
4.
140
9.
9.2.3
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
Modify/View Radio Link for Scoreboards
Warning. The Radio Link for Scoreboards command is an optional one.

This option allows displaying/changing the parameters of the selected Radio Link object, as it
is described here below:
1.
Into the map window, select the Radio Link object.
2.
Open the Modify/View Radio Link for Scoreboards menu.

The system displays the View/Modify Link window.
3.
It is possible to change the Label, Connection Type, Comment parameters.

The description and the setting mode of the parameters are the same ones pointed out
at paragraph 9.1.3.
4.
9.2.4
Modify/View LegacyWorkstation
This command allows displaying/changing the parameters relevant to the selected Workstation
object, as described here below:
1.
Select the Workstation object into the map window.
2.
Open the Modify/View LegacyWorkstation menu.

The system displays the View/Modify Workstation window.
3.
It is possible to change the Name, Comment parameters.

at paragraph 9.1.4.
Warning. It is not possible to change the IP Address, Number of Serial Ports
parameters.
4.
9.2.5
Modify/View Communication Server Board
This command allows displaying/changing the parameters relevant to the selected

Communication Server Board object, as described here below:
141
9.
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
1.
Select the CSB object into the map window.
2.
Open the Modify/View Communication Server Board menu.

The system displays the View/Modify CS Board window.
3.
It is always possible to change the Comment parameter, while the Osi Address
parameter can be changed ONLY if the CS Board (CommServerS) is in disconnected
status (brown icon).
at paragraph 9.1.5.
Warning. It is not possible to change the IP Address parameter.
The Edition parameter points out the edition number of the firmware that manages the
CS Board. This value is spontaneously forwarded by the equipment controller during
the first connection. It is not possible to change it.
4.
142
9.
9.3
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
DELETE
System access
User profile
ReadWrite
The Delete command allows deleting the selected object.

Warning. This operation causes the removal of the symbol relevant to the actually open map.
Then, if the object is not present into other maps, this operation causes also the deleting of the
relevant data from the database: the object is not longer managed by the NMS5UX system.
The choice of the Delete command opens a menu that contains the following options:
Container, Network Element, Radio Link for Scoreboards 80, LegacyWorkstation,
Communication Server Board, that are described into the following paragraphs.
9.3.1
Delete Container
The command under examination deletes the selected Container object.

At the choice of the subject command, the system displays a confirmation window. Choose the
OK pushbutton to execute the operation.
Warning. If objects (NE, WS, etc.) are present in the Container map window (that is opened by
the double selection of the symbol), a warning message is displayed. The choice of the OK
pushbutton deletes the container and all the contained objects.
9.3.2
Delete Network Element
The command under examination deletes the selected Network Element object.
At its choice, the system displays a confirmation window. Choose the OK pushbutton to
execute the operation.
The operator can executed the subject operation also pressing the R.H. side pushbutton of the
mouse and selecting the SIAE Delete command.
Warning. If the NE object is present into a single map, it is possible to delete it only if it is in
disconnected status (brown icon).
On the contrary, if the same NE is present into more maps, it is possible to delete the symbol
also if it is in connected status, with the exception of the last copy for which it is applicable the
above pointed out rule: it can be deleted only if it is in disconnected status.
143
9.
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
9.3.3
Delete Radio Link for Scoreboards
Warning. The Radio Link for Scoreboards command is optional.

The command under examination deletes the selected Radio Link object.
Warning. The system automatically delete a connection when it is removed one of its two
coupled symbols.
9.3.4
Delete LegacyWorkstation
The command under examination deletes the selected Workstation (WS) object.
Warning. The subject command is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
Warning. If the WS object is present into a single map, it is possible to delete it only if it is in
disconnected status (brown icon) and if into the [WS] map window (that is opened after the
double selection of the symbol) there are not WS Port object in open status (green icon).
On the contrary, if the same WS is present into more maps, it is possible to delete the symbol
also if it is in connected status and if, into the [WS] window, there are WS Port in open status,
with the exception of the last copy for which it is applicable the above pointed out rule: it can
be deleted the WS only if it is in disconnected status and if there are not, into the [WS] window,
WS Port objects in open status.
9.3.5
Delete Communication Server Board
The command under examination deletes the selected Communication Server Board (CSB)
object.
Warning. If the CSB object is present into a single map, it is possible to delete it only if it is in
disconnected status (brown icon) and if into the map window (that is opened after the double
selection of the symbol) there are not CSB Port object in open status (green icon).
144
9.
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
On the contrary, if the same CSB is present into more maps, it is possible to delete the symbol
also if it is in connected status and if, into the window, there are CSB Port in open status, with
the exception of the last copy for which it is applicable the above pointed out rule: it can be
deleted the CSB only if it is in disconnected status and if there are not, into the CSB window,
CSB Port objects in open status.
145
9.
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
9.4
ARRANGE SYMBOLS
System access
User profile
ReadWrite
Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
The Arrange Symbols command allows aligning the selected symbols.

The selection of the subject command opens a menu that contains the following options:
D
Horizontal Alignment, it aligns in horizontal direction the selected symbol as it is

described into the paragraph 9.4.1.
Vertical Alignment, it aligns in vertical direction the selected symbol as it is described

into the paragraph 9.4.2.
9.4.1
Arrange Symbols Horizontal Alignment
The subject command allows aligning horizontally the symbols selected into the map window
as it is described here below:
1.
Select two or more symbols.
2.
Select the Arrange Horizontal Alignment command.

The system aligns horizontally the selected symbols.
9.4.2
Arrange Symbols Vertical Alignment
The subject command allows aligning vertically the symbols selected into the map window as
it is described here below:
1.
Select two or more symbols.
2.
Select the Arrange Vertical Alignment command.

The system aligns vertically the selected symbols.
146
9.
9.5
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
MAP REALIGNMENT
System access
User profile
ReadWrite
Superuser, Privileged
The Map Realignment option allows the following operations:

D
to compare the Network Element, Workstation and Communication Server Board

objects present into the open map with respect to the ones present into one of the other
created maps.
to create, into the currently open map, the copy of a NE, WS or CBS object present
into another map (refer to paragraph 9.5.1).
to check the Network Element, Workstation and Communication Server Board objects
present into the open map and that do not have any other copy into another map.
9.5.1
To create, into the open map, the copy of a NE, WS or CBS object
present into another map
1.
Into the map window, select the container where the object has to be created.
2.
Select the Map Realignment option.

The system displays the Map Realignment window.
3.
Select the Map Select Map option.

The system displays the Map Selection window.
4.
Open the popup menu and select the map that contains the object to be created into
the currently open map.
5.
Press OK.
Into the Map Realignment window (refer to Fig. 9.3), the system displays the name of
the map selected by the user, and into the lower Equipment, Workstations, C.S. Boards
areas, it points out the equipment present into the selected map but that are not present
into the currently open map.
6.
Select the object to be created.
7.
Press the corresponding Create pushbutton.

The system displays a confirmation window.
8.

Into the container selected at step 1, the system creates a copy of the object.
147
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
9.
Menu bar
(1)
NE, WS and CBS objects present into the

map selected by the user, but not present into
the currently open one (2)
Name of the
map selected
by the user
NE, WS and CBS objects present

into the open map and that do not
have any other copy into other
maps (3)
(1) For the description of the menus and of the relevant options, refer to paragraph
9.5.2.
(2) At the opening of the window, these areas are empty.
(3) If the user selects one object and press the relevant Highlight pushbutton, the
system points out the corresponding symbol inside the open map.
The system marks the object changing the colour of the symbol name: it switches
from black with white background (normal condition) to white with black
background.
Fig. 9.3
148
9.
9.5.2
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
Map Realignment Window Menu bar
Into the menu bar relevant to the Map Realignment window, the system provides the menus and
the commands described here below.
9.5.2.1 File Menu

"
Refresh Info. It executes a new reading of the database and updates the information
present into the window.
"
Exit. It closes the window.
9.5.2.2 Map Menu

"
Select Map.It allows selecting the map for which the user wants to display the CNE, WS,
CSB objects into the Map Realignment window.
Warning. Into the Map Realignment window, the system displays only the equipment
present into the selected map but that are not present into the currently open one.
9.5.2.3 Help Menu

This menu opens the online manual.
149
9.
9.6
EDIT SIAE OBJECTS
GENERATE INFO FOR WEB
System access
User profile
ReadWrite
Superuser, Privileged, Advanced, Normal, Entry
Warning. The command is OPTIONAL.

The Generate Info for WEB command, allows to check the database information necessary
to the Siae RAN (Remote Access Nms5ux) application.
This operation realignment the information between the NMS5UX and RAN applications.
150
10
10.
PERFORMANCE SIAE
PERFORMANCE
The Performance Siae Performance menu contains the following commands:

D
Performance Monitoring Read, it forwards an updating request of the results,

relevant to the PM measurements, to the controller of the selected NE.
Performance Monitoring, it displays the results of the Performance Monitoring (PM)

measurements relevant to the selected Network Element (information present into the
Performance Monitoring table).
Old Performance Monitoring, it displays the results of the PM measurement, saved

before on tape or disk, relevant to the selected NE (information present into the Old
Performance Monitoring table).
Export Performance Monitoring, it saves on file the results of the PM measurements

relevant to the selected Network Elements of the same type (information present into
the Performance Monitoring table).
View/Modify PM Status, it displays the status and allows simultaneously

activating/deactivating the PM measurements of one or more NEs of the same type.
Here below there is the description of the several commands.

For each command, it is pointed out the access type to the system (Read Only, ReadWrite)
and the user profile (Entry, Normal,...) necessary to be able to use such a command.
If the command opens a window where there are some parameters, the system specifies also
the type of the operation that can be executed . The wording Reading points out that it is
possible to check the parameters; the wording Writing that it is possible to set or to change
them.
151
10.
PERFORMANCE SIAE PERFORMANCE
10.1
PERFORMANCE MONITORING READ
System access
User profile

The Performance Monitoring Read option executes a new reading of the results concerning
the PM measurements relevant to the selected equipment.
At its choice, the system forwards an updating request of the results directly to the controller
of the selected equipment.
The system points out the end of the operation through a message that reports the result of the
operation itself.
Warning. The system forwards the request only if the selected NE is in connected status.
152
10.
10.2
PERFORMANCE MONITORING
System access
User profile

The Performance Monitoring option displays the results of the PM measurements 87 relevant
to the selected Network Element.
With details, the choice of this option allows the following operations:
D
to check the results of the PM measurements subdivided into daily records (24 hours)
88 and for each record, to check the values of the control parameters (refer to
paragraph 10.2.1).
to check the results of the PM measurements subdivided into primary records (15
minutes) and for each record, to check the values of the control parameters (refer to
paragraph 10.2.2).
Warning. This option is available only if it has been selected a real Network Element 89. If the
type of the selected NE does not support PM measurements, the system will display a warning
message.
10.2.1 Results of the PM measurements subdivided into daily records

To display the results of the PM measurements subdivided into daily records (24 hours), of a
specific NE, it is necessary to execute the following procedure:
1.
Into the map window, select the NE for which the user wants to check the PM
measurements.
2.
Choose the Performance Monitoring option.

The system displays a window that requires for the time for which the user wants to
check the results of the PM measurements.
Into the Date Reference field, the system points out the starting date (day/month/year)
of the period (the system automatically suggests the current day), while, into the Day
Previous field, it is pointed out the number of days, before the set date, that constitute
the duration of the period (the system automatically suggests 30 days).
87.
The PM measurements change according to the type of the selected NE. Their description is
reported into the equipment user Manual relevant to the type of the NE under examination (refer
88.
The NMS5UX system allows displaying the results of the PM measurements subdivided into daily
records or primary ones. More detailed information concerning the Performance Monitoring
measurements, the observation period and the daily and primary records are reported into the
paragraph 7.2.
89.
This command is not available if it has been selected a virtual NE.
153
10.
3.
Set into the Date Reference and Day previous boxes 90 the desired values.
Warning. Into the Graphic Performance Monitoring window, the system can display at
maximum the daily records relevant to the last 180 days (starting from the current day)
91.
4.
5.
Set the Auto Select box:
The user has to activate the box if he wants that, at the selection of a control
parameter relevant to the measurement point, the system automatically selects
also the other control parameters that are compatible with the measuring unit of
the selected option (refer to step 7.).
The user has to deactivate the box if he wants that, at the selection of a control
parameter, the system automatically does not select any other parameter.

The system displays the Graphic Performance Monitoring window.
6.
Select the TPC menu.

The system displays a popup menu that lists all the measurement types (TPC
Termination Point Class yellow wordings) and the measurement points 92 (TP
Termination Point orange wordings) available for the selected equipment.
The control parameters are present into the popup menu that the system opens on
the side of the measurement point.
Usually, the same TP is coupled with more control parameters.
7.
Select the control parameters for which the system has to display the results of the PM
measurements.
Warning. Into the same diagram, it is not possible to display all the control parameters
of a TP. Such parameters have been subdivided according to the measurement unit
used for their counting: seconds, blocks, dBm, etc.
The system displays the Graphic Performance Monitoring window shown by Fig. 10.1.
When the user selects a parameter, the name of the relevant TP changes its color: it
turns from orange to red. While the selected control parameter is characterized by a
small ball placed on its L.H. side.
When the user has selected a control parameter, he can select all the parameters that
have the same measuring unit present on the same TP or into every one of the other
TPs.
The control parameters that do not have the same measuring unit of the selected
parameter will not be available (wording with grey color).
Warning. To be able to display the results of parameters with measuring units
different from the one of the currently selected, it is necessary to deselect all
the control parameters (refer to Option Deselect all TPC para. 10.2.1.1) and
then select newly the new parameters.
90.
It is possible to set a value between 10 and 180 days.
91.
The results of the PM measurements are memorized into the system database (Performance
Monitoring table). Such results remain available for a period of 6 months and after that the system
automatically removes them.
92.
Points where the system really measures the control parameters.
154
10.
Characteristics
relevant to the
equipment, to the
selected time
range and to the
drawing (1)
Menu bar
(2)
Each column of the

drawing represents
a daily record (3)
Characteristics of the
selected control parameters
and relevant to the record
over which it has been
positioned the mouse (5)
Characteristics of
the records (4)
Date of the record towhich

refer the characteristics of
the control parameters
described here below
Fig. 10.1
155
10.
Notes of Fig. 10.1

(1) Orderly:
S type and logic address of the equipment;
S starting date (Start date) and time end (End date);
S type of displayed record (Daily, Primary);
S type of diagram (Histogram, Chart, Chart Comp).
(2) For the description of the menus and of the relevant commands refer to paragraph 10.2.1.1.
(3) The window displays the records present into the set time range. The system displays such records
starting from the oldest record up to the most recent one. Use the scroll bar to scroll the records.
Inside the record column, the system identifies each control parameter through a color. The color key
is reported into the Legend and measure.... area.
(4) The system identifies each record through the relevant date (day/month/year).
The result of the all active measurements is pointed out through a colored wording positioned under
the record date. With details, it is possible to have the following wordings:
S Not available. It points out that the record is not available because the nothing measurement
was active during the observation time under examination.
S No error (green). It points out that the record has been completely acquired and the
measurements do not show any error.
S Above Thrs (red). It points out that the record has been completely acquired and at least one
control parameter has exceeded the relevant threshold value.
In this case, the NE forwards the record and also a daily record threshold exceeding alarm.
The system stores such an alarm into the alarm history.
S Below Thrs (yellow). It points out that the record has been completely acquired and the
measured control parameters do not exceed the threshold value.
S Lost (black). It points out that the record has not reached the main controller of the NE, for
instance, because the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it
could forward the record itself or due to generic hardware/software troubles.
S Incompl (yellow). It points out that the record has nor been completely acquired during the
corresponding observation time.
The measurement starting record is always in this status. The daily record gets this status
also when a single primary record of the corresponding day is in incompleted status.
Warning. The daily record of the current date will be always an incompleted one because the
system gets the daily records at 23.59 of each day.
S Restarted (black). It points out that the record has been lost due to a NE reset.
When the user executes a software restart of the NE and the NE itself checks that for a
specific measuring point the measurement is active, all the records relevant to such a point
will result into this status.
(5) For each control parameter, the system points out into the following columns the following data:
S Value column, it points out the value of the control parameter.
The color of the number that represents the value points out the threshold exceeding. With
details, if the number is:
red, it means that the pointed out value is higher than the threshold value set for the
specific parameter.
yellow, it means that the pointed out value is lower than the threshold value.
white, it means that, for the parameter coupled with the value, it has not set a threshold
value (not active threshold).
156
10.
The dash () points out that the value is not available.

S Col. column, it points out the color that represents the parameter inside the diagram
S State Rec. column, it points out the status of the record relevant to the control parameter.
For the description of the several statuses, refer to note (4).
S Threshold column, it points out the threshold level over which the system activates the
relevant alarm.
The Disable wording points out that the threshold has been deactivated.
S Description column, it points out the name of the measurement point (TP) and of the relevant
control parameter 93.
S RLT (dbm) column, it points out the power threshold level.
Warning. The field is marked and it is significant only for power control parameters (for
instance RLTS, RLTM, etc.).
10.2.1.1 Graphic Performance Monitoring Window Menu bar

Into the menu bar of the Graphic Performance Monitoring window, the system displays the
menus and the options described here below.
File menu
"
Exit. Close the window.
Option menu
"
Deselect all TPC. It deselects all the selected control parameters.

Warning. It is necessary to deselect all the control parameters with a defined measuring unit
(for instance: seconds) to be able to select a parameter with a different measuring unit (for
instance: blocks).
"
Thresholds. It displays into the diagram a hatched line that represents the threshold value
of each selected control parameter. Each hatched line will have the same color that
represents the parameter into the diagram.
"
Type image. It changes the diagram type. With details:
93.
Histogram, it is a histogram diagram.
Chart, it is a linear diagram.
The control parameters changes according to the TP. Their description is reported into the
equipment user Manual relevant to the NE type involved by the measurement.
157
10.
Chart Comp., it is a compressed linear diagram.

The window displays at the same time all the records relevant to the time range set at
the beginning of the procedure.
Help menu
"
Index. It opens the online manual.
10.2.2 Results of the PM measurements subdivided into primary records

To display the results of the PM measurements, subdivided into primary records (15 minutes),
relevant to a defined NE, it is necessary to execute the following procedure:
1.
Into the map window, select the NE with the PM measurements to be checked.
2.
Open the Graphic Performance Monitoring window following the procedure described
at paragraph 10.2.1.
3.
Position the mouse on the record of the day relevant to the primary records to be
displayed and then, click quickly twice on it.
The system displays the Graphic Performance Monitoring window.
Into such a window, the user can check the result of the PM measurements for all the
primary records relevant to the chosen day.
The window elements and their description are the same ones shown in Fig. 10.1.
To return to the displaying of the primary records, click quickly twice on a generic point of the
window.
158
10.
10.3
OLD PERFORMANCE MONITORING
System access
User profile

The Old Performance Monitoring command allows displaying the results of the Performance
Monitoring (PM) measurements present into the Old Performance Monitoring table relevant to
the selected Network Element.
Into the Graphic Performance Monitoring OLD table, the system stores the results of the PM
measurements saved with the Pm backup command (refer to paragraph 15.4) and restored by
means of the Pm restore command (refer to paragraph 15.5).
With details, the choice of this option allows the following operations:
D
to check the results of the PM measurements subdivided into daily records (24 hours)
present into the Old Performance Monitoring table (refer to paragraph 10.3.1).
to check the results of the PM measurements subdivided into primary records (15
minutes) present into the Old Performance Monitoring table (refer to para. 10.3.2).
Warning. The Old Performance Monitoring command is available only if it has been selected
a real Network Element 89.
If the selected type of NE does not support PM measurements, the system will display a warning
message.
10.3.1 Results of the PM measurements, present into the Old

Performance Monitoring table, subdivided into daily records
1.
Into the map window, select the NE for which the user wants to check the PM
measurements.
2.
Choose the Old Performance Monitoring option.

The system displays a window that requires for the time for which the user wants to
check the results of the PM measurements.
The using modes of the window are the same ones reported at paragraph 10.2
3.

The system displays the Graphic Performance Monitoring OLD window.
The description and the using modes of the window are the same ones reported at
paragraph 10.2.
159
10.
Warning. If at the window opening the table is empty, it is necessary to recover, from
the backup file saved before, the list of the desired measurements (refer to paragraph
15.5).
Such measurements will remain available into the Old Performance Monitoring table
and into the Graphic Performance Monitoring OLD window, until when the system
will recover a different list of measurements.
10.3.2 Results of the PM measurements, present into the Old

Performance Monitoring table, subdivided into primary records
1.
Into the map window, select the NE with the PM measurements to be checked.
2.
Open the Graphic Performance Monitoring OLD window following the procedure
described at paragraph 10.3.1.
3.
Position the mouse on the record of the day relevant to the primary records to be
displayed and then, click quickly twice on it.
The system displays a new Graphic Performance Monitoring OLD window.
Into such a window, the user can check the result of the PM measurements for all the
primary records relevant to the chosen day.
The window elements and their description are the same ones shown in Fig. 10.1.
To return to the displaying of the primary records, click quickly twice on a generic point of the
window.
160
10.
10.4
EXPORT PERFORMANCE MONITORING
System access
User profile

The Export Performance Monitoring command allows saving on file the results of the
Performance Monitoring (PM) measurements of all the selected Network Elements.
Then, during the operation, it is possible to forward the file to a user, via email.
Warning. The command is available only if it has been selected one or more real Network
Elements 89 of the same type.
10.4.1 To save on file the results of the PM measurements

1.
Into the map window, select one or more real Network Elements of the same type.
2.
Choose the Export Performance Monitoring command.

The system displays the Export window. Under the window title, it is pointed out the
Network Element type.
3.
Position the mouse cursor into the TPclass area and press the mouse R.H.
pushbutton.
The system displays the list of the measurements foreseen for the selected type of NE.
4.
Choose one measurement type from the list.

Into the Termination Point (TP) area, the system points out the relevant measuring
points.
5.
Choose one or more measuring points for which the results of the PM measurements
have to be saved on file. It is possible to select more records.
6.
Select one of the following option pushbuttons:
7.
Daily pushbutton, it allows saving on file the daily records relevant to the selected
measuring point/s.
Primary pushbutton, it allows saving on file the primary records .
Set the date (into the Date boxes) and the time (into the Time boxes) respectively for
the starting (Start Date Time box) and for the ending (Stop Date Time box) of the time
for which the results of the PM measurements have to be saved.
The supervisory system has at disposal the results of the PM measurements relevant
to the last 180 days (6 months).
8.
Type the file name, for which the operator wants to save the data, into the File Name
box.
161
10.
The system provides a default name composed by specific information, such as, for
instance, the date, the time, the NE logic address. The format of the provided default
name can be changed by the user with Superuser profile.
Warning. The file is saved into the directory opt/nms5ux/ExportPM/ (the setting can not
be changed).
9.
ONLY if the user wants to forward the file to another user, it is necessary to set the
name of the user into the Remote Access box.
If the user positions the mouse cursor on the text box and press the mouse R.H.
pushbutton, the system displays a predefined list of users 94.
In this case, the file will be as saved into the predefined directory as forwarded to the
set user.

The system displays the Preview window that points out the resuming of the executed
setting operations.
Then, in the lower part of the window, the system points out the total number of records
(Total Record Number box) and the number of records that contain errored data
(Records with counters box).
Warning. The system can display an error message that points out that the number of
record present into the set time is too high. This situation is caused because the system
stores into each file a maximum limit N of records. The limit N can be changed by
the user with Superuser profile.
The data are saved in ASCII format that can be recognized by a great number of text
processing programs and databases.
94.
The predefined list of users has to be set and later it can be changed by the user with Superuser
profile.
Warning. to be able to forward the file, the system administrator has to configure properly the mail
server.
162
10.
10.5
VIEW/MODIFY PM STATUS
System access
User profile

Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
The View/Modify PM Status command displays the list of the Performance Monitoring (PM)
measurement points that characterize the selected type of equipment 95.
For each measurement point, the system points out the functioning status of the relevant
measurement (activated, deactivated).
At the choice of this option, the system displays the View/Modify PM Status window shown in
Fig. 10.2.
Through the options present into the window, the user can execute the following operations:
95.
to activate at the same time one or more PM measurements for one or more NEs of
the same type, chosen among the ones selected into the map window (refer to
to deactivate at the same time one or more PM measurements for one or more NEs
of the same type, chosen among the ones selected into the map window (refer to
If it has been selected more NE objects, the system points out the PM measurements relevant to
the first type of selected NE. For instance, if it has been orderly selected a SDH type NE, a FAM
type NE and a PDH type NE, at the choice of the option under examination, the system displays
the PM measurements that characterize the SDH equipment.
163
10.
Into the View area, the user can

filter the measurement points to be
displayed into the area on the side
(Termination Point area) (1)
Into this area (Termination

Point area), the system
points out the
measurement points (2)
Menu
bar (3)
Into this area, the system points

out the details of the executed
operations and their results
Fig. 10.2
164
10.
Notes of Fig. 10.2
(1) With details, into the:

S Equipment area, the system points out the equipment selected into the map window. Select
the following pushbuttons:
All Equipment pushbutton, to display into the Termination Point area, the measurement
points relevant to all the equipment.
Selected Equipment pushbutton, to display into the Termination Point area, the
measurement points relevant to the selected equipment only. This pushbutton is
available only after having selected at least one equipment.
S Termination Point Class area, the system points out the measurement types relevant to the
equipment type selected into the map window. Select the following pushbuttons:
All TP Class pushbutton, to display into the Termination Point area, the measurement
points relevant to all the measurement types.
Selected TP Class pushbutton, to display into the Termination Point area, the
measurement points relevant to the selected measurement types only. This
pushbutton is available only after having selected at least one measurement type.
S Termination Point Instances area, the system points out the status of the measurement point.
Activate the following boxes:
Running Counters box, to display into the Termination Point area, the activated
measurement points.
Not Running Counters box, to display into the Termination Point area, the deactivated
measurement points.
(2) Foe each measurement point, the system points out the following data:
S Logical Addr., equipment logic address.
S TP Class, name of the measurement type.
S TP Instance, name of the measurement point.
S Status, measurement status: activated (Running wording), deactivated (Not running wording).
(3) the description of the menus and of the relevant options is reported at paragraph 10.5.1.
165
10.
10.5.1 View/Modify PM Status Window Menu bar

Into the menu bar of the View/Modify PM Status window, the system displays the following
options:
10.5.1.1 File Menu

"
Close. It closes the window.
10.5.1.2 Action Menu

"
"
"
166
Start. It activates the PM measurements. The choice of this option opens a submenu that
contains the following options:
All, it activates all the PM measurements relevant to all the equipment selected
into the map window.
Filtered, it activates the measurements relevant to the measurement points

present into the Termination Point area (refer to Fig. 10.2).
Selected, it activates the measurements relevant to the measurement points

selected into the Termination Point area (refer to Fig. 10.2).
Stop. It deactivates the PM measurements. The choice of this option opens a submenu
that contains the following options:
All, it deactivates all the PM measurements relevant to all the equipment selected
into the map window.
Filtered, it deactivates the measurements relevant to the measurement points

present into the Termination Point area (refer to Fig. 10.2).
Selected, it deactivates the measurements relevant to the measurement points

selected into the Termination Point area (refer to Fig. 10.2).
Refresh Info. It executes a new reading of the database and it updates the information
11
11.
CONFIGURATION SIAE OBJECTS
The Configuration Siae Objects menu contains the following commands:

D
Equipment Info, it displays the characteristics and the functional status of the
selected Network Element.
Radio Certificate, it allows recording (saving on file and/or printing) the data relevant
to the equipment.
Warning. This option is available only for Radio SDH, Radio PDH, Radio PDHAL, G
series Radio, ELFO, SDH N+1, ALS.
Legacy Hw/Sw Edition Inventory, it displays the list of the objects 96, relevant to
the Network Elements managed with Legacy protocol, known by the NMS5UX
system present into the open map.
For each object, it is reported the version of the hardware and of the software/firmware
Legacy Physical Unit Inventory, it displays the list of the objects 96 relevant to the
Network Elements managed with Legacy protocol, known by the NMS5UX system
present into the open map.
For each object, it is possible to change the identification code.
SNMP Software Inventory, it displays the list of the NEs, the characteristics of the
sw/fw present into each equipment and the list of the units, relevant to each equipment,
that contain a controller or a programmable logic unit (FPGA).
Warning. This command is available only for the equipment managed with SNMP
protocol.
96.
Legacy Alarm Average, it allows checking the average number of the alarms for
second received by the NMS5UX system, such a check is executed by the equipment
managed with Legacy protocol.
Each Network Element is seen by the supervisory system as an assembly of objects that
represent one or more physical parts of the NE itself.
More detailled informartion concerning the objects that characterize each single type of Network
Element are reported into the relevant equipment Manual (refer to paragraph 1.3.3).
167
11.
Here below, there is the description of the commands.

For each command, it is pointed out the system access type (Read Only, ReadWrite) and the
user profile (Entry, Normal,...) necessary to be able to use such a command.
the type of the operation that can be executed.
The wording Reading points out that it is possible to check the parameters; the wording
Writing that it is possible to set or to change them.
168
11.
11.1
EQUIPMENT INFO
System access
User profile

The Equipment Info command allows displaying the characteristics and the functional status
of the selected Network Element.
The operator can execute the subject operation also pressing the R.H. side pushbutton of the
mouse and choosing the SIAE Eq. Info command.
Warning. The command is not available if it has been selected a workstation or a communication
server board.
If the user selects more Network Element symbols and chooses the command under
examination, the system opens more Equipment Info/Find:... windows, one for each selected
NE.
11.1.1 Equipment Info/Find window Parameters

The command choice opens the Equipment Info/Find: physical address ... window that contains
the following information:
"
Date/Time. Date and time when the window has been open or refreshed (by means of the
Refresh command choice).
"
Physical Address. Physical address of the Network Element.
"
Logical Address. Logic address of the NE.
"
Type. Network Element type: SDH Radio, PDH Radio, etc.
"
Ws Name, Board, Port, Status. Respectively Workstation name (WS), IP Address of the
Communication Server Board (CSB) or of the WS and number of the port to which it is
connected the NE. Into the Status boxes, it is pointed out the connection status of the
CSB/WS and of the serial port.
Warning. These information are available and meaningful only for NEs managed with the
Legacy protocol.
"
Equipment status. The status of the connection between the NE and the supervisory
system.
For the description of the statuses, refer to paragraph 6.4.
"
Alarm status. Functional status (alarms) of the Network Element.
169
11.
It is pointed out the seriousness level of the alarm present into the NE. If there are more
alarms with different seriousness levels, the system will point out the level relevant to the
most serious alarm.
"
LCT Presence. Status of the connection between the Local Craft Terminal (LCT) program
and the NE. The value:
D
LCT Absent points out that the LCT user is not currently connected with the equipment.
LCT Present (readwrite) points out that the LCT user is connected with the equipment
in Configuration mode.
LCT Present (readonly) points out that the LCT user is connected with the equipment
in Monitoring mode.
For more detailed information refer to paragraph 6.5.

"
LCT Config. Status of the LCT program enabling to be connected to the NE in

Configuration mode. The value:
D
Enabled it points out that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment
as in Configuration mode as in Monitoring one.
Disabled it points out that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment
in Monitoring mode only.
This parameter is available and meaningful only for the NEs managed with the SNMP
protocol.
For more detailed information refer to paragraph 6.5.3.
"
Alarms not ack. Acknowledging status of the NE alarms. The wording:

D
Active points out that there is at least one not acknowledged alarm (current and/or
into the alarm history).
To acknowledge an alarm, refer to the paragraphs 12.1.2.2 and 12.2.2.2.
D
"
Cleared points out that all the possible alarms are acknowledged.
LCT Presence not ack. Acknowledging status of the LCT Present signal of the NE. The
wording:
D
Active points out that, from the last time that it has been opened the Equipment window
for the NE under examination, the LCT program has been connected to the NE at least
one time in Configuration mode.
To acknowledge the LCT Presence signal, open the Equipment window.
Cleared points out that, indicate from the last time that it has been opened the
Equipment window, the LCT has not been connected in Configuration mode.
"
Current alarms. The number of the current alarms present into the NE.
"
Alarm history. The number of alarm signals, relevant to the NE, stored into the alarm
history. Into the box:
170
Total, the system points out the total number of signals.
Ack, the system points out the number of acknowledged signals.
11.
D
"
NAck, the system points out the number of not acknowledged signals.
Remark. Possible information relevant to the NE under examination.
If a parameter has been disabled, it means that it is not available because it is not a meaningful
one for the status and/or for the NE type to which it is referred the window.
Warning. The information pointed out into the window correspond to the characteristics
and to the functional status of the NE when it is selected the command.
to refresh the information, choose the Refresh pushbutton (refer to paragraph 11.1.2).
No one parameter present into the Equipment Info/Find window can be changed with the
exception of the Remark field.
11.1.2 Equipment Info/Find window Pushbuttons

Into the window, there are the following pushbuttons:
"
Done. It closes the window.
"
Open. It opens the Equipment window relevant to the selected NE type.

The description of the Equipment window is reported into the specific equipment Manual
"
Clear. It is not available into the subject context (refer to paragraph 12.2).
"
Refresh. It executes a new reading of the database and it refreshes the information present
into the window.
At the choice of the pushbutton, the system refreshes the date/time (refer to paragraph
11.1.1) and it will point out the time of the refresh execution.
"
Print. It prints or saves on file the information.

The choice of the pushbutton opens the Output Device Selection window.
To print the information:
1.
Select the Output To Printer option pushbutton.
2.
Choose the page orientation selecting the Landscape or Portrait option pushbutton.
3.
Into the Printer Name box, the system automatically sets the default printer (Default
Printer). If the user wants to address the printing operation on another peripheral unit,
he has to type into the box the name of the printer to be used.
4.
Press the Ok pushbutton.
171
11.
The printing format use to print the information corresponds to the one used to display
them.
To save the information in a file:
1.
Select the Output To File option pushbutton.

Warning. The Output To File option pushbutton is available only for the user
with Superuser or Privileged profile.
2.
Into the File Name box, type the path and the file name where the user wants to save
the information. If the user types only the file name, it will be saved into the
homedirectory of the user that has locally opened the graphical interface of the
NMS5UX system.
3.

The files are saved, in text format, and they can be opened using every text editor.
"
172
Help. It opens the online manual.
11.
11.2
RADIO CERTIFICATE
System access
User profile

The Radio Certificate option allows recording the data relevant to the selected equipment.
At the option selection, the system displays the EqpInfoPage window that points out all the
characteristics of the terminal.
To record the equipment, type the relevant characteristic into the proper boxes and then choose
Save.
Warning. The Save pushbutton is available only for the user with Superuser, Privileged and
Advanced profile.
It is possible to save the certificate on a file (selecting the Print to File option) or to print it
(selecting the Print to Printer option).
Warning. This command is available only for Radio SDH, Radio PDH, Radio PDHAL, G
173
11.
11.3
LEGACY HW/SW EDITION INVENTORY
System access
User profile

The Legacy Hw/Sw Edition Inventory command displays the version of the hardware and
of the software/firmware of the objects 96 relevant to the Network Elements known by the
NMS5UX system present into the currently open map.
Warning. Into the Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window, that is displayed at the command choice,
the system displays only the objects relevant to NEs managed with Legacy protocol.
The Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window is composed by a table where there is the list of the
objects, by the menu bar and by a lower status bar. All these elements are described into the
following paragraphs.
Using the command present into the window, it is possible to execute the following operations:
D
To save or to print the list of the objects (refer to paragraph 11.3.2.1).
To filter the list of the objects (refer to paragraph 11.3.2.2).
11.3.1 Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window Object list

Into the table, one record is dedicated to each object. Such a record contains the following
information:
"
Equipment. It points out the NE type, managed with Legacy protocol, that contains the
object.
"
Address. It points out the logic address of the NE that contains the object.
"
Object name. It points out the object name.
"
Slot. It points out the topologic position of the object inside the NE, pointed out by a letter
and eventually by a number. Some objects are not provided with such an information.
"
Hw/Sw Edition. It points out the edition number of the hardware and of the
software/firmware relevant to the physical unit coupled with the object to which it is referred
the record.
Warning. The information present into the table correspond to the characteristics of the objects
at the selection of the command.
174
11.
11.3.2 Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window Menu bar

into the menu bar of the Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window, there are the menus and the
commands described here below.
11.3.2.1 File Menu

"
Print/Save. It prints or saves on a file the information. The choice of the subject command
opens a submenu that contains the following options:
Filtered Items, it prints/saves the list of the displayed records. If there are not
activated filters, the displayed records correspond to the ones stored into the
database.
Selected Items, it prints/saves the record range pointed out by means of the
mouse. This command is available only if it has been selected at least one record.
The choice of every command opens the Output Device Selection window. The using
modes of the window are pointed out at paragraph 11.1.2.
"
11.3.2.2 View Menu

"
Set Filter. It opens the Set Filter window that allows filtering and ordering the list.
the filtering operation consist on detecting one or more criteria in such a way that the
system displays only the records that comply with all the specified criteria. The ordering
operation consists on detecting the order that has to be used for the record displaying.
To filter and/or to order the data into a list, it is necessary to click on one or more boxes
present into the window, according to the criteria to be used. The activation of each box
expands the window displaying a section that contains the following options:
D
Match Object Type box. In this section it is possible to set, as filter, a specific object
of a NE executing the following procedure:
a.
Select the NE type into the Equipment Type list.
b.
Select the desired object into the Object type list.

It is possible to set a single object class at a time or all the classes at the same
time choosing the All Objects option.
Match Address box. In this section, it is possible to set, as filter, one or more NE logic
addresses, executing the following procedure:
Type the NE address into the text box and choose the Add pushbutton 97. The system
inserts the value into the area placed under the Match Address box.
175
11.
The user can delete from the list a single option choosing, after having selected such
an option, the Remove pushbutton or he can delete all the options at the same time
choosing the Remove All pushbutton.
D
Match Edition box. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, the edition of the
hardware and/or of the software/firmware (sw/fw) of the unit, executing the following
procedure:
Type into the first text box (max 2 numbers) the edition number of the hardware and/or
type into the remaining 3 boxes (placed under the symbol /) the edition number (max.
2 characters for each box) of the sw/fw.
To execute a general search, use the wild character asterisk (*).
The value 0/0.0.0 points out that the edition of the hardware and/or of the
software/firmware (sw/fw) relevant to the unit under examination is unknown.
Match unit code box. In this section, it is possible to set, as filter, one or more
identification codes of the unit or of the NE part to which corresponds the object.
The setting mode of the filter is the same one described for the Match Address criterion.
Sort by box. In this section, it is possible to order the records with respect to the
parameters: Address, Unit Code, Hw Edition, Object Name, Sw Edition.
The field description is the same one pointed out at paragraph 11.3.1.
To set the ordering criterion, activate the desired option pushbutton.
After having set the criteria, press the OK pushbutton (the system executes the filtering
and/or ordering command and closes the window) or the Apply one (the system executes
the command but it does not close the window).
The system will display, into the Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window, only the records that
comply with all the activated options.
Every time that the system filters the list, it considers all the records, as the displayed
records as the hidden ones.
Into the window, there are also the Clear pushbutton (it removes the activation of all the
filters and displays the complete list of the records), the Cancel pushbutton (it closes the
window and does not execute the command) and the Help pushbutton (it opens the online
manual).
Warning. When the system closes the Physical Unit Inventory window, the possible
activation of the filters is automatically removed.
"
Refresh Info. It executes a new reading of the database and it refreshes the information
At the command choice, the date/time (refer to paragraph 11.3.3) is refreshed and it will
point out the refreshing time.
97.
It is possible to use the wild character asterisk (*). For instance typing into the text box:
S12 the system will display, into the Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window, the NE with address
12.
S12* the system will display the NEs with the address that begins with 12 (12, 120, 121, etc.).
S1*2 the system will display the NEs with the address that begins with 1 and ends with 2 (12,
102, 112, etc.).
176
11.
11.3.2.3 Menu Help

11.3.3 Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window Status bar

Into the lower status bar, the system points out the following information:
D
the number of the displayed records (xx records).
the activation of one or more filters.
the date and the time when it has been opened or refreshed (by means of the choice
of the Refresh Info command refer to paragraph 11.3.2.2) the window.
177
11.
11.4
LEGACY PHYSICAL UNIT INVENTORY
System access
User profile

The Legacy Physical Unit Inventory command displays the list of the objects 96 relevant to
the Network Elements known by the NMS5UX system into the actually open map and it allows
changing the identification code assigned to each single object.
Warning. Into the Physical Unit Inventory window, displayed at the command choice, the system
points out only the objects relevant to the Network Elements managed with the Legacy
protocol.
The Physical Unit Inventory window is composed by a table that lists the objects, by a menu bar
and by a lower status bar. All these elements are described into the following paragraphs.
By means of the commands present into the window, the user can execute the following
operations:
D
To save or to print the list of the objects (refer to paragraph 11.4.2.1).
To change the identification code of the unit (refer to paragraph 11.4.2.2).
To filter the list of the objects (refer to paragraph 11.4.2.3).
11.4.1 Physical Unit Inventory window List of the objects

Into the table, one record is devoted to each object. Such a record contains the following
information:
"
Equipment. It points out the type of NE, managed with the Legacy protocol, where there
id the object.
"
Address. It points out the logic address of the NE where there is the object.
"
Object name. It points out the object name.
"
Slot. It points out the topologic position of the object inside the NE, pointed out by a letter
and eventually by a number. Some objects are not provided with such an information.
"
Unit Code. It points out the identification code assigned by the manufacturing company
(siae microelettronica) to the unit or to the NE part to which corresponds the object.
Warning. The information present into the table correspond to the characteristics of the objects
present at the command selection.
178
11.
11.4.2 Physical Unit Inventory window Menu bar

The menu bar of the Physical Unit Inventory window contains the menus and the commands
described here below.
11.4.2.1 File Menu

"
Print/Save. It prints or saves on a file the information present into the window.
The using modes of the command are pointed out at the paragraph 11.3.2.1.
"

"
Set Unit Code. It opens the Set Unit Code window where it is possible to change the
identification code coupled with each single object, executing the following procedure:
a.
Open the Equipment Type option menu and choose the type of the NE to which
belongs the object.
b.
Open the Object Type option menu and choose the object.
c.
Into the Unit Code text box, type the identification code of the object.
If after having changed the code, the user wants to reset the preceding one, it is
sufficient to press the Default pushbutton.
d.
11.4.2.3 View Menu

"
Set Filter. It opens the Set Filter window that allows filtering and/or ordering the list.
The setting modes of the filters and/or the ordering criteria present into the window are the
same ones described at paragraph 11.3.2.2.
"
Refresh Info. It executes a new reading of the database and refreshes the information
At the command choice, the date/time (refer to paragraph 11.4.3) is refreshed and it will
point out the refreshing time.
179
11.
11.4.2.4 Help Menu

11.4.3 Physical Unit Inventory window Status bar

180
the number of the displayed records (xx records).
the date and the time when it has been opened or refreshed (by means of the choice
of the Refresh Info command refer to paragraph 11.4.2.3) the window.
11.
11.5
SNMP SOFTWARE INVENTORY
System access
User profile

The SNMP Software Inventory option displays:

D
the list of the NEs managed with SNMP protocol and the characteristics of the sw/fw
present into each equipment 98.
the list of the units, present into every NE managed with SNMP protocol 98, that contain
a controller or a programmable logic unit (FPGA).
The lists (equipment and units) are not displayed at the same time into the Snmp NE Software
Inventory window (that is displayed at the choice of the option). The system displays such lists
one as an alternative to the other one according to the selected option pushbutton.
In fact, into the Snmp NE Software Inventory window, under the menu bar, there are the following
pushbuttons:
D
NE Software Inventory. Its choice displays, into the Snmp NE Software Inventory
window, the list of the NEs managed with SNMP protocol. The description of the
information available for each NE are pointed out at paragraph 11.5.1.
Unit Software Inventory. Its choice displays, into the Snmp NE Software Inventory
window, the list of the units. The description of the information available for each unit
are pointed out at paragraph 11.5.2.
By means of the options present into the window, when it is activated:

D
the NE Software Inventory pushbutton, it is possible to execute the following

operations:
to save or to print the list of the equipment (refer to paragraph 11.5.3.1).
to open the Equipment, Equipment Info/Find, Software Download windows

relevant to the equipment (refer to paragraph 11.5.3.2).
to switch the functioning of the memory benches of the controller relevant to a NE

Warning. This operation is not available for the user with Entry profile.
98.
to filter the list of the equipment (refer to paragraph 11.5.3.3).
the Unit Software Inventory pushbutton, it is possible to execute the following

operations:
to save or to print the list of the units (refer to paragraph 11.5.3.1).
to filter the list of the units (refer to paragraph 11.5.3.3).
Except for the Elfo and SDH N+1 equipment.
181
11.
11.5.1 SNMP NE Software Inventory window NE Software Inventory

pushbutton activated Equipment list
Into the table, each equipment is coupled with a record that reports the following information:
"
Logical Addr. Logic address of the equipment.
"
Type. Equipment type: Radio SDH, Radio PDH, Workstation, etc.
"
Ip Address. IP address of the equipment.
"
Status. Status of the connection between the equipment and the supervisory system:
Connected, Disconnected, Unreachable.
"
Release Bench 1. Name of the file and version of the equipment sw/fw present on the
memory bench 1.
"
Bench 1 Status. Functioning status of the memory bench 1. With details the wording:
running points out that it is on progress the sw/fw of the involved memory bench.
loaded points out that the sw/fw is present into the memory bench but it is not
currently on progress (standby).
not loaded points out that the sw/fw is not present into the memory bench.
downloading points out that it is on progress the updating of the sw/fw relevant to
the memory bench.
"
Release Bench 2. Name of the file and version of the equipment sw/fw present on the
memory bench 2.
"
Bench 2 Status. Functioning status of the memory bench 2. The details of the wordings
are the same already described for the Bench 1 Status parameter.
Warning. The system does not automatically update the information present into the table.
11.5.2 SNMP NE Software Inventory window Unit Software Inventory

pushbutton activated Unit list
Into the table, each unit is coupled with a record that reports the following information:
"
Logical Addr. Logic address of the equipment that contains the unit.
"
Type. Equipment type that contains the unit: Radio SDH, Radio PDH, Workstation, etc.
"
Ip Address. IP address of the equipment that contains the unit.
182
11.
"
Status. Status of the connection between the equipment that contains the unit and the
supervisory system: Connected, Disconnected, Unreachable.
"
Unit. Name of the unit
"
Element. Name of the element, where it is uploaded the sw/fw, present into the unit:
controller, programmable logic unit, etc.
"
Actual Release. Name of the file and version of the equipment sw/fw present into the
element.
Warning. The system does not automatically update the information present into the table.
11.5.3 SNMP NE Software Inventory window Menu bar

The menu bar of the Snmp NE Software Inventory window contains the following options:
11.5.3.1 File Menu

"
Print/Save. It prints or saves into a file the information. The choice of this command opens
a submenu that contains the following options:
All items, it prints/saves the list of all the records memorised into the database.
Filtered Items, it prints/saves the list of the displayed records. If there are not
some activated filters, the displayed records corresponds to the ones memorised
into the database.
Selected Items, it prints/saves the range of the records highlighted through the
mouse. This command is available only if it has been selected at least one record.
"
11.5.3.2 Actions Menu

"
Open Equipment. It opens the Equipment window (refer to paragraph 2.1.2) relevant to
the selected type of equipment.
183
11.
At the command selection, the system can display a message. The description of the
Equipment window and of the messages that can be displayed at its opening are reported
into the specific equipment Manual (refer to paragraph 1.3.3).
The Equipment window can be opened also clicking quickly twice on the record of the
equipment.
Warning. This command is available only if into the Snmp NE Software Inventory
window it has been activated the NE Software Inventory pushbutton.
"
Equipment Info. it opens the Equipment Info/Find window that displays the characteristics
and the operating status of the selected equipment.
If the user selects two or more records, he can open the relevant Equipment Info/Find
windows at the same time.
The description of the Equipment Info/Find window is reported at paragraph 11.1.
Warning. This command is available only if into the Snmp NE Software Inventory
window, it has been activated the NE Software Inventory pushbutton.
"
At the choice of the command, the system refreshes the date/time (refer to paragraph
11.5.4) and it will point out the time of the refresh execution.
"
Software Download. It opens the Software Download window that allows executing the
updating of the equipment sw/fw.
If the user selects more NEs of the same type, at the selection of the command, the system
opens only one Software Download window through which it is possible to execute the
operation for all the NEs at the same time.
The description of the Software Download window is reported at paragraph 13.9.
Warning. This command is available only if, into the Snmp NE Software Inventory
"
Read Data From NE. It forwards an information updating request to the controller of the
selected NE.
At its choice, the system forwards an updating request of the results directly to the controller
of the selected equipment.
The system points out the end of the operation through a message that reports the result
of the operation itself.
Warning. The system forwards the request only if the selected NE is in connected status.
"
Bench Switch. It switches the operation of the memory benches relevant to the controller
of the selected NE.
Warning. This command is not available for the user with Entry profile.
At the choice of this command, the system displays a confirmation window. Select Ok to
184
11.
At the end of the operation, the system displays a message that points out the result of the
operation. If the operation has been successfully executed, the system forces the bench
in running status to the loaded status and vice versa 99.
Warning. It is not possible to switch the memory bench when the updating of the sw/fw is
on progress (wording downloading refer to Fig. 13.4) and when into a bench it is not
present the equipment sw/fw (wording not loaded).
11.5.3.3 View Menu

"
Set Filter. It opens the View Filter window that allows filtering the list.
The filtering operation consists on detecting one or more criteria in such a way to display
only the records that comply with all the pointed out criteria.
To filter the data present into a list, click on one or more boxes present into the window,
according to the criteria to be used.
The activation of every box expands the window displaying a section that contains the
following options:
D
Match logical address box. Into this section, the user can set as filter one or more NE
logic address according to the following mode:
Type the NE address into the text box positioned under the Match Address box.
The user can use the asterisk wild character (*). For instance, if he types into the box
the letter/s:
p, the system will display into the window the NE with p logic address.
p*, the system will display the NEs with the logic addresses that begins with
the letter p.
p*o, the system will display the NEs with the logic addresses that begins with
the letter p and ends with the letter o.
Match equipment type box. Into this section, the user can set as filter the equipment
types that have to be displayed: Radio PDH, Radio SDH, etc.
To activate the desired options, click on the boxes placed on the side (the box is
activated when, inside it, it is present the symbol n
).
Match IP Address box. Into this section, the user can set as filter the IP address of
the equipment in the following mode.
Into the four text boxes (displayed at the selection of the option pushbutton under
examination), type the parts that compose the desired IP Address. The user can use
the asterisk wild character (*).
99.
Warning. This operation causes an automatic disconnection and a new connection of the NE. If
the new connection is not successfully executed, the NE gets the status of unreachable and, with
regular intervals, the supervisory system will automatically forward the new connection command.
185
11.
Match connection status box. Into this section, the user can select, as filter, the status
of the connection between the NE and the supervisory system: Connected,
Disconnected, Undetermined, Unreachable.
To activate the desired options, click on the boxes placed on the side (the box is activate
when, inside it, it is present the symbol n
).
Match Bench Release box. Into this section, the user can set, as filter, the version
and/or the using status of the sw/fw present into the memory benches of the
equipment.
To set as filter the sw/fw version, select into the list 100 the desired release. The system
points out the selected option into the text box.
To set as filter the using status of the sw/fw, activate the following option pushbuttons:
Not Loaded, the system will display, into the window, the NEs with the memory
benches without any uploaded sw/fw.
Warning. This option is available only if it has not been selected any sw/fw release.
If it has been selected a release, the user can delete it.
Loaded, the system will display, into the window, the NEs with a sw/fw release that
corresponds to the one set into the text box, its sw/fw is in Loaded status (the
sw/fw is present into the memory bench but it is not currently used).
Running, the system will display, into the window, the NEs with a sw/fw release
that corresponds to the one set into the text box, its sw/fw is in Running status (the
sw/fw is present into the memory bench and it is currently used).
Warning. This filter is available only if, into the Snmp NE Software Inventory
D
Match Object box. Into this section, the user can set as filter a specific unit and/or
element of the unit in the following way:
a.
Select the unit from the Unit Type list.

The user can set a single unit at a time or all the units choosing the All Units option.
b.
Select the element (controller, programmable logic unit, etc.) into the Element
Type list.
The user can set a single element at a time or all the elements of the unit set into
the Unit Type box (choosing the All Elements option).
window, it has been activated the Unit Software Inventory pushbutton.
D
Match Actual Release box. Into this section, the user can set as filter the release of
the sw/fw present into an element (controller, programmable logic unit, etc.).
To set as filter the release of the sw/fw, select from the list 101 the desired release. The
system displays the selected option into the text box.
window, it has been activated the Unit Software Inventory pushbutton.
100.
Into the list, the system displays the releases of the sw/fw present into the equipment pointed out
into the Snmp NE Software Inventory window.
101.
Into the list, the system displays the releases of the sw/fw present into the elements pointed out
into the Snmp NE Software Inventory window.
186
11.
After having set the criteria, choose the OK pushbutton (it executes the filter command
and closes the window) or the Apply one (it executes the filter command and does not close
the window).
The system will display, into the Snmp NE Software Inventory window, only the records
that comply with all the activated options.
Each time that the system filters the list, it takes into account all the records as the displayed
Into the window, there are also the Clear (it removes the activation of all the filters and
displays the complete list of the records), Cancel (it closes the window and does not
execute the command) and Help (it opens the help online) pushbuttons.
Warning. When the system closes the Snmp NE Software Inventory window, it
automatically removes also the possible activation of the filters.
11.5.3.4 Help Menu

11.5.4 SNMP NE Software Inventory window Status bar

Into the lower status bar, the system points out:
D
the number of the displayed records and the total number of records (xx of yy). If there
are not some activated filters, the number of the displayed records corresponds to the
total number of records.
the activation of one or more filters (View:..).
the date and time when the system has opened or refreshed (through the choice of the
Refresh Info option refer to the relevant paragraph) the window.
187
11.
11.6
LEGACY ALARM AVERAGE
System access
User profile

The Legacy Alarm Average option allows checking the average value of the alarms received
by the NMS5UX system; such a check is executed by the equipment managed with the
Legacy protocol.
At the choice of the option, the system displays the shAverage window that point out into the
following boxes, the following data:
D
Last Hour Avg box, it points out the average value of alarms for second received during
the last hour.
Current Hour Avg box, it points out the average value of alarms for second received
during the current hour.
Last Minute Avg box, it points out the average value of alarms for second received
during the last minute.
ACTUAL TIME box, it points out the date and time relevant to the window opening or
to the window updating.
Warning. The information present into the window refer to the average value of the alarms at
the window opening time.
To update the data, press the Refresh pushbutton.
At the choice of the option, the system will update the date/time and it will point out the time of
the refresh execution.
188
12
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
The Fault Siae Logs menu contains the following commands:

D
Network Alarm History, it displays the history 102 of the alarm 103, status and event
104 signals stored into the database of the NMS5UX system relevant to the NEs
Network Current Alarms, it displays the alarm/status/event signals actually activated

into the NEs present into the open map.
Old Alarm History, it displays the history of the signals that have been saved on file
before.
NE Alarm History it displays the history of the alarm signals, the status and the event
relevant to the selected equipment only.
NE Current Alarms it displays the alarm/status/event signals currently activated into

the selected equipment only.
SNMP NE History Log, it allows reading the log of the alarms, memorised into the
equipment controller.
protocol, except for the Elfo and SDH N+1 equipment.
Alarm Summary, it displays the history resume concerning the alarm, status and
event signals memorised into the database of the NMS5UX system relevant to the
NEs present into the open map.
102.
The word History means the list of the signals that have been acquired or recorded by the
supervisory system during time. The system records into the alarm history as the detection signal
as the reset one relevant to the alarm.
103.
The word alarm means the failure signal created by an error or by a malfunction of the NE or of
a part of the NE itself.
104.
The words status and event identify respectively the signals that do not point out a malfunctions
but a status change and an operation on progress or a functioning condition.
The status signals are spontaneously communicated by the Network Element (NE) to the
supervisory system, such as for instance:
Sthe activation/deactivation of the connection between the LCT and the NE (refer to para 6.5);
Sthe start/stop of the updating relevant to the equipment software/firmware (refer to para 13.9
and 13.11);
Sthe activation/deactivation of the manual operation;
Sthe activated/standby status of duplicated parts of Network Element.
while the event signals are created by the supervisory system itself, such as for instance the
starting of a realigning position of the alarms.
189
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
Nms5ux Statistics, it displays the alarm/event/status signalings relevant to all the

NEs present in the network.
Transaction Log, it displays the list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users,
that have changed the network configuration (for instance, the addition of an object),
the supervisory system configuration (for instance, the addition of a NMS5UX user) or
the configuration of a Network Element (for instance, the change of a parameter).
NMS5UX Inspect, it opens the Siae Inspect program for the control and the analysis
of the system processes and alarms (NMS5UX, HP OpenView, workstation/server).
Warning. The NMS5UX Inspect command is OPTIONAL.

the type of the operation that can be executed. The wording Reading points out that it is
possible to check the parameters; the wording Writing that it is possible to set or to change
them.
190
12.
12.1
FAULT SIAE LOGS
NETWORK ALARM HISTORY
System access
User profile

Reading Entry, Normal
Reading/Writing 105 Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
The Network Alarm history command displays the history 102 of the alarm 103, event and status
104 signals relevant to the NEs present into the open map.
At the command choice, the system displays the Alarm History Browser window composed by
a table that lists the signals, by a menu bar and by a lower status bar. All these elements are
described into the following paragraphs.
By default, the system applies a filter to the list of the signals. At the opening of the window, the
system will display only the signals with a detection date that is successive with respect to the
midnight of the current day.
Warning. At the opening of the window, the system can display a warning message that points
out that into the database there is a number of signals higher than N. For this reason, into the
Alarm History Browser window, the system will display the records up to N, by means of a
chronological order from the most recent one up to the oldest one.
The limit N is not a memorization limit but simply a display limit of the signals. To be able to
read the signals successive to N, it is sufficient to delete some records.
The limit N can be changed by the user with Superuser profile.
By means of the commands present into the window, it is possible to execute the following
operations:
D
To save or to print the list of the signals (refer to paragraph 9.5.2.1).
To copy, into a text editor, the list of the signals (refer to paragraph 9.5.2.1).
To delete and/or to mark the signals (refer to paragraph 12.1.2.2).

Warning. These operations are available only for the user with superuser, privileged
and advanced profile.
Activate (and deactivate) the automatic refresh procedure of the information (refer to
To filter the list of the signals (refer to paragraph 12.1.2.3).
To point out into the map window, the symbol of the Network Element to which it is
referred the record (refer to paragraph 12.1.2.3).
To check the time between two different signals (refer to paragraph 12.1.2.3).
To open the Equipment Info/Find window for the NE to which it is referred the selected
record (refer to paragraph 12.1.2.3).
105.
A writing operation is the deleting and the marking of the records into the Alarm History Browser.
window.
191
FAULT SIAE LOGS
12.
12.1.1 Alarm History Browser window List of the signals

Into the table, one record is devoted to each signal. Such a record points out the following
information:
"
Severity. This field (represented by a box with colour and by a wording) points out if the
record refers to an alarm, status or event signal (refer to paragraph 12.1) and if the signal
has been detected or it has been reset; in the case that it refers to an alarm, it is pointed
out also its seriousness level. With details:
Backgr. color
Wording Description
Green
Normal
Event signal detected.
Blue
Status
Status signal detected.
Light blue
Warning Alarm signal with Warning seriousness detected .
Yellow
Minor
Alarm signal with Minor seriousness detected .
Orange
Major
Alarm signal with Major seriousness detected .
Red
Critical
Alarm signal with Critical seriousness detected .
Without Backgr. Normal
Event signal reset.
Without Backgr. Status
Status signal reset.
Without Backgr. Warning Alarm signal with Warning seriousness reset.
Without Backgr. Minor
Alarm signal with Minor seriousness reset.
Without Backgr. Major
Alarm signal with Major seriousness reset.
Without Backgr. Critical
Alarm signal with Critical seriousness reset.
"
Ack. The signals can be marked by the user, the Ack field points out the marking status
of the record.
If the field is empty, the signal has not been marked, if it is present the character:
S, it means that the record has been marked when the signal was detected but
not yet reset. In this case, if the signal has been reset, it is possible to mark newly
the record (refer to paragraph 12.1.2.2).
C, it means that the record has been marked when the signal was detected and
also reset.
The records can be marked by means of the Acknowledge command or clicking twice on
a generic point of the record (for the description of the Acknowledged Info window that is
displayed at the execution of the subject operation, refer to paragraph 12.1.2.2).
"
Set Time. Date and time of the signal detection 106.
"
Clear Time. Reset date and time of the signal 106.
"
Address. Logic address of the Network Element.
"
Type. Network Element type.
"
Object. Name of the physical or logic object to which it is referred the alarm. The event
signals are not provided with such an information.
"
Message. Alphanumeric string that specifies the signal type.
106.
The element that has created the signal sets the date/time; in most cases, it is the main controller
of the Network Element.
192
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
12.1.2 Alarm History Browser window Menu bar

Into the menu bar of the Alarm History Browser window, there are the menus and the commands
12.1.2.1 File Menu

"
Print/Save. It prints or saves on file the list of the signals. The command choice opens a
submenu that contains the following options:
Selected, It prints/saves the record range pointed out by the mouse.
Filtered, It prints/saves the list of the displayed records. If it has not been activated
some filters, the displayed records correspond to the ones stored into the
database.
The format and the information contents of the print is the same one of the displayed table.
"
Export. It copies, into a window of the Text Editor program, the signals. Then, it will be
possible to add, to change, to delete, to print and to save the contents of the window into
a file.
The command choice opens a submenu that contains the following options:
Selected, it displays the Text Editor History... window where it is present the
record range pointed out with the mouse.
Filtered, it displays the Text Editor History... window where there is the list of
the displayed record. If it has not been activated any filters, the displayed records
correspond to the ones stored into the database.
For the using modes of the Text Editor program provided with the CDE user interface
(Common Desktop Environment), refer to the relevant manual or the help on line.
"

"
Delete. It removes, from the list and from the database of the supervisory system, one or
more records. The command choice opens a submenu that contains the following options:
Selected Alarms, it deletes the range of the records pointed out with the mouse.
Filtered Alarms, it deletes the list of the displayed records. If it has not been
activated any filters, the displayed records correspond to the ones stored into the
database.
All Alarms, it deletes all the records stores into the database.
193
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
Warning. The command is available if there is, into the status bar of the Alarm History
Browser window, the symbol n(refer to paragraph 12.1.4). To make available the
command, it is necessary to refresh the window selecting the marking symbol.
Then, the command is available only for the user with Superuser, Privileged or Advanced
profile.
"
Acknowledge. It allows marking one or more records, in such a way that the system
memorizes that the user has seen the signals.
Selected Alarms, it marks the range of the records pointed out with the mouse.
Filtered Alarms, it marks the list of the displayed records. If it has not been
activated any filters, the records displayed correspond to the ones stored into the
database.
All Alarms, it marks all the records stored into the database.
If the operator chooses one of the above listed commands or clicks twice by means of the
L.H. pushbutton of the mouse on the selected record(s), the system displays the
Acknowledged Info window, where it is possible to customize the marking. With details,
into the:
User box, it is pointed out the username of the NMS5UX user that has requested
the marking of the records. The value of the box is automatically set with the
username of the NMS5UX user that has opened the map. This value can not be
changed.
Trouble Identification Code box (TIC), it is possible to insert an identification code

of the records (alphanumeric string with maximum 16 characters). Then, such a
code, can be used as searching criterion (refer to paragraph 12.1.2.3). The setting
of this parameter is not mandatory.
Comment, it is possible to insert some additional information (max. 500

characters). The setting of this parameter is not mandatory.
After having set the parameters, press the OK pushbutton to execute the operation. After
having marked a record, it is not possible to delete the operation.
If the selected record refers to a signal detected but not yet reset, the system will mark
the record through the letter S. While if the record refers to a signal detected and reset, the
system will mark the record through the letter C.
Only for the records marked through the letter S, when the relevant signal is reset, it will
be possible to mark newly the record through the above described procedure. After the
second marking procedure, the system will replace the letter S with the letter C.
Warning. This command is not available if there is, into the status bar of the Alarm History
Browser window, the symbol n(refer to paragraph 12.1.4). To make available the
command, it is necessary to refresh the window selecting the marking symbol.
Then, the command is available only for the user with Superuser, Privileged or Advanced
profile.
"
194
Freeze Window/Unfreeze Window. The system displays the commands one as an

alternative to the other one.
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
The first command freezes the information displayed on the video, stopping the automatic
refresh procedure of the window. This operation can be executed also selecting the symbol
! present into the status bar.
when the user chooses the command or the symbol, the system replaces, into the menu,
the Freeze Window wording with the Unfreeze Window. one, while, into the status bar, it
replaces the symbol ! with the symbol : .
The second command activate newly the automatic refresh procedure of the information.
The user can execute this operation also selecting the symbol : present into the status
bar.
When the user chooses the command or the symbol, the system replaces, into the menu,
the Unfreeze Window wording with the Freeze Window. one, while, into the status bar, it
replaces the symbol : with the symbol !.
"
Reread Database. It executes a new reading of the record stored into the database and
refreshes the information present into the window.
At the command choice, the system can display a warning message (refer to para. 12.1).
12.1.2.3 View Menu

"
Set Filter. It opens the Filters Setting window that allows filtering the list of the signals stored
into the system database.
The filtering operation consists on defining one or more criteria in such a way that the
system displays only the records that comply with all the specified criteria.
To filter the data of a list, activate one or more boxes 107 present into the Filters Setting
window, according to the criteria to be used. The activation of each box enables the criterion
or expands the window displaying an additional section
The available criteria are the following ones:
D
107.
Match Severity box. In this section, it is possible to set, as filter, the signal type (alarm,
status, event refer to paragraph 12.1), the activation status of the signal and the
seriousness level for the alarms (the colour of the box, when it has been activated,
corresponds to the one coupled with the seriousness level of the alarm or with the
signal type). With details, the box:
Critical, (red) points out the alarm signal with Critical seriousness level.
Major, (orange) points out the alarm signal with Major seriousness level.
Minor, (yellow) points out the alarm signal with Minor seriousness level.
Warning, (light blue) points out the alarm signal with Warning seriousness level.
Status, (blue) points out the status signal.
Normal, (green) points out the event signal.
Active Alarms, points out the detected signal.
Cleared Alarms, points out the detected and reset signal.
A box is activated when there is, inside it, the symbol n

.
195
FAULT SIAE LOGS
12.
Occured After and Occured Before boxes. In these sections, it is possible to set, as
filter, the date/time of the signal.
If the user activates the Occured After box, the system displays into the list only the
records with a recording date equal to or successive with respect to the one pointed
out on the side of the option.
If the user activates the Occured Before box, the system displays only the records with
a recording date equal to or preceding with respect to the one pointed out on the side
of the option.
To change the date/time displayed on the side of the specific option, move the indicator
of the scroll bar or click on the arrows placed on the sides of the bar. If the user chooses
the Coarse Granularity option, into the box placed above the bar, it is possible to
change the date/time with steps of an hour, while if he chooses the Fine Granularity
option, with steps of 1 second.
If the user activates the boxes at the same time and set properly the date/time, it is
possible to define a time range.
Match Address box. In this section, it is possible to set, as filter, one or more logic
addresses of Network Element.
The user can set the desired logic addresses by means of one of the following modes:
Select the symbol or the symbols of the involved NEs, directly into the map window
and choose the Add From Map pushbutton.
Type the logic address of the NE into the Source box and choose the Add
pushbutton.
The so set values are inserted into the area on the side of the Match Address box.
It is possible to delete a single option from the list, choosing, after having pointed out
such an option, the Remove pushbutton or all the options at the same time choosing
the Remove All pushbutton.
D
Match Object box. In this section, it is possible to set, as filter, a specific object by
means of the execution of the following procedure:
a.
Open the Equipment Type option menu and choose the type of NE to which
belongs the object.
b.
Open the Object option menu and set the desired object.
The user can set a single class of objects at a time or all the classes at the same
time choosing the All Objects option.
Match Selected Alarm box. In this section, it is possible to set, as filter, a specific
signal. Into the Alarm History Browser window, the system will display all the records
that contain, into the Message field, the same type of information of the actually
selected record 108.
Warning. this criterion is not available if it has not been selected any record or if it has
been selected two or more records.
108.
For instance, if the user selects a record with the Message LOM Disconnected, the system will
display, into the Alarm History Browser window, the records with the Message LOM
Disconnected, LOM Connected Monitor, LOM Connected Config.
196
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
Match Message String box. In this section, it is possible to set, as filter, an

alphanumeric string; the system will display, into the Alarm History Browser window,
all the records that contain, into the Message filed, the set string of characters.
If the operator activates the Case Sensitive box, the system will make a difference
between capitol and lower characters. On the contrary, if he deactivates such a box,
the system will not make any difference.
Match Acknowledged and Match Unacknowledged boxes. In these sections, it is

possible to set, as filter, the marking status of the signals.
If the user activates the Match Acknowledged box, the system will display, into the list,
the records that have been marked (refer to paragraph 12.1.2.2). Then, it is possible
to specify:
the TIC identification code (Trouble Identification Code) assigned by the user to
the record during the marking, activating the TIC box and assigning the code.
the username of the NMS5UX user that has executed the marking, activating the
User box and typing the username.
If the user activates the Match Unacknowledged box, the system will display records
that have not been marked yet.
After having set the criteria, choose the OK pushbutton (it executes the filtering operations
and closes the Filters Setting window) or the Apply one (it applies the filters and does not
close the window).
The system will display, into the Alarm History Browser window, only the records that
comply with all the activated options. Each time that the system filters the list, it considers
all the records, as the displayed ones as the hidden ones.
Warning. When the operator closes the Alarm History Browser window, the system
automatically removes the possible activation of the filters.
Into the Filters Setting window, there are also the following pushbuttons:
Save .... It saves on file the set criteria.

At the pushbutton choice, the system displays the Save Filter window.
Type the name to be assigned to the file into the Selection text box.
Warning. The path, pointed out into the text box, can not be changed. To confirm
the operation, choose the OK pushbutton.
Load .... It opens the file that contains a specific setting of the filters saved before
(refer to the description of the Save... pushbutton).
At the pushbutton choice, the system displays the Load Filter window.
Select the desired file into the Files list.
Warning. The path, pointed out into the Selection box, can not be changed.
To confirm the operation, choose the OK pushbutton.
Delete .... It deletes the file that contains a specific setting of the filters saved
before (refer to the description of the Save... pushbutton ).
At the Delete... pushbutton choice, the system displays the Delete Filter window.
197
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS

Warning. The path, pointed out into the Selection box, can not be changed.
To delete the file, choose the OK pushbutton.
"
Clear Filters. It removes the activation of all the filters with the exception of the
Match Severity, Match Acknowledged, Match Unacknowledged boxes.
Cancel. It closes the window without executing the command.

Help. it opens the online manual.
Elapsed Time. It defines the time that divides the recording operations of two different
signals.
Set > Clear Time, it points out the time between the detection of a signal and its
reset.
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected a single detected
and reset signal.
Time between Set, it points out the time between the detection of two different
signals.
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected two different
adjacent or not adjacent signals.
First Set > Last Clear, it points out the time between the detection of the oldest
signal and the reset of the most recent one.
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected two different,
adjacent or not adjacent, detected and reset signals.
Clear > Set, it points out the time between the reset of the oldest signal and the
detection of the most recent one.
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected two different,
adjacent or not adjacent, detected and reset signals.
The choice of everyone of the above mentioned options displays a window that points out
the time range expressed by means of days, hours, minutes and seconds.
"
HighLight Equipment On Map. It points out, into the its window, the symbol of the Network
Element to which it is referred the selected record.
The system points out the Network Elements changing the colour of the symbol name: from
black with white background (normal condition) to white with black background.
If it has been selected the signal(s) of a single NE, the system points out the symbols and
opens and/or brings at front the window where there is the symbol. If the user selects the
signals of different NEs, the system points out the symbols only.
"
ClearHighlights. It removes the pointed out condition from all the symbols marked with
the HighLight Equipment On Map command (described at the preceding paragraph).
"
Equipment Info. It opens the Equipment Info/Find window that displays the characteristics
and the functional status of the Network Element to which it is referred the selected record.
If the user selects two or more records relevant to different NEs, the system can open, at
the same time, the specific Equipment Info/Find windows. The detailed description of the
Equipment Info/Find window is reported at paragraph 11.1.
198
12.
"
FAULT SIAE LOGS
Sort Mode. It sorts the list of the records.

The choice of the command opens the Sort Mode window.
Into the Sort area, there are the pushbuttons that allow sorting the list of the records
according to the recording or reset date/time of the signals (first sorting criterion). Into the
text box, if the user selects the option:
D
Set Time, the signals are listed according to the detection date/time (Set Time).
* CLEAR Time, the signals are listed according to the reset date/time (Clear Time).
As it is pointed out into the windows, the system will consider the not yet reset signals
with a reset date/time equal to 0.
Recording Sequence, the supervisory system lists the signals according to their
recording date/time into its own database.
To set the order used to list the signals, activate the option pushbutton:
D
Ascending; the first record of the table corresponds to the most recent signal; the
system lists the successive ones through a decreasing order.
Descending; the first record of the table corresponds to the oldest signal; the system
lists the successive ones through an increasing order.
If the user activates the Group by Address pushbutton, the system will order the signals also
according to their own address (second ordering criterion).
When the system executes the operation, it takes into account all the records memorised into
the database and not only the displayed ones.
12.1.2.4 Help Menu

12.1.3 Alarm History Browser window Status bar

D
the symbol : points out that the information present into the Alarm History Browser
window are frozen. While the symbol ! points out that the information are not frozen,
but the system automatically updates them (refer to paragraph 12.1.2.2).
the number of the displayed records and the total number of records (xx of yy). If it has
not been activated any record, the number of the displayed records corresponds to the
the activation of one or more filters (Filters:..).
the order used to list the signals (Sort:...).
199
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
The presence of the symbol npoints out that the information present into the Alarm History
Browser window has not been refreshed. To refresh such information, click on the symbol n
12.1.4 Refreshing of the information into the Alarm History Browser

window
The system dynamically updates the information present into the Alarm History Browser window
only if it is activated the automatic refresh procedure (refer to paragraph 12.1.2.2).
Warning. By default, at the opening of the Alarm History Browser window, the automatic refresh
procedure of the information is deactivated (symbol : into the status bar of the window). The
user with superuser profile can change the default setting.
The presence of the symbol n
, into the status bar of the window, points out that the information
displayed into the window are not aligned with the ones stored into the system database. This
situation is present in the following cases:
D
Two or more NMS5UX users (each one on a different terminal) have opened the Alarm
History Browser window for the same map and into an Alarm History Browser window,
the user deletes or marked some records, the system does not dynamically refresh all
the open windows. This operation is necessary to prevent the needing to refresh
continuously the windows while the users are using them.
It is marked one or more records into a Current Alarms Browser window. The record
is not automatically marked also into the Alarm History Browser window if it is opened.
To refresh the window, it is sufficient to click on the symbol n

. The user can refresh the window
also selecting the Reread Database command or changing the displaying order of the records
(Last On ...pushbuttons) or also applying a filter (Set Filter command).
Warning. The setting of the filters or the criterion used to order the records, into an Alarm History
Browser window, does not affect the displaying of the information into the other opened Alarm
History Browser windows or into the Current Alarms Browser window.
12.1.5 Recording of the signals

The signals are memorised into the database of the supervisory system.
Such signals remains stored for a number of days (that can be configured by the user with
Superuser profile default 90 days), and after that they are automatically deleted.
During such a period, it is possible to remove manually the signals (refer to paragraph 12.1.2.2).
It is advisable periodically to delete and/or to store on a file the less significant records, in such
a way to prevent the saturation of the database.
In fact as a principle, the system stores on disk all the signals until when it finds free space.
200
12.
12.2
FAULT SIAE LOGS
NETWORK CURRENT ALARMS
System access
User profile

The Network Current alarms command allows displaying the list of the alarm 103, of the event
and of the status 104 signals actually activated into the Network Elements present into the open
map.
At the command choice, the system displays the Current Alarms Browser window that is
composed by a table that lists the signals, by a menu bar and by a lower status bar. These
elements are described into the following paragraphs.
operations:
D
To mark the signals (refer to paragraph 12.2.2.2).
To activate (and to deactivate) the automatic refresh procedure of the information (refer
To point out, into the map window, the symbol of the Network Element to which it is
referred the selected record (refer to paragraph 12.2.2.3).
To check the time range between two different signals (refer to paragraph 12.2.2.3).
To open the Equipment Info/Find window for the NE to which it is referred the selected
record (refer to paragraph 12.2.2.3).
12.2.1 Current Alarms Browser window List of signals

Into the table, one record is devoted to each signal. Such a record provides the following
information: Severity, Ack, Date/Time, Address, Type, Object, Message.
The description of the table options is the same one reported at paragraph 12.1.1.
12.2.2 Current Alarms Browser window Menu bar

Into the menu bar of the Current Alarms Browser window there are the menus and the
201
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
12.2.2.1 File Menu

"
Print/Save. It prints or saves on a file the list of the signals.

The using modes of the command are pointed out into the paragraph 9.5.2.1.
"

"
Acknowledge. It allows marking one or more records, in such a way that the system
memorizes that the user has seen the signals.
Selected Alarms, It marks the range of the records pointed out with the mouse.
Filtered Alarms, It marks the list of the displayed records. If it has not been
activated any filter, the displayed records correspond to the ones memorised into
the database.
All Alarms, It marks all the records memorised into the database.
The record can be marked also clicking quickly twice on the record itself.
"
Freeze Window/Unfreeze Window. The system display the commands one as the
alternative of the other.
The first command freezes the information displayed on the video, stopping the automatic
refresh procedure of the window. The operation can be also executed selecting the symbol
! present into the status bar.
When the user chooses he command or the symbol, the system replaces, into the menu,
the Freeze Window wording with the Unfreeze Window. one, while, into the status bar, it
replaces the symbol ! with the one : .
The second command activates newly the automatic refresh procedure of the information.
The operation can also be executed selecting the symbol : present into the status bar.
When the user chooses the command or the symbol, the system replaces, into the menu,
the Unfreeze Window wording with the Freeze Window. one, while, into the status bar, it
replaces the symbol : with the one !.
"
Reread Database. It executes a new reading of the records stored into the database and
refreshes the information present into the window.
12.2.2.3 View Menu

"
202
Set Filter. It opens the Filters Setting window that allows sorting the list of the signals.
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
The description and the setting mode of the sorting criteria are the same ones pointed out
at paragraph 12.1.2.3, with the exception of the Match Acknowledged and Match
Unacknowledged criteria that are described here below.
If the user activates the Match Acknowledged box, the system will display, into the list, the
records that have been marked (refer to paragraph 12.1.2.2).
If the user activates the Match Unacknowledged box, the system will display the records
that have not been marked yet.
"
Elapsed Time. It defines the time range that passed between two different signals.
The description and the using mode of the command is pointed out at paragraph 12.1.2.3.
"
HighLight Equipment On Map. It points out, into the map window, the symbol of the
Network Element to which it is referred the selected record.
"
ClearHighlights. It removes the pointed out condition from all the symbol marked by
means of the HighLight Equipment On Map command (described at the preceding
paragraph).
"
and the functional status of the Network Element to which it is referred the selected record.
12.2.2.4 Help Menu

12.2.3 Current Alarms Browser window Status bar

D
The symbol : points out that the information present into the Current Alarms Browser
window are frozen. While, the symbol ! points out that the information are not frozen,
but the system dynamically refreshes them (refer to paragraph 12.2.2.2).
the number of the displayed records and the total number of records (xx of yy of Current
Alarms). If it has not been activated any filter, the number of the displayed signals
corresponds to the total number of signals.
203
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
12.2.4 Refreshing of the information into the Current Alarms Browser

window
The system dynamically refreshes the information present into the Current Alarms Browser
window only if it has been activated the automatic refresh procedure (refer to paragraph
12.2.4.1.)
Warning. By default, at the opening of the Current Alarms Browser window, the automatic
refresh procedure of the information is deactivated (symbol : into the status bar of the window).
the user with superuser profile can change the default setting.
204
12.
12.3
FAULT SIAE LOGS
OLD ALARM HISTORY
System access
User profile

The Old alarm history command allows displaying the history 102 of the alarm 103, of the event
and of the status 104 signals present into the Old History table relevant to the Network Elements
Into the Old History table, the system memorizes the history of the signals saved by means of
the Alarm history backup command (refer to paragraph 15.1) and restored by means of the
Alarm history restore command (refer to paragraph 15.2).
At the command choice, the system displays the Old History Browser window composed by a
table that lists the signals, by a menu bar and by a lower status bar. These elements are
Warning. If, at the window opening, the table is empty, it is necessary to recover, from the
backup file saved before, the list of the desired signals (refer to paragraph 15.2).
Such signals will remain available into the Old History table and into the Old History Browser
window, until when the system recovers a different list of signals.
By means of the commands present into the Old History Browser window, it is possible to
execute the following operations:
D
To copy into a text editor the list of the signals (refer to paragraph 12.3.2.1).
To point out, into the map window, the symbol of the Network Element to which it is
referred the selected record (refer to paragraph 12.3.2.3).
To check the time range between two different signals (refer to paragraph 12.3.2.3).
12.3.1 Old History Browser window List of the signals

Into the table, one record is devoted to each signal. Such a record provides the following
information: Severity, Ack, Set Time, Clear Time, Address, Type, Object, Message.
The description of the table options is the same one reported at paragraph 12.1.1.
205
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
12.3.2 Old History Browser window Menu bar

Into the menu bar of the Old History Browser window there are the menus and the commands
12.3.2.1 File Menu

"
Print/Save. It prints or saves on a file the list of the signals.

"
Export. It copies the signals into a window of the Text Editor program.
"

"
Reread Database. It executes a new reading of the records stored into the Old History
table and refreshes the information present into the window.
12.3.2.3 View Menu

"
Set Filter. It filters the list of the signals.

The description and the setting mode of the filters are the same one pointed out at
paragraph 12.1.2.3.
"
Elapsed Time. It defines the time range that passed between two different signals.
"
HighLight Equipment On Map. It points out, into the map window, the symbol of the
Network Element to which it is referred the selected record.
"
ClearHighlights. It removes the pointed out condition from all the symbol marked by
means of the HighLight Equipment On Map command (described at the preceding
paragraph).
"
Sort. It sorts the list of the records according to the recording date and time of the signals.
206
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
The selection of this command opens the Sort window activating the following option
pushbutton:
D
Ascending, the first record of the table correspond to the most recent signal; the system
lists the successive ones through decreasing order.
Descending, the first record of the table correspond to the oldest signal; the system
lists the successive ones through increasing order.
When the system executes the operation, it takes into account all the records memorised into
the database and not only the displayed ones.

"
Reread Database. It executes a new reading of the records stored into the Old History
table and refreshes the information present into the window.
12.3.2.5 Help Menu

12.3.3 Old History Browser window Status bar

D
not been activated any filter, the number of the displayed signals corresponds to the
total number of signals.
207
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
12.4
NE ALARM HISTORY
System access
User profile

The NE Alarm history command displays the history 102 of the alarm signals 103, of the event
and of the status ones 104 relevant to the selected Network Element only.
mouse and selecting the SIAE NE Alarm History command.
At the selection of the command, the system displays the Alarm History Browser window
described at paragraph 12.1.
To display the signals relevant to the other equipment, deactivate the Match Address filter (refer
208
12.
12.5
FAULT SIAE LOGS
NE CURRENT ALARMS
System access
User profile

The NE Current alarms command allows displaying the list of the alarm/event/status signals
currently activated into the selected equipment.
mouse and selecting the SIAE NE Current Alarms command.
At the selection of the command, the system displays the Current Alarms Browser window
described at paragraph 12.2.
To display the signals relevant to the other equipment, deactivate the Match Address filter (refer
209
FAULT SIAE LOGS
12.
12.6
SNMP NE HISTORY LOG
System access
User profile

Entry 109, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
The SNMP NE History Log command allows reading the log of the alarms, memorised into
the equipment controller.
The system memorizes the log read from equipment (called Network Element log NE log) 110
into the server/workstation, and keeps it available for successive queries of the user.
Warning. This command is available only for the equipment managed with SNMP protocol,
except for the Elfo and SDH N+1 equipment.
At the choice of the command, the system displays the Equipment History Log Management
Main Window window shown in Fig. 12.1.
operations:
D
to create a NE Log (refer to paragraph 12.6.1).
to create more NE Logs at the same time (refer to paragraph 12.6.2).
to display the contents of a NE Log (refer to paragraph 12.6.3).
to delete a NE Log relevant to an equipment (refer to paragraph 12.6.4).
to delete all the NE Logs relevant to an equipment (refer to paragraph 12.6.5).
to delete the signals memorised into the controller of an equipment (refer to paragraph
12.6.6).
109.
Warning. The user with Entry profile can only check the data.
110.
The wording Network Element log (NE Log) identifies a file where the system records the alarm
and status signals memorized into the controller of the selected equipment.
Warning. The list of the NE Logs and their contents can be displayed only through the Equipment
History Log Management Main Window window.
210
12.
List of the equipment

selected into the map
window (1)
FAULT SIAE LOGS
List of the NE Logs memorized

into the server/workstation
relevant to a single equipment (2)
Logic address
of the
equipment to
which refer
the NE Logs
present into
the below
area
List of the
selected NE
Logs for which
the system can
displays the
details of the
signals (3)
(1) The system identifies each equipment through a record that contains:
S the symbol that represents the equipment type (SDH, PDH, PMP, etc.).
S the equipment IP address.
S the equipment logic address.
When the user selects the equipment symbol, its edge becomes red.
To display the list of the memorised NE Logs relevant to an equipment, it is necessary to
select quickly twice the symbol of the equipment.
(2) The system identifies each NE Log through a record that points out the date
(daymonthyear) and the time (hour:minutes:seconds) of the file creation.
When a NE Log is deactivated, it means that it has been selected to be displayed. When the
NE Log is removed from the Selected Files List area (refer to paragraph 12.6.3), the system
activates again the relevant record into the area under examination.
(3) The system identifies each NE Log through a record that contains:
S the symbol that represents the equipment type (SDH, PDH, PMP, etc.).
S the equipment IP address.
S the equipment logic address.
S the date and time of the file creation.
The procedure to insert the NE Logs into the area under examination and to display the
details of their signals is pointed out at paragraph 12.6.3.
Fig. 12.1
211
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
12.6.1 Creation of a NE Log

1.
Into the Selected Equipment area, select the equipment for which it has to be created
a NE Log.
2.
Select the R.H. side pushbutton of the mouse.

The system displays a popup menu.
3.
Select the command:
Send Read/Delete File Request, to create the NE Log and to delete the signals
memorised into the equipment controller.
Send Read File Request, to create the NE Log and to prevent the deleting of the
signals.
The system displays the created NE Log into the ...history log file area. The system
automatically saves the NE Log with the name corresponding to its creation date_time.
Warning. If the system displays the Uploaded file is empty. File is not saved message,
it does not create the log file because the system does not memorize any signal into
12.6.2 Creation of more NE Logs at the same time

1.
Into the Selected Equipment area, select the equipment for which the user wants
creating a NE Log.
2.
Select the Read log Files from Equipment button.

The system automatically saves the created NE Logs with the names corresponding
to their creation date_time.
Warning. If the system displays the Uploaded file is empty. File is not saved message,
it does not create the log file because the system does not memorize any signal into
12.6.3 Displaying of the content of one or more NE Logs

1.
Into the Selected Equipment area, select quickly twice the equipment for which it has
to be created the NE Log.
Into the ...history log files area, the system will display the list of the NE Logs relevant
to the selected equipment.
212
12.
2.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
Select quickly twice the NE Log for which it has to be checked the relevant content.
The system displays the NE Log into the Selected File List area. The system disables
the file into the ...history log file area.
3.
Repeat the step 2 and eventually the step 1, to insert into the Selected File List area
all the desired NE Logs.
4.
The user can removes from the Selected File List area:
5.
a single file selecting the icon that characterizes the file and pressing the R.H. side
pushbutton of the mouse. The system displays a popup menu. Select the
Remove From List pushbutton.
all the files, select the Clear selections pushbutton.
Press the Show selected Files records pushbutton.

The system opens the NE Logger Browser window that lists all the signals memorised
into the selected NE Logs.
The elements present into the window are the same ones
Browser window (refer to paragraph 12.1).
111
of the Alarm History
12.6.4 Deleting of an equipment NE Log

1.
Into the Selected Equipment area, select quickly twice the equipment for which it has
to be deleted a NE Log.
Into the ...history log file area, the system will display the list of the NE Logs relevant
to the selected equipment.
2.
Select the NE Log and press the R.H. side pushbutton of the mouse.
3.
Select the Delete File command.

The system deletes the file.
Warning. It is not possible to delete a deactivated file.
12.6.5 Deleting of all the NE Logs on an equipment

1.
111.
Into the Selected Equipment area, select the equipment for which the user wants to
delete all the NE Logs.
With the exception of some commands of the menus, present into the Alarm History Browser
window but not into the NE Logger Browser one.
213
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
2.

3.
Select the Delete All Files pushbutton.

The system deletes all the equipment NE Logs.
12.6.6 Deleting of the signals memorised into the controller of an

equipment
1.
Into the Selected Equipment area, select the equipment for which it is necessary to
delete the signals.
2.

3.
Select the Send Delete File Request pushbutton.
Warning. The user can delete the signals memorised into the controller of an equipment also
during the creation operation of a NE Log (refer to paragraph 12.6.1).
214
12.
12.7
FAULT SIAE LOGS
ALARM SUMMARY
System access
User profile

The Alarm Summary option displays the history RESUME of the alarm, event and status
signals subdivided according to their seriousness level.
The signals refer to the Network Elements present into the open map.
At the option selection, the system displays the Siae Alarm Summary window shown into
Fig. 12.2.
operations:
D
D
To sort the list of the signals (refer to paragraph 12.7.1).

To open the Alarm History Browser window (refer to notes 5, 6 and 7 of Fig. 12.2).
it points out
the filter
activation (1)
Automatic
refresh of the
information (2)
Refreshing
time of the
information (3)
Subdivision
criterion of
the signals
(5)
Number of
signals
subdivided
according to
the signal
type
seriousness
level (4)
Status
change
indication (6)
Number of
detected and
reset signals (7)
Total number
of signals
Number of
detected but
not yet reset
signals (8)
Select this
pushbutton to
refresh the data
Select this pushbutton

to reset the status
change signal
Select this
pushbutton to
set the filters (9)
Fig. 12.2
215
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
Notes of Fig. 12.2
(1) The wording:

S Filters: NONE, points out that there are not some activated filters. The information displayed
into the window refer to all the signals memorised into the Alarm History table.
S Filters: <applied filter(s)>, it means that it is activated the pointed out filter(s). The information
displayed into the window refer only to the signals that comply with all the set criteria.
Warning. The user can insert into this area a description (refer to paragraph 12.7.1).
(2) If the Auto Refresh box is:

S activated, it means that the system automatically refreshes the window every N seconds. The
value of the N parameter is pointed out into the Timeout (sec) box.
In this condition, the Refresh pushbutton is not available.
S deactivated, it means that the system does not automatically refresh the window. To refresh
the window, the user has to select the Refresh pushbutton.
(3) this parameter points out the time between an automatic refresh of the data and the next one (this
parameter is a meaningful one only when the Auto Refresh box has been activated).
To change this parameter, type the new value into the text box (numeric value comprised between 30
and 999 seconds). The user can change the value also when it has been activated the automatic
refresh procedure. In such a case, at the next refresh, after having changed the timeout, the system
will get the new value as the valid one.
(4) Into the Siae Alarm Summary window, it is possible to have the absence of one or more records
relevant to the signal type/seriousness levels. Their presence is submitted to the activation of the
specific box into the Filters Setting window (refer to paragraph 12.7.1).
When the user deactivates the box, relevant to a type of signal/seriousness level, the system displays
into the Siae Alarm Summary window, the Filtered record, into which it points out the complessive
signals of the remaining records present into the window 112.
The Filtered record have the same functions of the other records. With details:
S If the user selects the Filtered pushbutton, the system opens the Alarm History Browser
window that reports the complessive signals of the remaining records present into the
window.
S On the side of the Cleared pushbutton, the system points out the complessive number of
detected/reset signals relevant only to the records present into the window. Then, if the user
selects the Cleared pushbutton, the system opens the Alarm History Browser window that
reports the details of the signals under examination.
S On the side of the Active pushbutton, the system points out the complessive number of
signals detected but not yet reset relevant only to the records present into the window. Then,
if the user selects the Active pushbutton, the system opens the Alarm History Browser
window that reports the details of the signals under examination.
112.
For instance, if into the window, there are only the Critical (Cleared 20 Active 15) and Major
(Cleared 5 Active 3) records, the Filtered record will point out the sum of their signals (Cleared
25 Active 18).
216
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
(5) In this column, the system reports the criterion used to subdivide the signals. With details, into the
record:
S Critical, the system points out the alarm signals with Critical seriousness level. Then, if the
user selects the Critical pushbutton, the system opens the Alarm History Browser window
that reports only the alarm signals with Critical seriousness level.
S Major, the system points out the alarm signals with Major seriousness level. Then, if the user
selects the Major pushbutton, the system opens the Alarm History Browser window that
reports only the alarm signals with Major seriousness level.
S Minor, the system points out the alarm signals with Minor seriousness level. Then, if the user
selects the Minor pushbutton, the system opens the Alarm History Browser window that
reports only the alarm signals with Minor seriousness level.
S Warning, the system points out the alarm signals with Warning seriousness level. Then, if the
user selects the Warning pushbutton, the system opens the Alarm History Browser window
that reports only the alarm signals with Warning seriousness level.
S Status, the system points out the status signals. Then, if the user selects the Status
pushbutton, the system opens the Alarm History Browser window that reports only the status
signals.
S Normal, the system points out the event signals. Then, if the user selects the Normal
pushbutton, the system opens the Alarm History Browser window that reports only the event
signals.
S All, the system points out all the signals (alarms, status, events). Then, if the user selects the
All pushbutton, the system opens the Alarm History Browser window that reports all the
signals.
(6) The presence of the asterisk on the side of the record points out that, from the opening of the Siae
Alarm Summary window or from the last selection of the Clear Alert pushbutton, it has happened
a change (it has been detected or reset a signal).
To remove the asterisk, select the Clear Alert pushbutton.
(7) Into this column, the system reports the number of detected/reset signals subdivided according to their
seriousness level or the total ones. With details, on the side of the pushbutton:
S Cleared (Critical record ), the system points out the number of the detected/reset alarms with
Critical seriousness level.
Then, if the user selects the pushbutton under examination, the system opens the Alarm
History Browser window that reports only the detected /reset alarms with Critical seriousness
level.
S Cleared (Major record ), the system points out the number of the detected/reset alarms with
Major seriousness level.
History Browser window that reports only the detected /reset alarms with Major seriousness
level.
S Cleared (Minor record ), the system points out the number of the detected/reset alarms with
Minor seriousness level.
History Browser window that reports only the detected /reset alarms with Minor seriousness
level.
S Cleared (Warning record ), the system points out the number of the detected/reset alarms
with Warning seriousness level.
217
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
History Browser window that reports only the detected /reset alarms with Warning
seriousness level.
S Cleared (Status record ), the system points out the number of the detected/reset status
signals.
History Browser window that reports only the detected /reset status signals.
S Cleared (Normal record ), the system points out the number of the detected/reset event
signals.
History Browser window that reports only the detected /reset event signals.
S Cleared (All record ), the system points out the complessive number of the detected/reset
signals.
History Browser window that reports all the detected /reset signals.
(8) Into this column, the system reports the number of detected but not yet reset signals subdivided
according to their seriousness level or the total ones. With details, on the side of the box:
S Active (Critical record ), the system points out the number of the detected alarms with Critical
seriousness level.
History Browser window that reports only the detected alarms with Critical seriousness level.
S Active (Major record ), the system points out the number of the detected alarms with Major
seriousness level.
History Browser window that reports only the detected alarms with Major seriousness level.
S Active (Minor record ), the system points out the number of the detected alarms with Minor
seriousness level.
History Browser window that reports only the detected alarms with Minor seriousness level.
S Active (Warning record ), the system points out the number of the detected alarms with
Warning seriousness level.
History Browser window that reports only the detected alarms with Warning seriousness level.
S Active (Status record ), the system points out the number of the detected status signals.
History Browser window that reports only the detected status signals.
S Active (Normal record ), the system points out the number of the detected event signals.
History Browser window that reports only the detected event signals.
S Active (All record ), the system points out the complessive number of the detected signals.
History Browser window that reports all the detected signals.
(9) The choice of the pushbutton opens the Filters Settings window described at the paragraph 12.7.1.
218
12.
12.7.1
FAULT SIAE LOGS
Filters Settings window
When the user selects the Filter pushbutton, the system opens the Filters Setting window that
allows sorting the list of the signals.
The sorting operation consists of defining one or more criteria in such a way to display only
the signals that comply with all the specified criteria.
To sort the data into a list, activate one or more boxes 113 present into the Filters Setting window
according to the desired criteria. The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the
window displaying an additional section.
The available criteria are the following ones:
"
Match Severity box. In this section, the user can set as filter, the signal type (alarm, status,
event), and for the alarms their seriousness.
With details the box 114:
Critical, (red) points out the alarm signal with Critical seriousness.
Major, (orange) points out the alarm signal with Major seriousness.
Minor, (yellow) points out the alarm signal with Minor seriousness.
Warning, (light blue) points out the alarm signal with Warning seriousness.
Status, (blue) points out the status signal.
Normal, (green) points out the event signal.
Warning. The deactivation of a box causes the removal of the relevant record from
the Siae Alarm Summary window and the displaying of the Filtered record (refer
to note 4 of Fig. 12.2).
"
Occured After and Occured Before boxes. In these sections, it is possible to set as filter
the signal date/time.
If the user activates the Occured After box, into the Siae Alarm Summary window, the
system will take into account only the signals with a recording data equal to or successive
with respect to the one pointed out on the side of the option.
If the user activates the Occured Before box, the system will take into account only the
signals with a recording data equal to or preceding with respect to the one pointed out on
the side of the option.
To change the date/time displayed on the side of the specific option, move the pointer of
the scroll bar or click on the arrows placed on the sides of the bar. Into the box placed over
the bar, if the user chooses the Coarse Granularity option, he can change the date/time with
steps of one hour, while if he chooses the Fine Granularity option with steps equal to one
second.
If the user activates at the same time the boxes and properly sets the date/time, he can
define a time range.
"
Match Address box. In this section, the user can set as filter one or more logic address
of Network Element.
113.
One box is activated when it contains the symbol n

.
114.
The color of the box when it is activated is the same color coupled with the alarm seriousness or
with the signal type.
219
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
The user can set the desired logic addresses through one of the following modes:
Select the symbol or the symbols of the interested NEs, directly into the map
window and choose the Add From Map button.
Type the logic address of the NE into the Source box and choose the Add button.
The system inserts the set values into the area placed on the side of the Match Address
box.
The user can delete from the list a single option choosing, after having highlighted such an
option, the Remove button or he can delete all the options at the same time selecting the
Remove All button.
"
Match Object box. In this section, the user can set as filter a specific object by means of
the following procedure:
a.
Open the Equipment Type option menu and select the NE type to which the object
belongs.
b.
Open the Object option menu and set the desired object.
The user can set a single object class at a time or all the classes at the same time
selecting the All Objects option.
"
Match Message String box. In this section, the user can set as filter an alphanumeric
string; into the Siae Alarm Summary window, the system will take into account only the
signals that contain, into the Message field (refer to paragraph 12.1.1), the set character
string.
If the user activates the Case Sensitive box, the system will distinguish between uppercase
and lower case characters; on the contrary, if the user deactivates the box, the system will
not be able to detect any difference.
"
Match Acknowledged and Match Unacknowledged boxes. In these sections, the user can
set as filter the marking status of the signals.
If the user activates the Match Acknowledged box, into the Siae Alarm Summary window,
the system will take into account only the signals that have been marked (refer to
paragraph 12.1.2.2). Then, it is possible to point out:
The TIC (Trouble Identification Code) identification code assigned by the user to
the record during the marking, activating the TIC box and selecting the code.
The username of the NMS5UX user who has executed the marking, activating the
User box and typing the username.
If the user activates the Match Unacknowledged, box, the system will take into account only
the not yet marked signals.
"
Description box. Into this box, the user can insert a description that will be displayed into
the Filters:... area of the Siae Alarm Summary window.
After having set the criteria, choose the OK button (the system executes the sorting
operations and closes the Filters Setting window) or the Apply one (it applies the filters and
does not closes the window).
Each time that the system sorts the list, it takes into account all the records, as the displayed
220
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
Warning. When the user closes the Siae Alarm Summary window, the system automatically
removes the possible activation of the filters.
Into the Filters Setting window, there are also the following pushbuttons:
Save .... It saves into a file the set criteria.

At the choice of the pushbutton, the system displays the Save Filter window.
Type the name to assigned to the file into the Selection text box.
Warning. The path pointed out into the text box can not be changed. To confirm
the operation choose the OK button.
Load .... It opens the file that contains a specific setting of filters that have been
previously saved (refer to the description relevant to the Save... button).
At the choice of the button, the system displays the Load Filter window.
Warning. The path pointed out into the Selection box can not be changed.
To confirm the operation choose the OK button.
Delete .... It deletes the file that contains a specific setting of filters that have been
previously saved (refer to the description relevant to the Save... button).
At the choice of the Delete... button, the system displays the Delete Filter window.
Warning. The path pointed out into the Selection box can not be changed.
To delete the file select the OK button.
Clear Filters. It removes the activation of all the filters with the exception of the
Match Severity, Match Acknowledged, Match Unacknowledged boxes.
Cancel. It closes the window and without executing the command.
Help. This pushbutton opens the online manual.
221
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
12.8
NMS5UX STATISTICS
System access
User profile

The command allows displaying the alarm, event and status signalimgs that occurred on all the
equipment of the network and filtering them according to predefined criteria.
When the command is selected, the NMS5UX Alarms Statistics window displayed in Fig. 12.3
opens. The commands present in this window allows executing the following operations:
D
to display the signalings of all the equipment, subdivided by time interval (par. 12.8.1)
to display the signalings of all the equipment, subdivided by equipment (par. 12.8.2)
to display the signalings of all the equipment , subdivided by typology (par. 12.8.3)
filtrare la visualizzazione delle segnalazioni (par. 12.8.4) 115.
It is possible to execute the update of the data displaying selecting the Reload pushbutton.
115.
The filtering operation consists in determining one or more criteria in such a way that
only the signalings that satisfy the specified criteria are displayed.
222
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
Type of displayed operation
Fig. 12.3
NMN5UX Alarms Statistics window
223
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
12.8.1 To display the signalings of all the network equipment subdivided

by time interval
1.
Select the Graphics Networks Events Counters command: the window displays
a histogram graph of the signalings of all the equipment of the network subdivided by
day 116. The detail can be deepened by each single day listed in the graph.
2.
Double click with the left button of the mouse on the histogram of a given day to display
the subdivision of the signalings of the selected day by intervals of 15 minutes 117.
3.
Now, double click with the left button of the mouse on the histogram of a given period
of 15 minutes to display the subdivision of the signalings relevant to the selected 15
minutes by equipment 117.
4.
Now, double click with the left button of the mouse on the histogram of a given
equipment to display the signalings relevant to the equipment under examination 117.
12.8.2 To display the signalings of all the equipment of the network

subdivided by equipment
1.
Select the Graphics Equipments Events Counters command: the window

displays a histogram graph of the signalings of all the equipment of the network
subdivided by equipment, in decreasing order according to the number of occurred
events and only for the network equipment that generated signalings. The detail can
be deepened by each single equipment listed in the graph.
2.
Double click with the left button of the mouse on the histogram of a given equipment
to display the subdivision of the signalings of the equipment by day 117.
3.
Now, double click with the left button of the mouse on the histogram of a given day to
display the subdivision of the signalings by intervals of 15 minutes 117.
4.
Now, double click with the left button of the mouse on the histogram of a given intervals
of 15 minutes to display the signaling relevant to the selected interval 117.
116. By default, the window displays the signalings relevant to the last 30 days and only for the days when
signalings occurred. To modify the time window of the displaying, it is necessary to act on a system
configuration file. Refer to the administrator manual for the details of the operation.
117. Select the Up button to return to the immediately previous displaying.
224
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
12.8.3 To display the signalings of all the network equipment subdivided

by typology
1.
Select the Graphics Events Frequency command: the window displays an

histogram graph of the signalings of all the network equipment , subdivided by type of
signaling, in decreasing order of the number of signalings. The detail can be deepened
by single signaling displayed in the graph.
2.
Double click with the left button of the mouse on the histogram of una segnalazione
per visualizzare la suddivisione delle segnalazioni per giorni 117.
3.
Now, double click with the left button of the mouse on the histogram of a given day to
display the subdivision of the signaling by intervals of 15 minutes 117.
12.8.4 To filter the displaying of the signalings

1.
Select the Filter pushbutton.

The Filtered Graph Creation window opens wallowing the filtering of the list of
signalings.
2.
3.
Select the pushbutton relevant to the set of signalings that you wish to display:
Network Counters, the signalings are subdivided by day
Events Freq., the signalings aresubdivided by typology
Equip. Counters, the signalings are subdivided bysingle equipment
Activate one or more box present in the Filtered Graph Creation window (Fig. 12.3),
according to the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box enables the
criterion and expands the window displaying another section. When one or more
filtering criteria are active, an asterisk is displayed on the Filter pushbutton. A box is
active when the symbol n is present on it.
The available criteria are:
Match Date box. It sets the time interval which the signalings must belong
to in order to be displayed. The cascade menu offers four options:
==, only the signalings of the day determined by the position of the cursor on
the right side will be displayed118
>=. only the signalings of the days following the day determined by the
position of the cursor on the right side and of that day itself will be displayed
118
<=, only the signalings of the days before the day determined by the position
of the cursor on the right side and of that day itself will be displayed 118
118.
The cursor can be moved at step of 15 minutes.
225
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
<>, only the signalings of the day between the two dates pointed out by the
positions of the cursors will be displayed 118
226
Match Source box. It sets a given equipment as source of the signalings which
must be displayed. Select the Select pushbutton, a window opens that
allows the selection of the single wished equipment. Select the wished
equipment. The Reset pushbutton deletes all the equipment possibly
present in thematch list. It is possible to set only one equipme per timeor more
equipment at the same time (multiple selection).
Match Object box. It sets a given object as filter. Open the Equipment Type
option menu and select the type of NE which the NE belongs to. Open the
Object option menu and set the wished object . It is possible to set only one
class of object per time or all the class at the same time selecting the All
Objects item.
Contains string box. It sets as filter an alphanumerical string. The NMS5UX

Alarms Statistics window will display only the signalings that contains the set
characters string into the Message field (see paragraph 12.1.1).
12.
12.9
FAULT SIAE LOGS
TRANSACTION LOG
System access
User profile

The Transaction Log command allows displaying the list of the operations executed by the
NMS5UX users that have requested some changes of the network configuration (for instance
the adding of a Network Element), of the configuration of the supervisory system (for instance
the adding of a user) or of the configuration of a Network Element (for instance the change of
a parameter).
Warning. If the user that has selected the command has the:
D
Superuser profile, the list points out the operations executed by the NMS5UX users
of all the existing maps.
Privileged or Advanced profiles, the list points out the operations executed by the
NMS5UX users of its own map.
At the command choice, the system displays the Transaction Browser window composed by a
table that lists the operations, by a menu bar and by a lower status bar. These elements are
Warning. To make quicker the reading from database and to prevent the displaying of too old
records, at the opening of the window, the system points out only the operations executed into
the last N days (default N=10 days, it can be configured by the user with Superuser profile).
This does not means that the oldest records can not be displayed, but that it is automatically
applied a filter.
operations:
119.
To delete the operations from the list (refer to paragraph 12.9.2.2).
A Writing operation is the deleting of the records into the Transaction Browser window.
227
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
12.9.1 Transaction Browser window List of the operations

Into the table, one record is devoted to each operation. Such a record provides the following
information:
"
Operation. Operation type.

The list of the operations and their descriptions are reported at paragraph 12.9.2.3.
"
Time. Execution date and time of the operation.
"
Map Name. The name of the map where it has been executed the operation.
"
User Name. The name of the user who has executed the operation.
"
Element. The network element involved into the operation.
"
Object. The name of the logic or physical object to which it is referred the operation.
"
Information. The alphanumeric string that better specifies the type of the operation.
Warning. the information present into the window correspond to the operations
executed until the time when the user selects the command or executes the refresh (refer
The presence of the symbol points out that the information is not available because it is not
a significant one for the operation type to which it is referred.
12.9.2 Transaction Browser window Menu bar

Into the menu bar of the Transaction Browser window there are the menus and the commands
12.9.2.1 File Menu

"
228
Print/Save. It prints or saves on a file the list of the operations. The command choice opens
All records, it prints or saves the list of the operations stored into the database.
Filtered records, it prints/saves the list of the displayed operations. If it has not
been activated any filter, the displayed records correspond to the ones memorised
into the database.
Selected records, it prints/saves the list of the selected operations. This

command is available only if it has been selected at least one record.
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
The format and the information contents of the print is the same one of the displayed table.
"

"
Delete records. It removes the selected records from the list and from the database.
The command choice displays a confirmation window that points out the number of the
records to be deleted. Choose OK to execute the operation.
Warning. This command is available only for the user with Advanced, Privileged and
Superuser profile.
"
Refresh Info. It executes a new reading of the database and refreshes the information.
At the command choice, the system refreshes the date/time (refer to paragraph 12.9.3) and
it will point out the refreshing time.
12.9.2.3 View Menu

"
Set Filter. It opens the View Filter window that allows filtering the list of the operations
stored into the system database.
The filtering operations consists on defining one or more criteria in such a way that the
To filter a list, activate one or more boxes 120 present into the View Filter window, according
to the criteria to be used. The activation of each box expands the window displaying an
additional section. The available criteria are the following ones:
D
Match user box. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, the NMS5UX user who
has executed the operation.
Select the desired user name from the list of the existing users.
Match date boxes. In these sections, it is possible to set, as a filter, the time range
when it has been executed the operation.
To set the filter, move the indicators of the Events occurred on or ... scrolling bars to
set the desired time range. Into the Transaction Browser window, the system will
display the operations that have an execution date more recent than the one pointed
out into the Events occurred on or after field and more ancient than the one pointed
out into the Events occurred on or before field.
If the user activates the Granularity boxes placed on the side of the bars (Coarse
wording), it is possible to change the date/time with steps of 1 hour, while if he
deactivates such boxes (Fine wording) with steps of 1 second.
120.
A box is activated when, inside it, there is the symbol n

.
229
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
Match operation box. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, a category of

operations or a specific operation, executing the following procedure:
a.
Select the desired category from the Categories list.

Into the Operations list, the system points out the operations coupled with the
category.
b.
Select the desired operation.

If the user has not selected any operation, the system will display, into the
Transaction Browser window, the records relevant to all the operations of such a
category.
The categories that group the options are pointed out here below:
ACCESS, Access operations to the NMS5UX system.
NMS COMMANDS, Operations that have changed the connection of the

NE.
NMS EDIT, Operations that have changed the configuration of the map.
NMS EQ. MANAGER, Operations that have changed the configuration
parameters of a NE.
NMS LOG, Operations relevant to the data present into the system
database.
NMS SPECIAL, Operations that have changed the status of the serial ports
used for the connection of the NMS5UX system to the NEs.
NMS USERS, Operations executed on the NMS5UX users.
The operations coupled with each category are pointed out in Tab. 12.1.
D
Match object box. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, the Network Element
or a specific object of a NE, executing the following procedure:
a.
Select the type of Network Element into the Element list.

Into the Objects list, the system points out the objects coupled with the selected
NE.
Warning. Not all the Network Elements are provided with a list of objects.
b.
Select the desired object into the Objects list.

If it has not been selected any object, into the Transaction Browser window, the
system will display the records relevant to all the objects of the NE.
Match Field String box. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, an alphanumeric
string; into the Transaction Browser window, the system will display all the records that
contain the set wording, in the Element, Object or Information field according to the
executed setting (refer to the following procedure).
To set the filter, execute the following procedure:
a.
Select the pushbutton relevant to the field of the Transaction Browser window
where the user wants to apply the filter (Element, Object or Information field).
b.
Into the text box, type the string of characters.

If the user selects the Get Selected Transaction pushbutton, the system will point
out, into the text box, the value present into the field (selected at the previous step)
relevant to the pointed out record into the Transaction Browser window.
230
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
If the user activates the Exact Match box, the system will consider only the records
that exactly contain, into the field, the set wording; On the contrary, if the user
deactivates the box, the system will display the signals that contain, into the filed,
a value that contains also the set wording.
D
Match map box. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, the map to which it is
coupled the NMS5UX user who has executed the operation.
Select the map name from the list of the existing maps.
Warning. The filter is available only for the user with superuser profile.
After having set the criteria, choose the OK pushbutton (it applies the filters and closes
the View Filter window) or the Apply pushbutton (it applies the filters and does not close
the window).
The system will display, into the Transaction Browser window, only the records that comply
with all the activated options. Each time that the system filters the list, it considers all the
records, as the displayed ones as the hidden ones.
To delete the activation of all the filters and to display the complete list of the operations,
choose the Clear pushbutton.
Warning. When the user closes the Transaction Browser window, the system automatically
removes the eventual activation of the filters.
12.9.2.4 Help Menu

12.9.3 Transaction Browser window Status bar

D
the number of the displayed records and the total number of records (xx of xx). If it has
not been activated any filter, the number of the displayed records corresponds to the
the date and the time when the window has been opened or refreshed (by means of
the choice of the Refresh Info command refer to paragraph 12.9.2.2).
12.9.4 Recording of the operations

The operations are stored into the database of the supervisory system.
231
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
Such operations remain stored for a certain number of day (that can be configured by the user
with Superuser profile default 90 days), after that they are automatically removed.
During this period, it is possible to remove manually the signals (refer to paragraph 12.9.2.2).
It is advisable to delete and/or to store on file periodically the least significant records, in such
a way to prevent the saturation of the database. In fact, the system stores on disk all the signals
until when it finds free space.
Tab. 12.1
Category
ACCESS
NMS
COMMANDS
NMS EDIT
NMS EQ.
MANAGER
NMS LOG
232
Operation
Description
ACCESS NOT
AUTHORIZED
Failed try to access to the system (typing of a wrong password)
LOGIN
Access of a user to the system
LOGOUT
Exit of a user from the system
CONNECT EQ
Connection of one or more Network Elements
DISCONNECT EQ
Disconnection of one or more Network Elements
RESETCONNECT EQ
Reset and connection of one or more Network Elements
ADD ELEMENT
Creation of a new Network Element
DELETE ELEMENT
Deleting of a NE
MODIFY ELEMENT
Changing of the characteristics relevant to a NE
NETWORK SEVERITY
CHANGE
Changing of the seriousness level of the alarms for a type of NE
BACKUP CONFIG
Saving of the current configuration of a NE into its backup configuration
CC OPERATION
Operations executed inside the CrossConnect Manager.
CONFIG DOWNLOAD
Transfer of a configuration created before into a NE
CREATE OBJECT
Creation of an object inside a NE
DELETE OBJECT
Deleting of an object inside a NE
EQUIPMENT SEVERITY
CHANGE
Changing of the forwarding status relevant to the alarms/trap for a

specific NE
PERIPH DOWNLOAD
Download of the sw/fw of a NE peripheral unit
RESET EQ.
CONTROLLER
Reset of the main controller of a NE
SET ATTRIBUTES
Changing of the functioning parameters of a NE
SOFTWARE
DOWNLOAD
Download of the equipment sw/fw
SPECIAL ACTION
Special operation executed on a NE
TS OPERATION
Meaningful operation executed inside the Time Slot Manager
DATABASE BACKUP
Saving on disk or on tape of the system database
DELETE ALR HISTORY
Deleting of one or more records from the Alarm History Browser

window.
RESTORE ALR
HISTORY
Restore from disk or from tape of an Alarm History file.
RESTORE PERF
Restore from disk or from tape of an Performance Monitoring file.
SAVE ALR HISTORY
Saving on disk or on tape of the Alarm History database.
SAVE PERF
Saving on disk or on tape of the Performance Monitoring database.
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
Tab. 12.1
Category
NMS
SPECIAL
NMS
USERS
Operation
Description
CLOSE PORT
Closing of one or more ports of the Workstation (WS Port) or of the

Communication Server Board (CSB Port)
CONNECT WSCS
Connection of a Workstation (WS) or of a Communication Server

Board (CSB)
DISCONNECT WSCS
Disconnection of a WS or of a CSB
OPEN PORT
Opening of one or more WS Port or CSB Port
CREATE USER
Creation of a new NMS5UX user
DELETE USER
Deleting of a NMS5UX user
MODIFY USER
Changing of the characteristics relevant to a NMS5UX user
233
12.
FAULT SIAE LOGS
12.10 NMS5UX INSPECT

System Access
User Profile

Superuser
The NMS5UX Inspect command allows opening the Siae Inspect program for the control and
the analysis of the system processes and alarms (NMS5UX, HP OpenView,
workstation/server).
The selection of the command opens the Inspect window. The description and the using mode
of the window are reported into the administrator manual (NMS5UX Administrator manual).
234
13
13.
OPTIONS SIAE OPTIONS
The Options Siae Options menu contains the following commands:

D
Legacy Network Alarm Hysteresis, it allows setting the hysteresis parameters that
characterizes the ringing alarms.
Warning. The command is available only for the user with superuser profile and it
affects only the NEs managed with the Legacy protocol.
Then, the command is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
SNMP Network Severity Code, it changes the network seriousness level couple
with the alarm 121 of a type of NE.
The network seriousness level is the level that characterizes the alarm when it is
displayed by the NMS5UX system 122.
The network seriousness level coupled with an alarm is common to all the NEs of the
same type present into all the maps managed by the supervisory system.
Warning. The command is available only for the user with superuser profile and it
affects only the NEs managed with the SNMP protocol.
SNMP Equipment Severity Code, it allows executing the following operations:
to enable/disable the alarm and the forwarding status of the trap 123 executed by
the selected NE, to the supervisory system.
When the user has enabled an alarm, the detection (or reset) of such an alarm is
stored by the equipment and communicated to the supervisory system by means
121.
With the exception of the alarms relevant to the user inputs (refer to paragraph 7.1.5.2).
122.
For instance, let us suppose to have connected, to the NMS5UX system, two NEs with SDH Radio
type: NEA and NEB.
By means of the SNMP Equipment Severity Code command, the system locally defines that the
x alarm for the NEA has Normal seriousness level, while for the NEB has Minor seriousness
level. On the contrary, by means of the SNMP Network Severity Code command, the system
defines that the x alarm for all the SDH radio type NEs has Critical seriousness level.
Into the NEA, the detection (or reset) of the x alarm will be stored into the NE controller and
seen by the local management program (LCT) with Normal seriousness level, while it will be
seen by the NMS5UX system with Critical seriousness level. While into the NEB, the detection
(or reset) of the x alarm will be stored into the NE controller and seen by the local management
program (LCT) with Minor seriousness level, while it will be seen by the NMS5UX system with
Critical seriousness level.
235
13.
of the forwarding of the relevant trap (only if the trap forwarding function has been
enabled).
When the user has disabled an alarm, its detection (or reset) is not stored by the
equipment and not communicated to the supervisory system: as if the alarm has
never occurred.
To change the local seriousness level of the alarms 121 relevant to the selected
NE 122.
The local seriousness level is the level that characterizes the alarm when such
an alarm is stored into the NE controller and displayed by the local management
system (LCT).
For the same alarm, it is possible to define a local seriousness level different for
the several Network Elements.
Warning. This command is available only for the NEs managed with SNMP protocol,
D
NMS5UX System Users, it allows the management of the NMS5UX users.

The management level changes according to the profile of the user that chooses the
command.
With details, the user with:
superuser profile, can check the list of the NMS5UX users present into all the
OpenView maps; add, delete users and change the characteristics of the users,
create a new map.
entry, normal, advanced and privileged profiles, can change the password coupled
with his own users.
NMS5UX Logged Users, it allows displaying the list of the NMS5UX users connected
with the supervisory system and the list of the activated siae application programs
(browser, manager, etc. ).
SNMP LCT Equipment Users, it allows displaying and changing the LCT user list
of the selected Network Element.
SNMP LCT Logged Users, it displays the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX)
connected with the NE selected at the choice of the option; then, it allows forcing the
disconnection (logout) of one or more users.
SNMP NE Remote Element Table, it manages the remote equipment list of the
selected NE.
SNMP NE Sw/Fw Download, it executes the updating of the equipment

software/firmware (sw/fw) of the selected NE or of the NEs.
123.
The trap is the message (in this case, it is a detection or reset message of the alarm signal)
spontaneously forwarded by the NE to the supervisory system.
236
13.
The updating operation of the sw/fw can be immediately executed or it can be

programmed for a specific date/time.
D
SNMP Scheduled Sw Dwl Status, it displays the list of the NEs, managed with
SNMP protocol, that have been programmed for the updating of the equipment
software/firmware (sw/fw).
SNMP NE Sw/Fw Release, it displays the version and allows updating the
equipment software/firmware of the selected NE.
Legacy NE Sw/Fw Download, it executes the updating of the equipment

software/firmware (sw/fw) of the selected NE or of the NEs.
The updating operation of the sw/fw can be immediately executed or it can be
programmed for a specific date/time.
Warning. This command is available only for the NEs managed with Legacy protocol.
Then, the command is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
Legacy Scheduled Sw Dwl Status it displays the list of the NEs, managed with
Legacy protocol, that have been programmed for the updating of the equipment
Warning. The command is present into the menu only if the software modules for the

If the command opens the window where there are some parameters, it is also specified the type
of operation that can be executed. The wording Reading points out that it is possible to check
the parameters; the wording Writing that it is possible to set or to change them.
237
13.
13.1
LEGACY NETWORK ALARM HYSTERESIS
System access
User profile

Superuser
The Legacy Network Alarm Hysteresis option allows setting the values of the t and n
parameters that define the observation hysteresis relevant to the ringing alarms 124.
Warning. The setting of the t and n parameters affects only the equipment managed
with the Legacy protocol.
Warning. The command is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
The choice of the option opens the Fleeting Alarms Manager window that contains the following
elements:
D
t box. It points out the observation time expressed by means of minutes.

To increase or to decrease the pointed out value, select the arrows placed on the side
of the box. It is possible to set a value comprised between 1 and 10.
n box. It points out the number of transitions during the t time range.
To increase or to decrease the pointed out value, select the arrows placed on the side
of the box. It is possible to set a value comprised between 2 and 32.
Default pushbutton. It resets, into the t and n fields, the default values that
correspond to t=1 and n=10.
Apply pushbutton. It implements the new settings and it does not close the window.
Close pushbutton. It closes the window and does not execute the operation.
Help pushbutton. It opens the online manual.
Warning. The t and n parameters are common parameters for all the equipment managed
with the Legacy protocol (network global parameters). Such parameters are periodically
forwarded from the central part toward the peripheral one through a broadcast message.
124.
238
More detailed information concerning the ringing alarms are reported at paragraph 7.1.7.
13.
13.2
SNMP NETWORK SEVERITY CODE
System access
User profile

Superuser
The SNMP Network Severity Code command allows displaying the seriousness level
coupled with the alarm signals 125 relevant to a specific type of NE.
Warning. This command is present into the menu only into the map windows, open with the
superuser profile.
At the command choice, the system displays the Siae Events Manager window shown in
Fig. 13.1.
By means of the commands present into the window, it is possible to change the seriousness
level coupled with the alarm signal (refer to paragraph 13.2.1.2).
Warning. The change of the seriousness level acoupled with an alarm is COMMON to all
the NEs of the same type present into all the OpenView maps.
The new seriousness level (called network level) will not be communicated to the NE because
the new setting affects only and exclusively the alarm indication of the NMS5UX supervisory
system.
The seriousness level (called local level) used to see the same alarm, by the NE and by the
local management system (LCT), is defined by means of the SNMP Equipment Severity Code
command (refer to the description at the beginning of the chapter and to paragraph 13.3).
125.
With the exception of the alarms of the user inputs.

The network seriousness level of the User Input Alarm is defined by means of a specific
command present into the Equipment window (refer to paragraph 1.3.3).
Such a level constitutes also the local seriousness level. This means that, if for instance it is
defined that the User Input x alarm for a NE has Critical seriousness level, at its detection, the
alarm will be stored into the NE controller, seen by the LCT program and by the NMS5UX system
with Critical seriousness level.
For more detailled information, refer to paragraph 7.1.5.2.
239
13.
Menu
bar (1)
NE types
managed
by the
NMS5UX
system
(2)
Alarms that
characterize
the selected
NE type (3)
(1) The description of the menus id reported at paragraph 13.2.1.

(2) Into the list, the system points out ONLY the NE types managed with the SNMP
protocol.
(3) For each alarm, into the column, it is pointed out:
S Event Name, alarm name.
S Severity, seriousness level correctly coupled with the alarm.
S Default, default seriousness level coupled with the alarm.
S New, seriousness level selected during the changing of the value
Fig. 13.1
240
13.
13.2.1 Siae Events Manager window Menu bar

Into the menu bar of the Siae Events Manager window, there are the menus and the commands
13.2.1.1 File Menu

"

"
Apply Changes. It confirms the changes executed for the seriousness level of the alarms.
To change the seriousness level of an alarm, execute the following procedure:
1.
Select into the Equipment area (refer to Fig. 13.1) the desired NE type.
2.
Into the area below, select the alarm for which the user wants to change the
seriousness level.
3.
Click twice quickly on the record.

The system displays the Modify Event window. Into the:
4.
Category box, it is pointed out the NE type. The value of the field can not be
changed.
Trap ID box, it is pointed out the identification code of the trap coupled with the
alarm. The value of the field can not be changed.
Event Name box, it is pointed out the denomination of the alarm signal. The value
of the field can not be changed.
Severity box, it is pointed out the seriousness level of the alarm signal.
Open the Severity check box and select from the list the new seriousness level.
If the user chooses the Default pushbutton, the system resets the current setting.
5.

The new seriousness level is pointed out into the New column (refer to Fig. 13.1).
6.
Select, from the menu bar, the Action Apply Changes command.
The new value is removed from the New column and pointed out into the Severity
column.
13.2.1.3 Help Menu

241
13.
13.3
SNMP EQUIPMENT SEVERITY CODE
System access
User profile

The SNMP Equipment Severity Code command displays the list of the alarm signals that
characterize the selected NE type.
For each signal, it is pointed out the alarm status (enabled/disabled) and the forwarding status
of the relevant trap 126 from the NE to the NMS5UX system.
Warning. The command is available only if it has been selected a single Network Element
managed with SNMP protocol in connected status, except for the Elfo and SDH N+1
equipment..
At the command choice, the system displays the Equipment Severity Code window that is
composed by a table that lists the alarm signals, by a menu bar and by a lower status bar. These
elements are described into the following paragraphs.
operations:
D
To enable/disable the alarms or the trap forwarding executed by the selected NE

towards the supervisory system (refer to paragraph 13.3.2.2) 127.
With details, it is possible:
126.
to disable the alarm; in this case the detection (or the reset) of the alarm signal
is neither recorded into the NE controller nor communicated to the supervisory
program: as if the alarm has never occurred.
to disable the trap forwarding; in this case the detection (or the reset) of the alarm
signal is recorded into the NE controller but it is not communicated to the
supervisory system 128.
to enable the alarm and the trap forwarding; in this case the detection (or the reset)
of the alarm signal is recorded into the NE controller and communicated to the
supervisory program (by means of the forwarding of the relevant trap) that
displays it into the current alarms and into the alarm history (default condition).
The wording trap means a message (in this case a detection or a reset message of the alarm
signal) spontaneously forwarded by the NE to the supervisory system.
The wording alarm means the detection (or the reset) signal of an alarm that is stored into the
NE controller.
127.
It is possible to check the NEs that have at least a disabled alarm/trap opening the Equipment
Browser [List/Locate] windoe (refer to paragraph 12.1.1).
128.
Warning. If the user has forwarded an Configuration Upload command to the NE under
examination, the system will get also the alarm signals that have the relevant trap forwarding
disabled.
242
13.
To change the seriousness level coupled with the alarm signal 129 (refer to paragraph
13.3.2.2).
Warning. The change of the seriousness level coupled with an larm is LOCAL
and concerns only thr selected NE.
The local seriousness level is the level that characterizes the alarm because it is
stored into the NE controller and displayed by the local management system (LCT).
The seriousness level of the same alarm seen by the NMS5UX system, is defined
by means of the SNMP Network Severity Code command (refer to the description
at the beginning of the chapter and to paragraph 13.2).
To filter the list of the alarm signals (refer to paragraph 13.3.2.3).
13.3.1 Equipment Severity Code window List of the alarms

Into the table, one record is devoted to each alarm. Such a record provides the following
information:
"
Alarm Description. Denomination of the alarm signal.
"
Object. Name of the object (that represents one or more physical or logic parts of the NE)
coupled with the alarm signal.
"
Status. Status of the alarm and of the trap forwarding executed by the NE towards the
system. The wording:
Enabled means that the alarm and the trap forwarding are enabled.
Trap Disabled means that the trap forwarding is disabled.
Alarm Disabled means that the alarm is disabled.
Warning. The information present into the window corresponds to the status of the signals at
the time of the command selection or at the time of the operation.
The Sort By option pushbuttons allow ordering the list according to:
D
the denomination of the alarm signal (Description pushbutton).
the object to which it is coupled the signal (Object pushbutton).
the status of the alarms and of the traps (Status pushbutton).
When the system executes the operation, it considers all the records stored into the database
and not only the displayed ones.
129.
With the exception of the alarms of the user inputs

The local seriousness level of the User Input Alarm is defined by means of a specific command
present into the Equipment window. Such a level constitutes also the network seriousness level.
This means that, if for instance it is defined that the User Input x alarm for a NE has Critical
seriousness level, at its detection, the alarm will be stored into the NE controller, seen by the LCT
program and by the NMS5UX system with Critical seriousness level.
For more detailled information, refer to paragraph 7.1.5.2.
243
13.
13.3.2 Equipment Severity Code window Menu bar

Into the menu bar of the Equipment Severity Code window there are the following commands.
13.3.2.1 File Menu

"

"
View/Modify Severity. It displays and allows changing the alarm enabling status/trap
forwarding and/or the seriousness level coupled with the selected alarm signal.
The command choice (available only after having selected a signal from the list) opens the
View/Modify Severity Code window that into the :
D
Alarm Description box, points out the signal denomination.
Status area, points out the alarm enabling status and the trap forwarding one relevant
to the signal.
If it has been activated the:
Enabled pushbutton, it means that the alarm and the trap forwarding is enabled.
Trap Disabled pushbutton, it means that the trap forwarding is disabled.
Alarm Disabled pushbutton, it means that the alarm is disabled.
Severity area, points out the seriousness level coupled with the signal.
The NMS5UX default wording, on the side of the seriousness level, points out the
default setting that the supervisory system has coupled with such a signal.
To change the alarm enabling status/trap forwarding and/or the seriousness level, execute
1.
Select the option pushbutton relevant to the desired value respectively into the Status
and/or Severity area.
Warning. If it has been selected the Alarm Disabled option pushbutton (Status area),
it is not possible to change the seriousness level coupled with the alarm.
2.
Choose the Modify pushbutton.

The possible change of the alarm enabling status/trap forwarding is pointed out into
the Equipment Severity Code window.
"
244
13.
will point out the refreshing time.
13.3.2.3 View Menu

"
Filter. It opens the View Filter window that allows filtering the list.
To filter the data of a list, click on one or more boxes present into the window, according
to the criteria to be used. The activation of each box (the box is activated when inside it there
is the symbol n
) expands the window displaying a section that contains the following
options:
D
Match Object box. In this section, it is possible to set, as filter, the object to which
belongs the alarm signal.
To set the filter, select the desired object from the list.
Match Status box. In this section, it is possible to set, as filter, the forwarding status
of the traps/alarms. If the user activates the:
Enabled check box, the system will display the signals that have the relevant alarm
and trap forwarding enabled.
Trap Disabled check box, the system will display the signals that have the relevant
alarm and trap forwarding disabled.
Alarm Disabled check box, the system will display the signals that have the
relevant alarm disabled.
It is possible to activate more check boxes at the same time.

After having set the criteria, choose the OK pushbutton (it executes the filtering and/or
ordering operations and closes the window) or the Apply one (it executes the command
and does not close the window).
The system will display, into the Equipment Severity Code only the records that comply with
all the activated options.
Each time that the system filters the list, it considers all the records, as the displayed ones
as the hidden ones.
Into the window there are also the Clear pushbutton (it deletes the activation of all the
filters and displays the complete list of the records), the Cancel pushbutton (it closes the
window and does not execute the command) and the Help one (it opens the online manual).
Warning. When the operator closes the Equipment Severity Code, the system
automatically removes the possible activation of the filters.
245
13.
13.3.3 Equipment Severity Code window Status bar

246
not been activated any record, the number of the displayed records corresponds to the
the logic address of the selected NE (Customer Id:..).
13.
13.4
NMS5UX SYSTEM USERS
Warning. According to his own user profile, the user has to respect the specific
description.
13.4.1 Command use executed by the user with Superuser profile

System access
User profile

Superuser
The NMS5UX System Users command allows displaying the list of the NMS5UX users present
into all the existing OpenView maps.
At the command choice, the system displays the User Management window that is composed
by a table that lists the users and by a menu bar. These elements are described into the following
paragraphs.
operations
D
To create a new map (refer to paragraph 13.4.1.2).
To add a NMS5UX user (refer to paragraph 13.4.1.2).
To change the characteristics of the NMS5UX users (refer to paragraph 13.4.1.2).
To delete a NMS5UX user (refer to paragraph 13.4.1.2).
13.4.1.1 User Management window List of the users

Into the table, one record is devoted to each user. Such a record provides the following
information:
"
Name. Username of the NMS5UX user.
"
Level. Profile of the NMS5UX user: Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser.
The description of the profiles is reported at paragraph 3.3.4.
"
Map name. Name of the OpenView map that contains the NMS5UX user.
"
User. UNIX user coupled with the NMS5UX one.
"
Expiration time. Expiration date/time of the password coupled with the NMS5UX user.
247
13.
The wording Not expired points out that the user has not been coupled with any expiration
date.
"
Server. Machine from which the user can access to NMS5UX.

Warning. This parameter is meaningful only in presence of a client/server architecture.
13.4.1.2 User Management window Menu bar

Into the menu bar of the User Management window there are the commands described here
below.
Edit Menu
"
"
Create Map. It creates a new map.

To execute the operation, it is necessary to executed the following procedure:
1.
Into the User Management window, select the Edit Create Map command.
The system displays the Create new map window.
2.
To type, into the Map Name text box, the new map name (alphanumeric string with
minimum 6 and maximum 20 characters).
3.
Users Menu
"
Create. It creates a new NMS5UX user.

To execute the operation, it is necessary to executed the following procedure:
1.
Into the User Management window, select the Users Create command.
The system displays the Insert new users window.
2.
Select, into the Users list, the UNIX user to be coupled with the new NMS5UX one.
To each UNIX user, it can be coupled only a single NMS5UX user.
Into the list, the system points out only the UNIX users that have not coupled yet with
a NMS5UX user.
3.
Into the Login box (area Nms5ux Users), set the name of the new user.
Automatically, it is pointed out the name of the UNIX user selected at the preceding
step; it is possible to change it typing, into the text box, an alphanumeric string with
minimum 1 and maximum 20 characters.
248
13.
4.
From the Level list, select the option pushbutton relevant to the profile to be coupled
with the new user.
Warning. The Superuser pushbutton is not available because it is not possible to
create a second user with such a profile.
5.
6.
Activate the box:
Internet, if you wish that the new user is acknowledged also by the Siae RAN
(Remote Access Nms5ux) application 130.
Ring Man., if you wish that the new user is acknowledged also by the Siae Ring
Manager application 130.
Define an expiration date of the password, into the Expiration data boxes.
Automatically, the system points out a default date 131; it is possible to change it typing,
into the text boxes, the day (Day box), the month (Month box) and the year (Year box)
or it is possible to avoid the coupling of a date for the expiration date of the password
activating the Life time check box.
7.
Into the Write text box (Password area), type the access code to be assigned to the
new user (alphanumeric string with minimum 6 and maximum 21 characters).
8.
Type again the access code into the Rewrite text box.
For privacy reasons, the system displays, into both boxes, an asterisk (*) for each
typed character.
9.
Select from the Map list, the map to be coupled with the user.
Into the list, the system displays all the available OpenView maps.
The system points out the name of the selected map into the Map associate box.
Warning. If the user to be created has the Advanced or Privileged profile, it is possible
to create a new map 132.
To execute the operation, it is sufficient to type, into the Map associate text box, the
map name (alphanumeric string with minimum 6 and maximum 20 characters).
10. Press the Ok pushbutton.

The user is added to the list: he is enabled for the using of the NMS5UX system by
means of the opening of the only map to which he has been coupled.
It does not exist a limit for the number of NMS5UX users that can be created.
"
Modify. It changes the characteristics of a NMS5UX user.

To execute this operation, it is necessary to execute the following procedure:
130.
For more information, refer to the specific Siae documentation.
131.
The default setting can be changed by the user with superuser profile. For more detailled
information, refer to the documentation Siae NMS5UX Administrator manual.
132.
Also if it is possible to create a new map using the HP OpenView Window NNM commands, for
the creation of the maps of the NMS5UX system, IT IS NECESSARY to use the Create Map
command (see Edit menu) or the function provided during the user creation.
To change or to delete a OpenView map, use the HP OpenView Window NNM commands (refer
to the relevant documentation).
249
13.
1.
Into the User Management window, select the record relevant to the user to be
changed.
2.
Choose the Users Modify command.

The system displays the Modify users window that points out the characteristics of the
user.
Execute the desired changes. It is possible to change every configuration parameters.
the setting modes of the parameters are the same ones described into the creation
procedure of a user (refer to previous command).
Warning. If it has been selected the user with superuser profile, it is not possible to
change his profile (the Level option pushbuttons are not available).
3.
"
Delete. It deletes a NMS5UX user.

1.
Into the User Management, select the record relevant to the user to be deleted.
Warning. Do not select the user with superuser profile, because it is not
possible to delete it.
2.
Choose the Users Delete command.

The system displays the Deleted users window that points out the characteristics of
the user.
3.

The user is deleted from the list: it is not longer enabled to use the NMS5UX system.
13.4.2 Command use executed by the user with Entry, Normal, Advanced
or Privileged profiles
System access
User profile

Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged
The NMS5UX System Users command displays the characteristics of the user that has opened
the map and allows changing the password coupled with such a user (refer to paragraph
13.4.2.1).
At the command choice, the system displays the User Management window that is composed
by a table that lists the users (the description of the characteristics is the same one reported at
paragraph 13.4.1.1) and by a menu bar (described here below).
250
13.
13.4.2.1 User Management window Menu bar

Into the menu bar of the User Management window there are the commands described here
below.
Edit Menu
"
"
Create map. This command is not available.
Users Menu
"
Create. This command is not available.
"
Modify. It changes the password coupled with the relevant users.

1.
Into the User Management window, select the record relevant to the coupled users.
2.
Choose the Users Modify command.

The system displays the Modify users window.
3.
Into the Write text box (Password area), type the access code to be assigned to the
new user (alphanumeric string with minimum 6 maximum 21 characters).
4.
Type again the access code into the Rewrite text box.
For privacy reasons, the system displays, into both boxes, an asterisk (*) for each
typed character.
5.
"
Delete. This command is not available.
251
13.
13.5
NMS5UX LOGGED USERS
System access
User profile

The NMS5UX Logged Users option displays the following lists:

D
list of the NMS5UX users connected to the supervisory system 133.
list of the application programs (browser, manager, etc.

that are already active at the option choice.
134)
of the NMS5UX system
The lists (users and application programs) are not displayed at the same time into the Nms5ux:
Logged Users window (that is displayed at the option choice). The system displays such lists
as an alternative one each other according to the selected option pushbutton.
In fact, into the Nms5ux: Logged Users window, under the menu bar, there are the following
pushbuttons:
D
View Logged Users pushbutton. At the choice of this pushbutton, the system shows,
into the Nms5ux: Logged Users window, the list of the users. The description of the
information available for each user are pointed out at paragraph 13.5.1.
View Running Application pushbutton. At the choice of this pushbutton, the system
shows, into the Nms5ux: Logged Users window, the list of the application programs.
The description of the information available for each user are pointed out at paragraph,
13.5.2.
Through the options present into the window, when it has been activated the following:
D
View Logged Users pushbutton, the user can execute the following operations:
To ask for the disconnection (logout) of an user (refer to paragraph 13.5.3.2).
To force the disconnection (logout) of an user in Running status (refer to paragraph

13.5.3.2).
Warning. This operation can be executed by the superuser user only.
To forward a message to a user or to all the users present into the list (refer to
paragraph 13.5.3.2) in Running status.
To filter the list of the users (refer to paragraph 13.5.3.3).
View Running Application pushbutton, the user can execute the following operations:
133.
The users connected with the supervisory system are the ones that have an open map. In the case
of client/server systems, the system points out the users/application programs as of the local
machine as of the remote ones.
134.
The details concerning the application programs pointed out into the Nms5ux: Logged Users
window can be check activating the Application Name box into the Running Process
Filter window (View Set Filter) (refer to paragraph 13.5.3.3).
252
13.
To ask for the closing of an application program (refer to paragraph 13.5.3.2).
To force the closing of an application program (refer to paragraph 13.5.3.2).

Warning. The subject operation can be executed only by the superuser user and
only if the user who has opened the selected application program is in Running
status (refer to paragraph 13.5.1).
To filter the list of the application programs (refer to paragraph 13.5.3.3).
13.5.1 Nms5ux: Logged Users window active View Logged Users

pushbutton User list
Into the table, each user is coupled with a record that points out the following information:
"
Time. Date and time relevant to the user connection with the system (opening of the
SiaeWorld window).
"
User Name. User name.
"
Map. Name of the map used by the user.
"
Permission. Access type to the map: Read Only, Read/Write (refer to paragraph 3.4).
"
Terminal. Address of the terminal on which it is on progress the NMS5UX graphical

interface used by the user.
"
Server. IP address of the local or remote machine (workstation/server) on which it has been
installed the NMS5UX system.
"
Status. Users status. With details:
Running, it points out that the user has been recorded as by the HP OpenView
system as by the NMS5UX one (normal functioning status of the user).
Out of NMS5UX, it points out that the user has been recorded by the HP OpenView
system but it has not been recorded by the NMS5UX one: HP OpenView open but
it has not been executed yet the login for the access to NMS5UX (transient status
of the user).
Not register, it points out that the user has been recorded as by the HP OpenView
system as by the NMS5UX one, but it has not been recorded yet to the domain
of NMS5UX: in such a case the system does not display the alarms of the
equipment (anomalous functioning status of the user).
Warning. For the users in Running status, the system dynamically refreshes the information
present into the table. For the users in Out of NMS5UX and Not Register statuses, it is necessary
to require for the refreshing operation selecting the Refresh Info pushbutton.
253
13.
13.5.2 Nms5ux: Logged Users window active View Running

Application pushbutton Application program list
Into the table, each application program is coupled with a record that points out the following
information:
"
Application Name. Name of the application program on progress..
"
Logical Addr.. Logic address and physical address relevant to the equipment or which the
system has opened the relevant Equipment window (information applicable only for the
Manager application program).
"
User Name. Name of the NMS5UX user who is using the application program.
"
Map Name. Name of the map that the user is currently using.
"
Terminal. Address of the terminal on which it is on progress the NMS5UX graphical

interface used by the user.
"
Server. IP address of the local or remote machine (workstation/server) on which it has been
installed the NMS5UX system used by the user.
Warning. The information present into the table correspond to the application programs on
progress at the option choice time or at the refresh execution time.
13.5.3 Nms5ux: Logged Users window Menu bar

Into the menu bar of the Nms5ux: Logged Users window there are the commands described
here below.
13.5.3.1 File Menu

"

"
254
Request Logout. It requires for the disconnection of an user 133.
13.
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected an user.

With details, to require for the disconnection of an user, it is necessary to execute the
following procedure:
1.
Select the View Logged Users option pushbutton.

Into the Nms5ux: Logged Users window, the system displays the connected users.
2.
Select the user for whom it has to be requested the disconnection.
3.
Choose the Action Request Logout option.

Into the map open by the selected user (B user), the system displays a confirmation
window that points out that the xxx user (A user ) has required for his disconnection.
4.
Into the confirmation window, the system displays the OK and Cancel pushbuttons.
If the B user, within 30 seconds from the window displaying, presses:
the OK pushbutton, he allows the execution of the request. On the videoscreen

of the A user, the system displays a message that informs that the B user has been
disconnected.
the Cancel pushbutton, he does not allow the execution of the request. On the
videoscreen of the A user, the system displays a message that informs that the
B user has not allowed the execution of his disconnection from the system.
If the B user, within 30 seconds from the window displaying, does not press any one
of the two pushbuttons, the system, according to the operating level of the user who
has forwarded the request (A user), executed the following procedure:
operating level of the A user, equal to or higher than the one of the B user.
The user is automatically disconnected.
operating level of the A user, lower than the one of the B user.
The user is not disconnected.
In both cases, on the videoscreen of the A user, the system displays a message that
points out the results of the operation.
"
Force Logout. It forwards the disconnection command (logout) of an user in Running

status 133.
Warning. This option is available for the superuser user only if it has been selected
a user. While the subject command is not available if the selected user is in Out of
NMS5UX or Not Register statuses.
With details, to disconnect an user, it is necessary to execute the following procedure:
1.

2.
Select the user to be disconnected.
3.
Choose the Action Forced Logout option.

The system deletes the row relevant to the selected user from the list.
"
Send Message. It forwards a message to an user (or to all users) present into the list in
Running status.
255
13.
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected an user.

With details, to forward a message, it is necessary to execute the following procedure:
1.

2.
Select the user to whom it has to be forwarded the message.
3.
Choose the Action Send Message option.

The system displays the Send Broadcast Message window.
4.
Choose one of the following pushbuttons:
Selected Users pushbutton, to forward the message to the selected user only.
Broadcast pushbutton, to forward the message to all the users present into the
list.
5.
Write the message into the available text area (alphanumeric string composed by a
max. of 150 characters).
6.
Press the Send Message pushbutton.

The system displays a confirmation message.
On the videoscreen of the user or of the users that have received the message, the
system displays a window with the following text Message from user name: text of
the message.
"
Request Exit. It requires for the closing of an application program (browser, manager, etc.
134 ).
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected an application program.
With details, to require for the closing of an application program, it is necessary to execute
1.
Select the View Running Application option pushbutton.

Into the Nms5ux: Logged Users window, the system displays the currently opened
application programs.
2.
Select the application program to be closed.
3.
Choose the Action Request Exit option.

Into the map where it is open the application program (B user), the system displays a
confirmation window that points out that the xxx user (A user) has required for the
closing of the yyy application program.
4.
Into the confirmation window, the system displays the OK and Cancel pushbuttons.
If the B user, within 30 seconds from the window displaying, presses:
256
the OK pushbutton, he allows the closing of the application program. On the

videoscreen of the A user, the system displays a message that informs that the
application program of the B user has been closed.
the Cancel pushbutton, he does not allow the closing of the application program.
On the videoscreen of the A user, the system displays a message that informs
that the B user has not allowed the closing of the application program.
13.
If the B user, within 30 seconds from the window displaying, does not press any one
of the two pushbuttons, the system, according to the operating level of the user who
has forwarded the request (A user), executed the following procedure:
operating level of the A user, equal to or higher than the one of the B user.
The application program is automatically closed.
operating level of the A user, lower than the one of the B user.
The application program is not automatically closed.
In both cases, on the videoscreen of the A user, the system displays a message that
points out the results of the operation.
"
Forced Exit. It forces the closing of an application program (browser, manager, etc. 134).
Warning. This option is available for the superuser user only if it has been selected
an application program open by a user in Running status.
With details, to require for the closing of an application program, it is necessary to execute
1.
Select the View Running Application option pushbutton.

Into the Nms5ux: Logged Users window, the system displays the currently opened
application programs.
2.
Select the application program to be closed.
3.
Choose the Action Forced Exit option.

The system deletes the row relevant to the selected application program from the list.
"
13.5.3.3 View Menu

"
Set Filter. It opens the Running Process Filter that allows filtering the list.
To filter a list, activate one or more boxes 135 present into the Running Process Filter
window, according to the criteria to be used. The activation of each box expands the window
displaying an additional area. The available criteria are the following ones:
D
Application Name box. Into this area, it is possible to set, as filter, a group of
application programs or a specific one executing the following procedure:
a.
Select the desired group into the Application Group list.

Into the Application Name list, the system points out the application programs
coupled with the group.
135.
One box is active if it is present the symbol n inside it.
257
13.
b.
Select the desired application program.

If the user does not select any application program into the Nms5ux: logged Users
window, the system will display the records relevant to all the application programs
of the group.
The groups that group the application programs are the ones pointed out here below:
Application, browser (for instance Alarm history, Current Alarm, etc.) and
several application programs (for instance Software Downlaod etc.).
Manager, equipment Manager application programs (Equipment window).
Warning. The Application Name box is available only if into the Nms5ux: logged
Users window, it has been activated the View Running Application
pushbutton.
D
User Name box. Into this area, it is possible to set the NMS5UX user as filter.
Select the name of the desired user from the list of the existing users.
Map Name box. Into this area, it is possible to set, as filter, the map coupled with the
NMS5UX user.
Select the name of the map from the list of the existing maps.
After having set the criteria, choose the OK pushbutton (it executes the filtering and closes
the Running Process Filter) or the Apply one (it executes the command and does not close
the window).
The system will display, into the Nms5ux: logged Users only the records that comply with
all the activated options. Each time that the system filters the list, it considers all the records,
as the displayed ones as the hidden ones.
To delete the activation of all the filters and to display the complete list of the operations,
choose the Clear pushbutton.
Warning. When the operator closes the Nms5ux: logged Users, the system automatically
removes the possible activation of the filters.
13.5.3.4 Help Menu

258
13.
13.6
SNMP LCT EQUIPMENT USERS
System access
User profile

The SNMP LCT Equipment Users command allows displaying and changing the LCT user
list of the selected Network Element.
Each NE managed with the SNMP protocol is provided with a user list to which it is possible
to be connected by means of the LCT program 136. The user list is stored into the main
controller of the Network Element.
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected a single Network
Element managed with SNMP protocol in connected status, except for the Elfo and SDH
N+1 equipment..
At the command choice, the system displays the LCT User Manager window that is composed
by a table that lists the users and by a series of pushbuttons. These elements are described
into the following paragraphs.
By means of the pushbuttons present into the window, it is possible to execute the following
operations:
D
To add a new LCT user to the list (refer to paragraph 13.6.2).
To change the characteristics of the users present into the list (refer to para. 13.6.2).
To remove a LCT user from the list (refer to paragraph 13.6.2).
Warning. The LCT user list can be changed also by means of the command present into the
Equipment window. For more detailed information, refer to the specific equipment User Manual
13.6.1 LCT User Manager window List of the users

Into the table, one record is devoted to each user. Such a record provides the following
information:
"
User Name. Name of the LCT user.
136.
Local Craft Terminal. For more detailled information, refer to paragrap 6.5 or to the help on
line/manuals SCT/LMT and LCT <name of the NE>.
259
13.
"
"
Profile. Profile of the LCT user:
Read only, it can check the parameters but it can not forward commands or
execute changes into the LCT program.
Read and Write and Station Operator, it can as check the parameters as forward
commands or execute changes into the LCT program.
Timeout. Status of the Timeout option.

The Timeout option is a function that if during a particular time the program does not
execute operations 137, provides to interrupt automatically its connection. The wording:
No timeout points out that the option is disabled, this means that the user is not
automatically disconnected after a certain time.
<number> Sec. points out that the option is enabled, this means that the user, if
the program does not execute any operation, is automatically disconnected after
pointed out time.
Under the table, it is pointed out the type and the logic address of the selected Network Element.
13.6.2 LCT User Manager window Pushbuttons

Into the LCT User Manager window, there are the following pushbuttons:
"
Add User. It add a LCT user to the list.

To execute this operation, execute the following procedure:
1.
Press the Add User pushbutton

The system displays the User Management window.
2.
Into the User box, type the name of the user (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and
maximum 8 characters).
Warning. It is not possible to assign the same name to two different users present into
the same list. Then, when the system has assigned the name of the user, it can not
be changed later.
3.
Into the Password box, type the access code of the user (alphanumeric string with
minimum 1 and maximum 8 characters).
4.
Into the Confirm Password box, type again the access code of the user.
5.
Into the Timeout area, select one of the following option pushbuttons:
137.
The program manages a polling process to check the presence of the LCTequipment
connection.
If the equipment does not answer to the polling queries for the set time (timeout), the user is
disconnected and then, also the equipment is disconnected.
260
13.
Timeout, if when the user does not execute any operation, he has to be
disconnected after the time set into the Sec box.
To change the time, activate the Sec. box and type a value between 1 second and
43200 seconds (12h).
No timeout, if the user has not to be automatically disconnected after a certain

time.
6.
Into the Profile area, select the option pushbutton relevant to the profile to be assigned
to the user: Read only, Read and Write or Station Operator.
7.
8.
Repeat the steps 1...7. to create all the desired users.

Warning. It is possible to define a list with a maximum of 4 users for each profile (up
to a maximum of 12 users).
"
Modify User. It changes the characteristics of a LCT user.

1.
Into the LCT User Manager window, select the record relevant to the user.
2.
Press the Modify User pushbutton.

The system displays the Modify User window.
3.
Execute the desired changes.

The setting modes of the parameters are the same ones pointed out for the adding of
a new user (refer to the previous pushbutton).
Warning. It is not possible to change the name of the user.
4.
"
Choose the Modify pushbutton.
Remove User. It deletes a LCT user from the list.

1.
Into the LCT User Manager window, select the record relevant to the user.
2.
Press the Remove User pushbutton.
3.
At the displaying of the message Would you really remove..., press the Ok
pushbutton.
"
Refresh. It executes a new reading of the database and refreshes the information present
into the window.
"
261
13.
13.7
SNMP LCT LOGGED USERS
System access
User profile

The SNMP LCT Logged Users option displays the list of the users (LCT 138 and NMS5UX)
connected with the selected NE at the choice of the option.
Warning. The option is available only if it has been selected a single Network Element
equipment..
At the choice of the option, the system displays the Logged Users window composed by a table
that lists the users and by a bar with the menus described into the following paragraphs.
By means of the options present into the window, it is possible to execute the following
operations:
D
To force the disconnection (logout) of a user present into the list (refer to paragraph
13.7.2.2).
Warning. The subject operation is not available for the user with Normal and Entry
profile.
Warning. The disconnection of a user (LCT or NMS5UX) from a NE can be executed also
through the options present into the Equipment window. For more detailed information, refer to
the specific equipment user Manual (refer to paragraph 1.3.3).
13.7.1 Logged Users window Users list

Into the table, each user is coupled with a record that reports the following information:
"
User Name. Name of the user.

Warning. The NMS5UX wording identifies all the users of the NMS5UX system. In fact, for
such users, it is not pointed out the relevant denomination (Name parameter refer to
paragraph 13.4.1.1). The remaining wordings identify the LCT users.
"
Profile. Profile of the LCT user. The wording:
138.
The LCT user is a user connected with the equipment through the Local Craft Terminal local
management program. For more detailed information, refer to paragraph 6.5 or to the SCT/LMT
and LCT <NE identification text> manuals.
262
13.
Read only, points out that the user can check the parameters but he can not
forward commands or execute changes for the parameters.
Read and Write or Station Operator it points out that the user can as check the
parameters as forward commands or execute changes for the parameters.
System it points out that the user can as check the parameters as forward
commands or execute changes for the parameters. Then, this profile is equipped
with the administrator options (for instance creation/deleting/changing of LCT
users).
Warning. For the NMS5UX user, the system does not point out the relevant profile used into
the NMS5UX graphical interface (Level parameter refer to paragraph 13.4.1.1), but it
points out the profile through which the equipment controller and the LCT management
application program acknowledge the NMS5UX user: System profile.
"
Ip Address. IP address of the machine 139 where the LCT program or the NMS5UX
graphical interface, used by the user, are on progress.
Under the table, the system points out the logic address and the type of the selected Network
Element.
Warning. The information present into the table correspond to the characteristics of the users
connected to the equipment at the selection time of the command or at the execution time of
the refresh procedure.
13.7.2 Logged Users window Menu bar

Into the menu bar of the Logged Users window there are the commands described here below.
13.7.2.1 File Menu

"

"
"
Force Logout. It forwards the disconnection command (logout) from the equipment for the
selected user.
139.
Personal Computer for the LCT users or workstation/server for the NMS5UX users.
263
13.
Warning. This command is not available for the user with Normal and Entry profile.
With details, to disconnect a user, it is necessary to execute the following procedure:
1.
Select the user to be disconnected into the Logged Users window.
2.
Choose the Action Force Logout option.

3.
Choose the Ok pushbutton.

The system points out the end of the operation through a message that reports the
result of the operation itself.
Warning. If it has been forced the logout of a NMS5UX user, the supervisory system
automatically executes the restore of the user connection.
264
13.
13.8
SNMP NE REMOTE ELEMENT TABLE
System access
User profile

Reading Entry
Reading/Writing Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
The NE Remote Element Table command displays the remote equipment list stored in the
controller of the selected equipment.
Each equipment is provided with a remote equipment list 140 stored in its controller.
Warning. The option is available only if it has been selected a single Network Element
equipment.
The selection of the command opens the window shown in Fig. 13.2.
By means of the commands present in the window:
D
add, rename and delete a station from the remote equipment list
add, modify, delete and move an equipment within the remote equipment list
add more equipment at the same type to the remote equipment list
save the remote equipment list to a file and then restore the remote equipment list
from a file
140.
When the user requires the connection to an equipment, the SCT/LMT program reads, its remote
equipment list and automatically sends the connection command to all the equipment present in
the list.
265
13.
Menu
bar (1)
Station
(2)
Equipment
belonging
to the
station (3)
(1) The menu:

S File Load from file. Restores the remote equipment list from file.
S File Save to file. Saves the remote equipment list to file.
S File Close. Closes the window.
S Edit Add Station. Adds a station.
S Edit Add Single Element. Adds an equipment.
S Edit Add Multiple Element. Adds more equipment at the same time.
S Edit Remove Station. Deletes the station.
S Edit Remove Element. Deletes an equipment.
S Edit Modify Station. Modifies the name of the station.
S Edit Modify Element. Modifies the characteristics of an equipment.
S Edit Exchange Before. Moves an equipment over the previous one.
S Edit Exchange After. Moves an equipment under the next one.
S Edit Move to station. Moves an equipment from a station to another one.
(2) For each station, the Station/... column reports the name of the station.
(3) For each equipment, it is reported in the column:
S .../Equipment. Name of the equipment.
S IP Address. IP address (SNMP agent) of the equipment.
S Element Type. Type of equipment. The wording:
Managed by SCT, indicates a Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT program.

Remote link, indicates a Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT program that
constitutes the remote equipment located at the other side of the radio link with respect
to the local equipment.
Element Manager, indicates the Element Manager of the equipment (for example the
Siae supervision system).
Not Managed, indicates an element not managed by SCT/LMT. The option can be
used to insert information in the remote equipment list.
S Gosip Address. Gosip (Government OSI Profile) address.

Parameter meaningful only for equipment inserted into an OSI network.
Fig. 13.2
266
13.
13.8.1 Adding a station to the remote equipment list

1.
Select, in the map window, the wished equipment in connected status.
2.
Select the Options SIAE Options SNMPNE Remote Element Table command.
The Remote Element Table window opens.
3.
Select the Edit Add Station command.

The Add New Station window opens.
4.
Type, in the text box, the name you wish to assign to the station (alphanumeric string
of minimum 1 and maximum 11 characters).
Warning. It is not possible to assign the same name to two different stations.
5.
Press Ok.
The new station is added at the bottom of the list of already existing station.
6.
Select the Apply pushbutton and then confirm.

The list is stored in the controller of the equipment
Warning. It is possible to insert a maximum of 30 stations in the list.
13.8.2 Renaming a station of the remote equipment list

1.
2.
3.
Select the station you wish to rename.
4.
Select the Edit Modify Station command.

The Rename Station window opens.
5.
Type, in the text box, the new name (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum
11 characters).
Warning. It is not possible to assign the same name to two different stations.
6.
Press Ok.
The name of the station is modified.
7.

267
13.
13.8.3 Deleting a station from the remote equipment list

1.
2.
3.
Select the station you wish to delete.

Warning. The deletion of the station causes also the deletion of all the equipment
associated to it.
4.
Select the Edit Remove Station command.

A confirmation window is displayed.
5.
Press OK.
The station is deleted.
6.

13.8.4 Adding an equipment to the remote equipment list

1.
2.
3.
Select the station which you wish to associate the equipment to.
Warning. An equipment can be associated only to a single station.
4.
Select the Edit Add Single Element command.

The Add Single Element window opens.
The Apply to station: field points out the station which the new equipment will be
associated to.
5.
Type, in the IP address box, the IP address of the equipment.

Warning. It is not possible to create in the same list (even if in different stations) two
equipment with the same IP Address.
6.
In the Element Type area, select the pushbutton relevant to the type of element you
wish to insert. The option:
268
Managed by SCT, points out the Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT
program.
13.
7.
Remote link, points out the Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT
program that constitutes the equipment located at the other side of the radio
link with respect to the local equipment.
Element Manager, points out the Element Manager of the equipment (for
example Siae supervision system).
Not Managed, points out an element not managed by SCT/LMT. The option
can be used to insert information into the remote equipment list.
Only if the equipment is inserted into an OSI network, set the Gosip address executing
a.
Activate the Gosip Address box.
b.
To change the part of System ID of the Gosip Address, press the Settings
pushbutton.
The program display the Settings window.
c.
Type into the boxes the value of the 6 bytes that compose System ID
d.
Press OK
e.
To change the default part of the Gosip Address, press the Setup Default
pushbutton.
The program display the Gosip Default Option window.
f.
To change the AFI, IDI, Ver, Auth, Reserved parameters, type, into the relevant
boxes, the value of the corresponding byte/s.
g.
To change the Domain parameter, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box
and select the desired value from the list.

The program displays the Domain Settings window.
domain.
Press OK.
To remove a value from the list:
h.
Select the value to be removed.
Press the Remove pushbutton.
To change the Area parameter, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and
To add or to remove a value from the list, execute the same procedures already
pointed out for the Domain parameter.
i.
8.
Press OK.
Press OK.
Under the selected station, a record named Equipment < progressive number> is
displayed, with the characteristics of the new equipment.
269
13.
9.

Warning. A maximum of 100 equipment can be inserted in the list.
13.8.5 Adding more equipment at the same time to the remote

equipment list
1.
2.
3.
Select the station which you wish to associate the equipment to.
Warning. An equipment can be associated only to a single station.
4.
Select the Edit Add Multiple Element command.

The Add Multiple Element window opens.
The Apply to station: field displays the station which the new equipment will be
associated to.
Under the field, all the equipment managed by NMS5UX are listed. For each
equipment, the IP address and the logic address are listed in the order.
The list can be filtered:
a.
Selecting the Filter... pushbutton

The Load Equipment window opens.
b.
Select one or more boxes, according to the criteria you wish to use.
The activation of each box expands the window displaying a section containing
the following options:
Match Logical Address box. Logic address of the NE.

To set the criteria, type the address of the NE in the text field.
Match IP Address box. IP address of the NE.

To set the criteria, type the IP Address of the NE in the text box.
Match connection status box. Status of the connection between the NE and
NMS5UX.
To set the criterion, select the pushbutton relevant to the wished status.
Match equipment type box. Equipment type.

To set the criterion, select the pushbutton relevant to the type of wished
equipment..
c.
270
Press the OK (executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (executes
the command and does not close the window) pushbutton.
13.
The table displays only the records that satisfy the activated criteria.
In the window there are also the Clear (it clears the activation of the filters and
displays the complete list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not
executes the operation) pushbuttons.
5.
Select the equipment you wish to add to the remote equipment list.
6.
In the Element Type area, select the pushbutton relevant to the type of elements you
wish to insert. The option:
7.
program.
Remote link, points out the Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT program
that constitutes the equipment located at the other side of the radio link with
respect to the local equipment.
Element Manager, points out the Element Manager of the equipment (for example
Not Managed, points out an element not managed by SCT/LMT. The option can
be used to insert information into the remote equipment list.
Press the OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes
the command and does not close the window) pushbutton.
Under the selected station, a record named Equipment <progressive number> is
displayed, for each new equipment.
8.

Warning. A maximum of 100 equipment can be inserted in the list.
13.8.6 Modifying the characteristics of an equipment of the remote

equipment list
1.
2.
3.
Select the equipment you wish to modify.
4.
Select the Edit Modify Element command.

The window opens Modify Element.
The Apply to station: field displays the station where the equipment is present.
5.
To modify the IP address, type the new value in the IP address box.
Warning. It is not possible to assign to the equipment an IP Address already present
in the list.
271
13.
6.
7.
To modify the type of element, select the wished pushbutton in the Element Type area.
The option:
program.
Remote link, points out the Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT program
that constitutes the equipment located at the other side of the radio link with
respect to the local equipment.
Element Manager, points out the Element Manager of the equipment (for example
Not Managed, points out an element not managed by SCT/LMT. The option can
be used to insert information into the remote equipment list.
To modify the Gosip address:

a.
Activate the Gosip Address box.
b.
To change the part of System ID of the Gosip Address, press the Settings
pushbutton.
The program display the Settings window.
c.
Type into the boxes the value of the 6 bytes that compose System ID
d.
Press OK
e.
To change the default part of the Gosip Address, press the Setup Default
pushbutton.
The program display the Gosip Default Option window.
f.
To change the AFI, IDI, Ver, Auth, Reserved parameters, type, into the relevant
boxes, the value of the corresponding byte/s.
g.
To change the Domain parameter, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box
and select the desired value from the list.

The program displays the Domain Settings window.
domain.
Press OK.
To remove a value from the list:
h.
Select the value to be removed.
Press the Remove pushbutton.
To change the Area parameter, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and
To add or to remove a value from the list, execute the same procedures already
pointed out for the Domain parameter.
i.
272
Press OK.
13.
8.
Press OK.
The characteristics of the equipment are modified according to the new setting.
9.

13.8.7 Deleting an equipment from the remote equipment list

1.
2.
3.
Select the equipment you wish to delete.
4.
Select the Edit Remove Element command.

A confirmation window is displayed.
5.
Press Ok.
The equipment is deleted.
6.

13.8.8 Moving an equipment within the remote equipment list

1.
2.
3.
Select the equipment you wish to move.
4.
To move an equipment from a station to the other:

a.
Select the Edit Move to station command.

The Move to station window opens.
b.
Select the station where you wish to move the equipment.
c.
Press Ok.
The equipment is moved to the selected station.
273
13.
5.
6.
To move an equipment among the list of equipment of a station, press the:
Edit Exchange Before command, to move the equipment over the previous
equipment.
Edit Exchange After command, to move the equipment under the next
equipment.

13.8.9 Saving to a file the remote equipment list

1.
2.
3.
Set or modify the remote equipment list.
4.
Select the File Save To File pushbutton.

The Save to file window opens.
5.
Type the name of the file in the proper box (with extension .rel) and set the path where
you wish to save the file.
6.
13.8.10 Restore from file the remote equipment list

1.
2.
3.
Select the File Load from File command.

The Load from file window opens.
4.
Select the file (with extension .rel) where the wished remote equipment list is stored.
5.

In the Remote Element Table window, the remote equipment list is displayed.
274
13.
13.9
SNMP NE SW/FW DOWNLOAD
System access
User profile

Warning. The SNMP NE Sw/Fw Download command is available only if it has been
selected one or more Network Elements managed with SNMP protocol of the same type,
The SNMP NE Sw/Fw Download command allows executing the updating operation of the
equipment software/firmware (sw/fw) relevant to the selected NE or to the selected NEs.
The equipment sw/fw is the assembly of all the sw/fw necessary for the management of the
entire NE (sw/fw of the main controller and sw/fw of the peripheral units).
The equipment sw/fw is present into the main controller that is provided with two memory
benches: one for service and the other one for waiting . Each bench can contain a version (also
a different one) of the equipment sw/fw (refer to paragraph 13.11). It is possible to update the
equipment sw/fw of a bench at a time.
Warning. The system automatically updates the sw/fw relevant to the memory bench not on
progress or not present (refer to Fig. 13.4).
The updating of the equipment sw/fw can be immediately executed (only if it has been selected
a single NE) or it can be programmed for a defined date/time (advised option).
In the first case, the operation is executed in real time. In the second case, it is scheduled and
it will be the system to execute the updating at the date/time programmed by the user (refer to
paragraph 13.10).
In both cases, the execution of the download, for each selected NE, depends on the following
conditions:
D
the NE has to be in connected status.
the LOM/LCT program has not to be connected to the NE, in Configuration mode.
there have not to be present other operations on progress.
If the updating of the equipment sw/fw is immediately executed and the NE is not in one of the
above listed conditions, the operation is not executed.
Also if the updating is scheduled and if at the time (date/time) when it has been programmed,
the NE is not into the above listed conditions, the operation is not executed, but in this case at
regular times, the system will check the NE condition, until when:
D
the NE is in the correct condition and then it is executed the download.
the NE is removed by the list of the NE scheduled for the download (refer to paragraph
13.10.2.1).
The procedure to update the equipment sw/fw is reported at the paragraph 13.9.1.
275
13.
13.9.1 Updating of the equipment sw/fw

1.
Into the map window, select the NE or the NEs of the same type for which it is
necessary to update the equipment sw/fw.
2.
Select the SNMP NE Sw/Fw Download command.

The system displays the Software Download window shown in Fig. 13.3.
3.
Into the Selection file DWL box, set the file to be used for the updating operation.
It is possible to type the path (home/ftp) and the file name or to choose the Select
pushbutton (the system opens the Select file for download window) and to select the
file among the available ones 141.
Warning. If the file to be used for the operation is not into the home/ftp folder, it is
necessary to copy it into such a folder because the supervisory system, to execute
correctly the download operation, needs for finding the updating file into the home/ftp
folder.
If the user chooses the Read pushbutton, it is possible to display a brief description
that shows the contents of the selected file.
4.
Set the download type to be executed.

Select the option pushbutton:
D
Forced, if the refresh procedure of the sw/fw relevant to the main controller of the
equipment is on progress.
Only different or not present, if the refresh procedure of the sw/fw relevant to
peripheral units (FPGA file and/or application code) is on progress.
5.
Activate the Bench switch? box, if the user wants that, at the end of the download, the
system automatically executes a switching of the memory bench in such a way that
it is used the bench with the updated sw/fw.
6.
Set the execution mode of the download. If the user wants that the updating operation
is:
D
immediately executed, he has to activate the Immediate Download box.

Warning. It is possible to activate the box only if it has been selected a single NE.
7.
Choose the Start Dwl pushbutton. If, at step 7, it has been:

D
141.
scheduled to be executed later, he has to set the date/time into the Scheduling
data time for Download area.
activated the Immediate Download box, the system displays a window that points
out the physical address, the logic one and the NE type for which it is on progress
The files are identified by the .dwl extension and by a name composed by 8 characters. With
details the:
S1 character identifies the technology (S=SDH, P=PDH, M=PMP).
S2 character identifies the equipment type (R=Radio, M=Multiplex)
S3 ... 6 characters identify the product number.
S7, 8 characters identify the most significant digits of the version.
276
13.
the sw/fw updating operation, and the status of the operation (Waiting,
Downloading, Complete, etc.). The execution of this operation needs for several
minutes.
Warning. Before startingup the updating operation, the NE controller executes
a compatibility check between the sw/fw to be forwarded and the one present into
the controller itself.
The check consists on the checking the technology and the NE type (pointed out
by the first 2 characters 141 of the file name) 142.
If the parameters results compatible one each other, the system starts the
download procedure. On the contrary, it will not been executed the sw/fw updating
operation.
If the operation is successfully executed, when the user opens the RelSw window
(refer to paragraph 13.11), into the Release box relevant to the updated memory
bench, the system points out the new sw/fw version.
If the operation is not successfully executed, the system keeps pointed out, into
the Status box relevant to the updated memory bench, the old version or displays
the wording not loaded.(refer to Fig. 13.4).
D
set an execution date/time for the updating operation of the sw/fw, the system
closes the Software Download window.
Into the list of the equipment scheduled for the download (refer to paragraph
13.10), the system adds a record for each NE present into the Equipment list for
download area (refer to Fig. 13.3.).
142.
Warning. For some types of NE, the system executes also checks on the third character of the file
name. More detailled information are reported into the equipment User Manual relevant to the
specific NE type (refer to paragraph 1.3.3).
277
13.
NEs selected into

the map window
for which the
system will
execute the
equipment sw/fw
updating
operation (1)
For each NE, it is

respectively pointed out:
logic address, physical
address, tyoe and status
of the NE (2), at the
command choice
Choose this
pushbutton to check
the NE list that have
been scheduled for
the updating operation
of the equipment sw/fw
(3)
(1) If the user selects a NE and clicks quickly twice, the system opens the RelSw window (refer to
paragraph 13.11) that points out the version of the equipment sw/fw present into the memory
benches of the NE.
(2) The NE status is the indication of the connection status, of the LCT presence, of the marking
status of the alarms, etc. With details, the wording:
S Con points out that the NE is in connected status.
S Dis points out that the NE is in disconnected status.
S Nev_Con points out that the NE is in disconnected status (it has never been
connected).
S Unrea points out that the NE is in unreachable status.
S Mant points out that the NE is in maintenance status (operation on progress).
S Lom_Mon points out that the LCT program is connected to the NE in Monitoring mode.
S Lom_Conf points out that the LCT program is connected to the NE in Configuring mode.
S SwDl points out that the download of the equipment sw/fw is on progress.
(3) The choice of the pushbutton opens the Scheduling download window described at paragraph
13.10.
Fig. 13.3
278
13.
13.10 SNMP SCHEDULED SW DWL STATUS

System access
User profile

The SNMP Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command allows displaying the list of the NEs,
managed with SNMP protocol, that have been scheduled for the updating operation of the
equipment software/firmware (sw/fw).
At the command choice, the system displays the Scheduling download window composed by
a table that lists the NEs, by a menu bar and by a lower status bar. These elements are described
operations:
D
To delete the NEs from the list (refer to paragraph 13.10.2.1).
To stop the updating operation of the equipment sw/fw (refer to paragraph 13.10.2.1).
13.10.1 Scheduling download window List of the NEs

Into the table, one record is devoted to each NE. Such a record provides the following
information:
"
Equipment. Logic address of the NE.
"
Type. NE type.
"
Time Scheduling. Date (day/month/year) and time (hour/minute/second) for which it has
been programmed the updating operation of the equipment sw/fw.
"
Time start Date (day/month/year) and time (hour/minute/second) when it has been started
the updating operation of the equipment sw/fw.
"
Duration Duration (expressed by hour/minute/second) of the download operation.
"
F. The presence of the x points out that during the download, the system updates the entire
equipment sw/fw (refer to paragraph 13.9.1).
"
O. The presence of the x points out that during the download, the system updates only
the parts (code and FPGA file) that have a version different from the one present into the
NE or that are missing ones (refer to paragraph 13.9.1).
279
13.
"
B. The presence of the x points out that during the download, the system automatically
executes a switching of the memory bench in such a way that the system uses the bench
with the updated sw/fw (refer to paragraph 13.9.1).
"
P. Not managed column.
"
Status. The status of the download operation. The wording:

D
Downloading points out that the updating operation of the equipment sw/fw is on
progress.
Waiting points out that the updating operation of the sw/fw has not been yet executed
143.
Complete points out that the updating operation of the sw/fw has been successfully
executed.
Incomplete points out that the updating operation of the sw/fw has been executed in
an incomplete way or that the operation is failed.
In this case, it is advisable to execute or to program again the updating operation of
the equipment sw/fw.
"
File. File name (with .dwl extension) used for the download.
The presence of the symbol points out that the information is not available because it is a
not significant one for the current status of the operation (refer to the Status column).
13.10.2 Scheduling download window Menu bar

Into the menu bar of the Scheduling download window there are the menus and the commands
13.10.2.1 File Menu

"
Deleted All. It deletes all the NEs present into the list with the exception of the ones for
which the updating operation of the sw/fw is on progress (wording Downloading into the
Status field refer to paragraph 13.10.1).
143.
Warning. It is possible that the system points out, into the Time Scheduling field, a programmation
date/time older than the current one.
This means that the NE, at the programmation time of the operation, was not in the correct
condition for the execution of the download. In this case, the system tries again to execute, at
regular times, the updating operation of the sw/fw.
More detailled information concerning the execution modes of the download are reported at the
paragraph 13.9.
280
13.
"
Deleted Select. It deletes all the selected NEs with the exception of the ones for which the
updating operation of the sw/fw is on progress (wording Downloading into the Status field
refer to paragraph 13.10.1).
"
Deleted Completed. It deletes the present NEs for which it has already been executed the
download procedure (wording Complete into the Status field refer to paragraph 13.10.1).
"
Abort. It stops the updating operation of the equipment sw/fw.

Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected a NE for which the updating
operation of the sw/fw is on progress (wording Downloading into the Status field refer to
paragraph 13.10.1).
"
Progress. During a downloading operation, the selection of this command opens the Win
Progress window that points out the operation progress status.
The selection of the command opens the Win Progress window that contains the following
elements:
D
Equipment, equipment name.
File Name, file name.
State, type of the operation on progress.

At the end of the operation, the system points out the wording FTP Connection Lost.
<list of the updated sw/fw components>. The colour of the component points out its
updating status. With details, if the colour of the wording is:
green, it points out that the component has already been updated.
red, it points out that the updating of the component is on progress.
white, it points out that the component has not been updated yet.
Warning. The user can open only one Win Progress window at a time.
"
13.10.2.2 Sort Menu

The choice of the Sort menu displays the list of the criteria for which it is possible to order the
list of the NEs.
The option pushbutton, placed on the side of the option, points out the criterion currently used.
To change it, it is sufficient to select the desired option.
The available criteria are the following ones: Name (logic address of the NE), Time Sched.,
Type, Status, File Dwl. The description of the criteria is reported at paragraph 13.10.1.
281
13.
13.11 SNMP NE SW/FW RELEASE

System access
User profile

The SNMP NE Sw/Fw Release command allows checking the version of the equipment
software/firmware relevant to the selected NE.
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected a Network Element
managed with the SNMP protocol in connected status, except for the Elfo and SDH N+1
equipment.
At the command choice, the system displays the RelSw window shown in Fig. 13.4.
operations:
D
to update the equipment software/firmware (sw/fw) (refer to paragraph 13.11.1.1).

The equipment sw/fw is the assembly of all the sw/fw necessary for the management
of the entire NE (sw/fw of the main controller and sw/fw of the peripheral units).
The equipment sw/fw is present into the main controller that is provided with two
memory benches: one for service and the other one for waiting . Each bench can
contain a version (also a different one) of the equipment sw/fw.
It is possible to update the equipment sw/fw of a bench at a time.
282
to switch the functioning of the memory benches of the main controller (refer to
13.
Logic address, physical

address and selected NE type
Functioning statuses of the

memory benches 1 and 2 (1)
File name and

equipment
sw/fw version
present
respectively on
the memory
bench 1 and 2
(2)
List of the
codes and of
the FPGA
files that
compose the
equipment
sw/fw (3)
(1) The wording:

S running points out that it is on progress the sw/fw of the subject memory bench.
S loaded points out that the sw/fw is present into the bench but actually it is not on progress
(standby).
S not loaded points out that the sw/fw is not present into the bench.
S downloading points out that the updating operation of the sw/fw of the memory bench is on
progress.
(2) The description of the pushbuttons is reported at the paragraph 13.11.1.
(3) The list of the parts that constitutes the equipment sw/fw changes according to the selected NE type.
For each code or FPGA file, the system points out into the column:
S Unit, the name of the card or of the NE part where there is the controller (code) or the
programmable device (FPGA file).
S Element, the name of the sw/fw. It usually points out the type of the component. The
wording:
FW_boot points out the boot code. This part of the code can not be updated in fact it
does not have at disposal a version into the memory benches.
FW_appl points out the application code.
conf_... or fpga... points out the configuration file of the programmable devices.
S Actual release, the version of the code or of the FPGA file present into the controller (main
controller or peripheral unit one)
S Release bench 1 and Release bench 2, the sw/fw version present respectively into the
memory bench 1 and 2 of the main controller.
Fig. 13.4
283
13.
13.11.1 RelSw window Pushbuttons

Into the RelSw window, there are the pushbuttons described here below.
13.11.1.1
Download
The Download pushbutton allows updating the sw/fw of the selected NE.
The choice of this pushbutton opens the Software Download window. The description and the
use of this window are reported at paragraph 13.9.1.
Warning. The system automatically updates the sw/fw of the memory bench not currently on
progress or not present (wording loaded or not loaded refer to Fig. 13.4).
It is not possible to execute the operation when the updating operation of the sw/fw is already
on progress (wording downloading).
13.11.1.2
Switch bench
The Switch bench pushbutton allows switching the functioning of the memory benches
relevant to the selected NE.
At the command choice, the system displays a window that points out (by means of messages)
the operations that the system executes during the switching of the benches.
At the end of the operation, the bench in running status is forces on loaded status and vice versa
144.
Warning. It is not possible to switch the memory bench when the updating operation of the sw/fw
is on progress (wording downloading refer to Fig. 13.4) and when, into a bench, it is not present
the equipment sw/fw (wording not loaded).
144.
Warning. The operation causes an automatic disconnection and new connection of the NE. If the
new connection is not successfully executed, the NE gets the unreachable status and, at regular
times, the supervisory system will automatically forward the reconnection command.
284
13.
13.12 LEGACY NE SW/FW DOWNLOAD

System access
User profile

Warning. The Legacy NE Sw/Fw Download option is available only if it has been
selected one or more Network Elements managed with Legacy protocol of the same
type.
Then the subject option is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
The Legacy NE Sw/Fw Download option allows executing the refresh of the equipment
software/firmware (sw/fw) of the selected NE or NEs.
The refresh of the equipment sw/fw can be immediately executed (only if it has been selected
a single NE) or it can be programmed for a defined date/hour (suggested option).
In the first case, the operation is executed in real time. In the second case, it is scheduled and
the system will execute the refresh at the date/time programmed by the user (refer to paragraph
13.13).
In both cases, the execution of the download for each selected NE is submitted to the following
conditions:
D
the NE has to be in connected status.
The local management program (LOM/LCT), in Configuration mode, has not to be

connected with the NE.
Other operations on progress must not be present.
If the equipment sw/fw refresh is immediately executed and the NE has not one of the above
listed conditions, the system does not execute the operation.
Also if the refresh is scheduled and at the programmation time (date/time) the NE is not in the
above listed conditions, the system does not execute the operation, but in this case, at regular
time ranges, the system will check the NE condition until when:
D
the NE is in the correct condition and then the system executes the download.
the NE is removed by the list of scheduled NEs for the download.
The procedure to refresh the equipment sw/fw is reported at paragraph 13.12.1.
285
13.
13.12.1 Refresh of the equipment sw/fw

1.
Into the map window, select the NE or the NEs of the same type with the equipment
sw/fw to be refreshed.
2.
Select the Legacy NE Sw/Fw Download option.

The system displays the Software Download window shown by Fig. 13.5.
3.
Into the File Selection box, set the file to be used for the refresh operation.
It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or to choose the Select
pushbutton (the system opens the shSel window) and to select the file among the
available ones.
4.
Set the download execution mode. If the user wants that the refresh is:
D
immediately executed, he has to activate the Immediate Download box.

Warning. It is possible to activate the box only if it has been selected a single NE.
5.
scheduled to be executed later, activate the Scheduled Download box and set the
date/time into the successive boxes (day, month, year, hour, minutes).
Choose the Start Dwl pushbutton.

Warning. Before executing the refresh operation, the NE controller executes a
compatibility check between the sw/fw that has to be forwarded and the one present
into the controller itself. The check consists of checking the technology and the NE
type.
Only if the parameters result compatible ones, it is possible to execute the sw/fw
refresh (do not execute the remaining part of the procedure).
If the parameters result compatible ones, the system displays a confirmation window
that points out the physical address, the logic address and the NE type for which it is
on progress the sw/fw refresh.
6.
Select the Start Download pushbutton.

If at the preceding step, it has been:
D
activated the Immediate Download box,

The system displays a window that points out (expressed by means of
percentage) the operation execution progress.
To stop the refresh procedure of the sw/fw, press the Abort pushbutton.
set an execution date/time for the refresh of the sw/fw.

The system displays the Scheduled Download Viewer window (refer to paragraph
13.13) and, into the list of the scheduled equipment for the download, it adds one
record for each NE present into the Selected Equipment area.
286
13.
NEs selected into

the map window for
which the system
will execute the
equipment sw/fw
updating operation
For each NE, it is

respectively pointed out:
logic address, physical
address, type and status
of the NE at the command
choice
Choose this
pushbutton to check
the NE list that have
been scheduled for the
updating operation of
the equipment sw/fw (1)
(1) The choice of the pushbutton opens the Scheduling download

window described at paragraph 13.13.
Fig. 13.5
287
13.
13.13 LEGACY SCHEDULED SW DWL STATUS

System access
User profile

The Legacy Scheduled Sw Dwl Status option allows displaying the list of the NEs managed
through the Legacy protocol, that have been scheduled for the refresh of the equipment
Warning. The subject option is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
At the command choice, the system displays the Scheduled Download Viewer window. Such
a window is composed by a table that lists the NEs and by a menu bar that is described into
the following paragraphs.
By means of the options present into the window, it is possible to execute the following
operations:
D
To delete the NEs from the list (refer to paragraph 13.13.2.2).
To stop the refresh procedure of the equipment sw/fw (refer to paragraph 13.13.2.3).
13.13.1 Scheduled Download Viewer window NE list

Into the table, each NE is coupled with a record that points out the following information:
"
Logical Addr.. Logic address of the NE.
"
Ph. Address. Physical address of the NE.
"
Type. NE type.
"
Scheduled Time. Date (day/month/year) and time (hours/minutes/seconds) relevant to

the programmed refresh of the equipment sw/fw.
The wording Immediate points out that the refresh has not been scheduled, but it has been
immediately executed (refer to paragraph 13.12.1).
"
Start time Date (day/month/year) and time (hours/minutes/seconds) relevant to the

beginning of the refresh procedure for the equipment sw/fw.
"
Duration Duration (expressed by hours/minutes/seconds) of the download operation.
"
Status. Status of the download operation. The wording:
288
13.
Waiting points out that the sw/fw refresh has not been yet executed 145.
Check Eq. Status points out that the status control of the equipment is on progress
(operation executed before the download).
Downloading points out that the refresh of the equipment sw/fw is on progress.
Completed points out that the refresh of the equipment sw/fw has been successfully
executed.
Failed points out that the refresh of the equipment sw/fw has not been completely
executed or the operation is failed.
In this case, it is advisable to execute or to program newly the refresh of the equipment
sw/fw.
Aborted points out that the refresh of the equipment sw/fw has been interrupted.
The system can point out into the Status column the status of the operation and also a
selfexplaining message.
a significant one for the current status of the operation.
13.13.2 Scheduled Download Viewer window Menu bar

Into the menu bar of the Scheduled Download Viewer window there are the commands
13.13.2.1 File Menu

"
145.
Warning. Into the Scheduled Time field, the system can points out a programmation date/time
preceeding the current one. This means that the NE, at the programmation time of the operation,
was not in the correct condition for the execution of the download. In this case, the system retries
to execute the sw/fw refresh at regular time ranges.
More detailed information concerning the execution modes of the download are reported at the
paragraph 13.12.
289
13.
13.13.2.2
Options Menu
"
Remove. It deletes the selected NE with the exception of the one for which the sw/fw
refresh is on progress (Downloading wording into the Status field).
"
View Download Info. It displays the details of the information relevant to the refresh of the
selected sw/fw.
The choice of the command opens the Swdl Information window that points out the following
information:
"
Logical Address, logical address of the equipment.
Equipment Type, equipment type.
Physical Address, physical address of the equipment.
Selected File, path and file name used for the refresh.
Selected Card, card of the equipment involved into the operation.
Software Release, release of the sw/fw.
Scheduled Time, date/time relevant to the refresh programmation of the

equipment sw/fw.
Duration, duration (expressed by means of hours/minutes/seconds) of the

download operation.
Download Status, status of the download operation. The description of the several
steps is reported at paragraph 13.13.1.
At the choice of the option, the system will refresh the date/time (present into the status bar
of the window) and it will point out the time of the refresh execution.
13.13.2.3
"
Actions Menu
Abort Download. It stops the refresh procedure of the equipment sw/fw.

Warning. The option is available only if it has been selected a NE for which the system is
executing the refresh of the sw/fw (Downloading wording into the Status field).
290
13.
13.14 HW INVENTORY
System access
User profile

The Options SIAE Options HW Inventory command allows displaying/filtering and

exporting the hardware inventory data of the NEs presents in the network.
When the command is selected, the HW Inventory window, depicted in Fig. 13.6, opens
showing the filter and export commands of the data and a part devoted to the displaying of the
data in table format.
Filter settings
Pushbuttons for Export management
Table of hardware data

Fig. 13.6
291
13.
By means of the commands present in the table, it is possible to execute the following
operations:
D
to display/filter the hardware inventory data of the NEs present in the network (see
paragraph 13.14.1)
to export the hardware inventory data immediately (see paragraph 13.14.2)
to export the hardware inventory data in scheduled modality (see paragraph13.14.3)
13.14.1 To display/filter the hardware inventory data of the NEs present in

the network
1.
Select the Options SIAE Options HW Inventory command: the HW Inventory

window opens listing the predefined filter criteria (no filter criteria is selected when the
window opens).
2.
Select the interested equipment types (Equipment Type)146. The multiple selection is
allowed.
3.
Fill the Customer ID field (it is possible to insert more IDs):
to insert the value of Customer ID, type the string in the text field and select
the Add pushbutton. It is possible to use the asterisk symbol (*) as jolly
character only at the end of the alphanumeric string
to delete a value of Customer ID, select it in the list and select the Del
pushbutton
4.
Fill the IP Address field: only the hardware inventory data of the equipment with the
specified physical address will be displayed. It is possible to use the asterisk symbol
(*) as jolly character for the fields of the IP address, but only for the last fields (that is
the asterisk cannot be before a field with numbers)147
5.
Select the types of units (Unit Type field) 148. It is possible to specify, for each
equipment type, which units must not be displayed (at most three types of units). The
procedure is the following:
select the Not managed unit type pushbutton: the FilterUnitType window
opens
in the upper box, select the equipment type (only the single selection is
possible)
in the lower box, select the units which you wish not to display in the Unit Type
field for that equipment type (the multiple selection is allowed). Select the
Select All pushbutton to select all the units or the Unselect All pushbutton
to deselect all the units.
select the Write pushbutton to confirm the settings and close the window.
146.
This filter option is mandatory, while all the other ones are optional.
147.
For example, 172.18.54.* or 172.18.*.* are accepted as filters on the IP address, while
172.18.*.215 is refused (the system answer with an error message).
148.
This filter setting is meaningful only for the Expansion display modality.
292
13.
6.
Fill the fields 148
Part Number, alphanumeric string of 10 characters
HW Edition, alphanumeric string of 3 characters
Bar Code, alphanumeric string of 24 characters that must respect the

following format (1S)xxxxxx yyyzzzzzzzzzz
where yyy are the 3 digits that identify HW Edition and zzzzzzzzzz are the
10 characters that identify the Part Number
If the format or the number of the characters of the typed string is not exact, the system
displays an error message.
7.
Select the Read pushbutton: the lower part of the window displays a table containing
the hardware data relevant to the NEs of the selected type. The maximum type of rows
displayed per page is pointed out by the Max Row field 149.
The displayed hardware parameters are:
Customer ID, it is the logical address of the equipment
Type Eq., it is the type of equipment
Description, it is a string that describes the equipmen
HW Edition, it is the hardware version of the unit
Part Num., it is the part number of the unit
Serial Num., it is the serial number of the unit
BAR CODE, it is the bar code of the unit
8.
Select the Expansion radio button to display in the table the rows relevant to the
hardware data of the units that compose a given equipment.
Select the Compact radio button to display in the table only the hardware data of an
unit for each equipment 150.
9.
Select the Read pushbutton: the table with the hardware inventory data is displayed.
10. To delete all the set filter options, select the Reset Filter pushbutton.
13.14.2 To export the hardware inventory data immediately

Once the hardware data is displayed in the table, it is possible to export them immediately by
means of the following procedure:
1.
Select the Export pushbutton: a window opens displaying a link with the name of the
149.
This value can be modified by the superuser.
150.
In case of Compact displaying, in order to switch to the Expansion modality it is sufficient to select
the Exp. pushbutton next to each row of the table. The table shows the hardware data relevant
only to the selected equipment (the address of the selected equipment is forced in the IP address
field).
293
13.
file where the data are exported151.

2.
Select the link to download the file.
The exported file will contain all the hardware inventory data achieved by the search and not only
those relevant to the displayed records. The type of the exported file can be defined by the
superuser user and can be one of the following: .cvs, .xml, .cvs zipped, .xml zipped.
13.14.3 To export the hardware inventory data in scheduled modality

Once the hardware data is displayed in the table, it is possible to schedule their export by means
of the following procedure:
1.
Select the Export timer pushbutton: a window opens displaying the filter conditions
set in the HW Inventory window (Filter description for insert box).
2.
Type in the Name field a name for the filter you are setting.
3.
Insert in the Step day field the day periodicity when the scheduled export of the data
is executed and, in the Export hour field, the time of the day when the export is
executed.
4.
Select the Insert pushbutton to store the scheduling settings.
5.
To delete an unwished schedulated export, select the corresponding row in the Filter
description for deleted box and select the Deleted pushbutton.
6.
Select the Chiudi pushbutton to close the window and go back to the HW Inventory
window.
The exported file will be saved in the /OPT/NMS5UX/EXP HW INV directory, in both the .cvs
and .xml format, and will be named HwInvfiltername[date__time] where filtername is the
name given by the operator during the creation of the filter for the exporting.
151.
Il nome ed il tipo del file sono determinati automaticamente e possono essere modificati dal
superuser.
294
14
14.
LOCATE SIAE ELEMENTS
The Locate Siae Elements menu contains the following commands:

D
Equipment List/Locate, it displays the list of the equipment (Network Element,

Workstation, Communication Server, etc.) managed by the NMS5UX system.
Proxy Equipment List, it displays the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy
Agent, their Proxy address and the address of the machines to which the Proxy has
to forward the equipment traps.
Warning. The Proxy Agent function is an optional one. The function and the subject
option are available if requested by the Customer only.
Equipment Find, it executes the search of an equipment using, as criteria, the logic
and/or physical address of the equipment.

295
14.
14.1
EQUIPMENT LIST/LOCATE
System access
User profile

The Equipment List/Locate command displays the list of all the equipment known by the
NMS5UX system.
Warning. If the profile of the user who has selected the command is:
D
Superuser, the information refer to the equipment present into all the maps managed
by the supervisory system.
Entry, Normal, Advanced or Privileged, the information refer only to the equipment
present into the actually open map.
At the choice of the Equipment List/Locate command, the system displays the Equipment
Browser [List/Locate] window that is composed by a table that lists the equipment, by a menu
bar and by a lower status bar. These elements are described into the following paragraphs.
Warning. At the window opening, the system can display a Warning window that points out that,
into the database, there is a number of equipment higher than N.
For this reason, the system asks if the user wants to make available information concerning the
PM measurements (the execution of this operation can need for an extremely long time). If the
user chooses the:
D
Yes pushbutton, the system will open the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window
and it will be possible, for every NE into the list, to check the active status of the PM
measurements (Perf. column).
No pushbutton, the system will open the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window but
the information relevant to the active PM measurements will not be available (Perf.
column).
By default, the limit N is 100. The value can be changed.
operations:
296
To save or to print the list of the equipment (refer to paragraph 14.1.2.1).
To open the Equipment, Equipment Info/Find, Graphic Performance Manager, Export,

View/Modify PM Status, Software Download, Equipment Severity Code, LCT User
manager e EqpInfoPage windows relevant to the equipment (refer to para. 14.1.2.2).
To add (or removes) a prefix to the logic address of the selected equipment (refer to
To reset and to write newly the table that contains the information relevant to the
equipment present into the maps (refer to paragraph 14.1.2.2). This operation is
available only for the user with superuser profile
14.
To forward the following commands: Line Test, Connect, Disconnect, Alarm

Realignment,
Configuration
Upload,
SNMPConfiguration
Download,
LegacyReset&Connect,, activation/deactivation of the CommServer and of the
Workstation (refer to paragraph 14.1.2.3).
To start up the Command Executor application program, through which it is possible

to execute the series of SNMP commands memorised on file (refer to paragraph
14.1.2.3). This operation is available only for the user with superuser, privileged
and anvanced profile.
To filter the list of the equipment (refer to paragraph 14.1.2.4).
To check the activated Performance Monitoring (PM) measurements for the selected
equipment (refer to paragraph 14.1.2.4).
To check the marking status of the alarms, of the Lct Present and Upload Incorrect
signal for the selected equipment (refer to paragraph 14.1.2.4).
To check in which maps there is the symbol of the selected equipment (refer to para.
14.1.2.4).
To check the users connected with the selected equipment (refer to para. 14.1.2.4).
14.1.1 Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window Equipment list

Into the table, one record is devoted to each equipment. Such a record provides the following
information:
"
"
Type. Equipment type: Radio SDH, Radio PDH, Workstation, etc.
"
Status. Status of the connection between the equipment and the supervisory system:
Connected, Disconnected, Unreachable.
"
Alarm. Functional status (alarms) of the equipment.

It is pointed out the seriousness level of the alarm present into the equipment. If there are
more alarms with different seriousness levels, the system will point out the level relevant
to the most serious alarm.
"
Alr Disabled. Enabling status of the alarms and of the equipment trap forwarding to the
supervisory system. The symbol:
x points out that at least an alarm or the forwarding of a trap of the equipment
is disabled.
To check the alarms and the trap forwarding disabled, open the Equipment
Severity Code window and select the command with the same name (refer to
297
14.
points out that the equipment has not alarms or trap forwarding disabled.
This information is available and significant only for the NEs managed with the SNMP
protocol.
"
Lct Presence. Status of the connection between the Local Craft Terminal (LCT) program
and the equipment. The value:
D
Absent points out that the LCT user is not actually connected to the equipment.
Configuring points out that the LCT user is connected to the equipment in Configuration
mode.
Monitoring points out that the LCT user is connected to the equipment in Monitoring
mode.
For more detailed information, refer to paragraph 6.5.

"
Lct Config. Status of the LCT program enabling to be connected to the equipment. The
value:
D
Enabled points out that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment
as in Monitoring mode as in Configuration one.
Disabled points out that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment
in Monitoring mode only.
This parameter is available and significant only for the NEs managed with the SNMP
protocol.
For more detailed information, refer to paragraph 6.5.
"
"
Perf. Activation status of the Performance Monitoring (PM) measurements. The symbol:
x points out that it has been activated at least one PM measurement.
points out that it has not been activated any PM measurement.
... points out that the information is not available because it has been selected,
into the Warning window, the No pushbutton (refer to para. 14.1) displayed at the
window opening.
Ack. Acknowledge status of the following signals:
Alarm (current and/or into the alarm history).
LCT presence in Configuration mode.
Configuration Upload operation not correctly executed.
The symbol:
x points out that there is at least one not acknowledged signal.
points out that there are not signals not acknowledged.
The user can check the acknowledge status of each single signal choosing the
Acknowledge Status command refer to paragraph 14.1.2.4.
"
IP/Ph Address. Physical address of the equipment.

The wording VIRTUAL EQ. points out that the record refers to a virtual Network Element
(refer to paragraph 9.1.2.2 and 9.1.2.4).
298
14.
"
Board Addr IP. Address of the CSB/WS that is physically connected with the NE. This
information is available and significant only for the NEs managed with the Legacy protocol.
"
Port Nb. Number of the CSB/WS port that is physically connected with the NE. This
information is available and significant only for the NEs managed with the Legacy protocol.
Warning. The information present into the table correspond to the characteristics and
to the functional status of the equipment at the selection of the command or at the
execution of the refreshing operation.
significant for the status and/or for the equipment type to which it is referred.
14.1.2 Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window Menu bar

Into the menu bar of the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window there are the menus and the
14.1.2.1 File Menu

"
Print/Save. It prints or saves on a file the list of the operations. The command choice opens
All items, it prints or saves the list of the records stored into the database.
Filtered Items, it prints/saves the list of the displayed records. If it has not been
activated any filter, the displayed records correspond to the ones memorised into
the database.
Selected Items, it prints/saves the range of the records selected with the mouse.
This command is available only if it has been selected at least one record.
"

"
Open Equipment. It opens the Equipment window (refer to paragraph 2.1.2) relevant to
the type of the selected equipment
299
14.
At the command selection, the system can display a message. The description of the
Equipment window and of the messages that can be displayed at its opening are reported
into the specific equipment Manual (refer to paragraph 1.3.3).
The Equipment window can be opened also clicking quickly twice on the equipment record.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a Workstation or a
Communication Server Board managed with the Legacy protocol (CommServerF).
"
and the functional status of the selected equipment.
If the user selects two or more records, he can open the relevant Equipment Info/Find
windows at the same time.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a Workstation and/or a
Communication Server Board.
"
will point out the refreshing time.
"
Performance Monitoring. It opens the Graphic Performance Manager window that

displays the results of the PM measurements relevant to the selected NE.
If the user selects two or more records, he can open the relevant Graphic Performance
Manager windows at the same time.
The description of the Graphic Performance Manager window is reported at paragraph
10.2.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a Workstation and/or a
"
Export Performance Monitoring. It opens the Export window that allows saving on file
the results of the PM measurements relevant to all the selected NEs.
The description of the Export window is reported at paragraph 10.4.
Warning. The option is available only if it has been selected one or more real NEs of the
same type.
"
View/Modify PM Status. It opens the View/Modify PM Status window that displays the
status of the PM measurements relevant to the selected NE.
Then, it allows activating/deactivating at the same time one or more measurements 152 for
the selected equipment.
If the user selects two or more records concerning NE object of the same type, it is possible
to activate/deactivate at the same time the PM measurements of all the selected NEs.
The description of the View/Modify PM Status window is reported at the paragraph 10.5.
Warning. The option is not available if it has been selected a Workstation or a
152.
300
Measurement types and/or measurement points.
14.
"
SNMP NE Sw/Fw Download. It opens the Software Download window that allows
executing the refreshing of the equipment sw/fw.
If the user has selected more NEs of the same type, at the command selection, the system
opens only one Software Download window that allows executing the operation for all the
NEs at the same time.
The description of the Software Download window is reported at paragraph 13.9.
Warning. The command is available only if one or more of the Network Elements managed
by SNMP protocol of the same type is selected, except for equipment of Elfo and SDH N+1
type.
"
SNMP Equipment Severity Code. It opens the Equipment Severity Code window that
allows enabling/disabling the trap/alarm forwarding from the equipment to the NMS5UX
system and/or changing the seriousness level coupled with the alarm signals.
The description of the Equipment Severity Code window is reported at paragraph 13.3.
Warning. The command is available only if a single NE managed by SNMP protocol and
in connected status is selected, except for equipment of Elfo and SDH N+1 type.
"
SNMP LCT Equipment User. It opens the LCT User Manager window that allows
checking and/or changing the list of the LCT users of the selected NE.
The description of the LCT User Manager window is reported at paragraph 13.6.
Warning. The command is available only if a single NE managed by SNMP protocol and
in connected status is selected, except for equipment of Elfo and SDH N+1 type.
"
Location. It adds (or removes) a prefix to the logic address of the selected equipment.
To add a prefix:
a.
Select one or more equipment to which the user wants to add the same prefix.
b.
Select the Location Assign option.

The system displays the Location window.
c.
Into the New Location Name box, type the prefix to be added to the logic address
of the equipment (alphanumeric string composed by a minimum of 1 and a
maximum of 10 characters).
d.
Press the Apply pushbutton.

Into the Logical Addr column of the selected equipment, the system adds the prefix
(prefix logic address). Then, the system adds the prefix into all the windows that
contains the <logic address> field. The only exception is the label of the icon that
represents the equipment into the map where it is not pointed out the prefix
If the equipment was just provided with prefix, the system replaces to preceding
value with the new one.
To remove a prefix:
a.
Select one or more equipment for which the user wants to remove the prefix.
b.
Select the Location Remove option.

The system removes the prefix from the logical address of the equipment.
301
14.
"
Map Structure Rebuild. It resets and writes newly the table that contains the information
relevant to the equipment present into the maps (equipment table) 153.
Warning. The option is available only for the user with superuser profile. Then, such
a command has to be used only in the case when it is probable a misalignment
between the information present into the equipment table and the equipment
displayed into the maps.
"
Radio Certificate. It opens the EqpInfoPage window that allows recording (saving and/or
printing) the data relevant to the selected equipment.
The description of the EqpInfoPage window is reported at the paragraph 11.2.
Warning. This command is available only for Radio SDH, Radio PDH, Radio PDHAL, G
14.1.2.3 Commands Menu

"
Line Test. It opens the LINE TEST command window that allows checking the effective
reachability of the selected equipment by the supervisory system.
The description of the LINE TEST command window is reported at paragraph 16.1.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a Workstation or a
"
Connect. It opens the CONNECT command window that allows activating the connection
between the NMS5UX system and the selected equipment.
The description of the CONNECT command window is reported at paragraph 16.2.
Warning. The connection request can be applied only for the selected NEs in disconnected
or unreachable status.
"
Disconnect. It opens the DISCONNECT command window that allows deactivating the
connection between the supervisory system and the selected equipment.
The description of the DISCONNECT command window is reported at paragraph 16.3.
Warning. The connection request can be applied only for the selected NEs in connected
"
Alarm Realignment. It opens the ALARM REALIGNMENT command window that

allows getting the alarm status of the selected equipment.
153.
The NMS5UX system allows creating a copy of an equipment into more maps. The number of
copies and the map that contains such copies is pointed out into the equipment table.
If the user uses the Siae options to add and to delete the equipment, the supervisory system
automatically refreshes the equipment table.
While, if the user uses the OpenView options to add and to delete the copies of an equipment
(unsuggested operation), the NMS5UX system does not refresh the equipment table creating
in such a way a misalignment between the equipment graphically present into the maps and the
information present into the equipment table.
302
14.
The description of the ALARM REALIGNMENT command window is reported at

paragraph 16.6.
Warning. The realignment request of the alarms can be applied only to the selected NEs
in connected status.
"
Configuration Upload. It opens the UPLOAD command window that allows getting the
current configuration of the selected equipment.
The description of the UPLOAD command window is reported at paragraph 16.7.
Warning. The request for the configuration acquiring can be applied only to the selected
NEs in connected status.
"
SNMP Configuration Download. It opens the Configuration Download window that

allows transferring the configuration of a Network Element (real or virtual) to another NE
(real or virtual) of the same type.
The description of the Configuration Download window is reported at paragraph 16.8.
Warning. The command is available only if the Network Elements managed by SNMP
protocol is selected, except for equipment of Elfo and SDH N+1 type.
"
Legacy Reset & Connect. It opens the RESET & CONNECT command window that
allows resetting the information, stored into the database of the NMS5UX system, relevant
to the configuration of the NE and then activating the connection between the system and
the NEs themselves.
The description of the RESET & CONNECT command window is reported at paragraph
16.5.
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected one or more
equipment managed with Legacy protocol. For the equipment managed with SNMP
protocol, the forwarding of the command under examination is not available because it
would be equal to the forwarding of the Connect command.
"
Communication Server Board. The command allows activating and deactivating the
connection between the supervisory system and the CommServerForce and
CommServerS equipment (Communication Server Board CSB objects).
The command choice opens a menu that contains the options: Connect, Disconnect. The
description of the options is reported at paragraph 16.9.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a NE different from a CSB
one.
"
Legacy Workstation. The command allows activating and deactivating the connection
between the supervisory system and the workstation/server (Workstation WS object).
The command choice opens a menu that contains the options: Connect, Disconnect. The
description of the options is reported at paragraph 16.10.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a NE different from a WS
one.
"
SNMP Command Executor. It starts up the Command Executor application program,

through which the user can execute the series of SNMP command memorised on file.
303
14.
With details, to startup the Command Executor application program, execute the
following procedure:
a.
Select one or more equipment.
b.
Select the Commands SNMPCommand Executor command.

The system displays the Execute Command window.
Warning. If the system displays the message No Command available for the
selected equipment, it means that, for the selected type of equipment, its own
supervisory system is not equipped with files that contain sequences of SNMP
commands 154.
c.
Select, into the Select Command area, the file that contains the desired sequence
of SNMP commands.
d.
Select the Start Command pushbutton.

The system displays the SNMP Command Executor window.
The description of the SNMP Command Executor window is reported at
paragraph 15.10.
14.1.2.4 View Menu

"
Set Filter. It opens the View Filter window that allows filtering and ordering the list.
system displays only the records that comply with all the specified criteria. The ordering
operation consists of defining the order to be used to display the records.
To filter and/or to order the data of a list, click on one or more boxes present into the window,
according to the criteria to be used.
The activation of each box expands the window displaying a section that contains the
following options:
D
Match logical address box. In this area, it is possible to set as filter one or more logic
address of NE executing the following procedure.
To type the NE address into the text box positioned under the Match Logical Address
box.
It is possible to use the wildcard character asterisk (*). For instance typing into the box
the character/s:
p, into the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, the system will use the
NE with p logic address.
p*, the system will use the NEs with logic addresses that start with p.
p*o, the system will display the NEs with logic addresses that start with p and
end with o.
154.
The files with sequences of SNMP commands can be requested at Siae Microelettronica. Siae
Microelettronica, at customers request, will provide specific files with sequences of SNMP
commands.
304
14.
Match IP/Physical Address box. In this section, the user can set as filter the
equipment type (real/virtual) and its physical address. With details, if the user activates
the option pushbutton:
SNMP Equipment, the system activates as criterion the IP address of real SNMP
equipment.
To set the criterion, type into the 4 text boxes (displayed at the selection of the
option pushbutton under examination) the parts that constitute the desired IP
address. It is possible to use the asterisk wild character (*).
Virtual Equipment, the system activates as criterion the virtual equipment.
Legacy Equipment, the system activates as criterion the Physical Address of real
Legacy equipment.
To set the criterion, type into the text box (displayed at the selection of the option
pushbutton under examination) the desired Physical Address. It is possible to
use the asterisk wild character (*).
Match connection status box. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, the status
of the connection between the Network Element and the supervisory system:
Connected, Disconnected, Undetermined, Unreachable.
To activate the options, select the boxes placed on the side (the box is activated when
inside it there is the symbol n
).
Match equipment type box. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, the
equipment types that have to be displayed: Radio PDH, Radio SDH, etc.
).
Match performance box. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, the activation
status of the Performance Monitoring (PM) measurements. If the user activates the:
Enabled option pushbutton, the system will display the NEs that have at least one
activated PM measurement.
Disabled option pushbutton, the system will display the NEs that do not have any
activated PM measurement.
Warning. This box is not available if, into the Warning window displayed at the opening
of the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, the user has selected the No
pushbutton (refer to paragraph 14.1).
D
Match Alarm box. In this section, it is possible to set as filter the severity of the active
alarms. If the user activates the:
Critical (red) box, the NEs where at least an alarm of Critical severity is active will
be displayed.
Major (orange) box, the NEs where at least an alarm of Major severity is active
will be displayed.
Minor (yellow) box, the NEs where at least an alarm of Minor severity is active will
be displayed.
Warning (light blue) box, the NEs where at least an alarm of Warning severity is
active will be displayed.
Normal (green) box, the NEs where at least an event signaling is active will be
displayed.
305
14.
Match Alarm Disabled box. In this area, it is possible to set as filter the enabling status
of the alarms and of the forwarding of the equipment traps to the supervisory system.
If the user activates:
the Enabled pushbutton, the system will display the NEs that do not have alarms
or the forwarding of the disabled traps.
the Disabled pushbutton, the system will display the NEs that have at least one
alarm or the forwarding of a disabled trap.
Match Gosip Address box. In this area, it is possible to set as filter some parameters
that compose the GOSIP (Government OSI Profile) address of the equipment.
With details, activate the:
Domain box and type, into the relevant boxes, the value of the corresponding 2
bytes, to define as filter the Domain parameter (default part of the GOSIP
Address).
Area box and type, into the relevant boxes, the value of the corresponding 2 bytes,
to define as filter the Area parameter (default part of the GOSIP Address).
System ID box and type, into the relevant boxes, the value of the corresponding
6 bytes, to define as filter the System ID parameter.
Match location box. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, the physical position
of the equipment. With details, if the user activates the:
Board option, it is set as criterion a specific Communication Server Board (CSB)

or Workstation (WS), this means that (if it has not been activated any other filter)
the system will display only the NEs physically connected to the set CSB or WS.
Port option, it is set as criterion a specific serial port of the CSB or WS set into the
Board box, this means that (if it has not been activated any other filter) the system
will display only the NEs physically connected to the set port.
) and then set, if it has been activated the Board box,
the IP Address of the machine, and if it has been activated the Port box, the number
of the serial port.
Warning. This criterion is significant only for NEs managed with the Legacy protocol.
D
Sort by box. In this section it is possible to order the records. If the user activates the:
Logical Address option pushbutton, the equipment will be displayed in

alphabetical order, with respect to their logic address.
Type option pushbutton, the system will execute the ordering according to the
equipment type.
After having set the criteria, choose the OK pushbutton (it executes the filtering and/or
ordering command and closes the window) or the Apply pushbutton (it executes the
command and does not close the window).
The system will display, into the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, only the records
that comply with all the activated options.
Each time that the system filters the list, it considers all the records, as the displayed ones
as the hidden ones.
306
14.
Into the window there are also the Clear pushbutton (it deletes the activation of all the
filters and displays the complete list of all the records), the Cancel pushbutton (it closes
the window and does not executes the command) and the Help pushbutton (it opens the
online manual).
Warning. When the user closes the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, the system
automatically removes the eventual activation of the filters.
"
Perf TP active. It opens the Active performance TP window that points out the activated
PM measurements.
With details, into the Type and Logical Address boxes, the system respectively points out
the type and the logic address of the NE to which refer the displayed information.
Into the PM Class Name column, the system lists the denominations of the measurements
(it points out the type of the executed measurement), while into the TP Class Name column,
the denominations of the relevant measuring points (it points out the point where it has been
executed the PM measurement). Each measurement and measuring point represent a line
of the table.
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected a NE with activated PM
measurements (symbol x into the Perf field refer to paragraph 14.1.1).
"
Acknowledge Status. It opens the Acknowledge Status window that points out the
acknowledge status of the following signals:
D
Alarm Not Acknowledged Alarm field. The:
activated box (n
) points out that, for the NE under examination, there is at least
an alarm (current alarm and/or into the alarm history) not acknowledged.
To acknowledge an alarm, refer to paragraph 12.1.2.2 e 12.2.2.2.
deactivated box points out that all the possible alarms are acknowledged.
Presence of the LCT in Configuration mode Not Acknowledged Lct Config field. The:
activated box (n
) points out that from the last time that it has been opened the
Equipment window for the NE under examination, the LCT program has been
connected to the NE at least one time in Configuration mode.
To acknowledge the signal, open the Equipment window relevant to the NE.
deactivated box points out that form the last time that it has been opened the
Equipment window, the LCT has not been connected in Configuration mode.
Configuration Upload Operation not correctly executed Incorrect Upload field. The
box:
active (n
) points out that the last Configuration Upload operation has failed.
The system automatically marks the signal at the first Configuration Upload
operation correctly executed.
deactivated box points out that the last Configuration Upload operation has been
successfully executed.
Into the Type, Ip/Ph Address and Logical Address boxes, the system points out respectively
the type, the physical address and the logical address of the selected equipment.
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected a Network Element with
acknowledged signals (symbol x into the Ack field refer to paragraph 14.1.1).
307
14.
"
Equipment Location (Map). It opens the Equipment Location window that points out the
maps where there is the symbol of the selected equipment.
With details, into the Type, Ip/Ph Address and Logical Address boxes, the system points
out respectively the type, the physical address and the logic address of the equipment.
Into the Map name table, the system lists the map that contain the equipment.
"
SNMP LCT Logged Users. It opens the Logged Users window that points out the users
(LCT and NMS5UX) connected to the selected NE at the choice of the option; then, through
the options present into the window, it is possible to force the disconnection (logout) of
one or more users.
The descriptions of the Logged Users windows is reported at paragraph 13.7.
Warning. The command is available only if the Network Elements managed by SNMP
protocol is selected, except for equipment of Elfo and SDH N+1 type.
14.1.2.5 Help Menu

14.1.3 Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window Status bar

308
14.
14.2
PROXY EQUIPMENT LIST
System access
User profile

Warning. The Proxy Equipment List command is an optional one.

The Proxy Equipment List option displays the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy
Agent, their Proxy address and the address of the machines to which the Proxy has to forward
the traps of the equipment.
The Equipment Managed by Proxy window is composed by a table where there is the list of the
equipment, by the menu bar and by a lower status bar. All these elements are described into
the following paragraphs.
Using the command present into the window, it is possible to execute the following operations:
D
To filter the list of the equipment (refer to paragraph 14.2.3).
14.2.1 Equipment Managed by Proxy window Equipment list

Into the table, one record is devoted to each equipment. Such a record provides the following
information:
"
"
Type. Equipment type: SDH radio, PDH radio, PDHAL Radio, PMP, G series Radio.
"
Eq. Proxy Addr.. Address of the equipment that is acknowledged by the Proxy Agent:
Proxy address of the equipment 155.
"
Primary Trap Dest.. Address of the machine to which the Proxy Agent forwards the traps
coming from the equipment 155.
"
Secondary Trap Dest.. Address of an additional machine to which the Proxy Agent
forwards the traps coming from the equipment 155.
Warning. The information present into the table correspond to the characteristics of the
equipment at the selection of the command.
155.
This parameter has to be defined by the user duringthe creation phases of the equipment (refer
to paragraph 9.1.2.1 and 9.1.2.3).
309
14.
14.2.2 Equipment Managed by Proxy window Menu bar

Into the menu bar of the Equipment Managed by Proxy window there are the menus and the
14.2.2.1 File Menu

"

"
into the window.
14.2.2.3 Help Menu

14.2.3 Equipment Managed by Proxy window Status bar

D
310
the activation of one or more filters. With details, if it has been activated:
the Managed by Proxy Agent box, the system displays into the window the
equipment managed by Proxy Agent.
the Not Managed by Proxy Agent box, he system displays into the window the
equipment that are not managed by the Proxy Agent.
14.
14.3
EQUIPMENT FIND
System access
User profile

The Equipment Find command allows displaying the characteristics and the functional status
of an equipment when the user knows only its logic and/or physical address.
The procedure to execute the search is the following one:
1.
Choose the Equipment Find command.

The system displays the Equipment Info/Find window.
2.
Into the Physical Address text box, type the physical address and/or into the Address
box, the logic address of the equipment.
3.
Press the Search pushbutton placed on the side of the text boxes.
If the searching procedure has given a:
positive result, the system displays, into the window, the characteristics and the
functional status of the equipment.
The map window that contains the Network Element is brought at front and the
symbol of the NE is pointed out.
The description of the parameters and of the pushbuttons, present into the
Equipment Info/Find window, is reported at paragraphs 11.1.1 and 11.1.2.
negative result, the system displays a message that points out that the NE is not
present into the database of the actually open map.
Warning. It is possible to execute more consecutive searching procedures changing the value
inserted into the Physical Address and/or Address box and pressing the Search pushbutton.
If the user chooses the Clear pushbutton, the system automatically deletes the value present
into the text boxes.
311
14.
312
15
15.
MISC SIAE TOOLS
The Misc Siae Tools menu contains the following commands:

D
Alarm History Backup. it saves on disk and/or on tape the history of the
alarm/status/event signals stored into the Alarm History table.
Alarm History Restore, it restores the history of the alarm/status/event signals saved
before on disk and/or on tape and copies it into the Old History table.
Alarm History Delete Backup, it deletes the history of the alarm/status/event signals
saved on disk.
Pm Backup, it saves on disk and/or on tape the results of the Performance Monitoring
(PM) measurements stored into the Performance Monitoring table.
Pm Restore, it restores the

results of the Performance Monitoring (PM)
measurements saved before on disk and/or on tape and copies them into the Old
Performance Monitoring table.
Pm Delete, it deletes the results of the Performance Monitoring (PM) measurements

saved on disk.
PDHSDH Radio Scoreboards, it creates/displays, by means of

graphical/percentage mode, the current alarms relevant to the Radio Link created by
the user.
Warning. This command is an optional one.
PDHSDH Radio Link Browser, it displays the list of the Radio Link created by the
user (refer to paragraph 9.1.3).
Warning. This command is an optional one.
Map Manager Status it displays the connection status with the NMS5UX domain, with
the modules for the management of the Legacy equipment and with the Siae Ring
Manager system.
SNMP Command Executor, it starts up the Command Executor application

program, through which it is possible to execute the series of SNMP commands
memorised on file.
Database Backup, it saves on disk and/or on tape the information present into the
database of the NMS5UX supervisory system.
Database Restore, it restores the information present into the database of the system
saved before on disk and/or on tape.
313
15.
MISC SIAE TOOLS

314
15.
15.1
MISC SIAE TOOLS
ALARM HISTORY BACKUP
System access
User profile

The Alarm History Backup command allows saving the history of the of the alarm/status/event
signals stored into the Alarm History table 156 relevant to the NEs present into all the existing
maps.
The contents of the table are saved on a file that can be stored on disk and/or on magnetic
support (DAT tape Digital Audio Type).
Then, to use the contents of the file, it will be necessary to restore it (refer to paragraph 15.2)
and to open the Old History Browser window (refer to paragraph 12.3).
15.1.1 Backup procedure of the signals

1.
At the choice of the Alarm History Backup command, the system displays the Alarm
History Backup window.
2.
Activate the:
Backup To Tape box, if the user wants to save the contents of the Alarm History
table on tape (DAT tape).
Backup To Disk box, if the user wants to save the table on the machine disk
(workstation or server).
If the user activates both the boxes, the system saves the data as on disk as on tape.
3.
If the user has activated the:
Backup To Tape box, insert the tape into the DAT drive of the machine.
Warning. The wording [/dev/rmt/Om], placed on the side if the box, points out that
the contents of the table will be overwritten on the possible data already present
on the DAT. This setting can not be changed.
Backup To Disk box, type, into the text box, the name of the file where the user
wants to save the contents of the table.
If the user choose the Browser pushbutton, it is possible to select the name of
an already existing file (in this case the contents of the file will be overwritten with
the new data).
Warning. Into the File name field, the system points out the predefined path
where the system saves the file. This setting can not be changed.
4.
156.
Choose the OK pushbutton to execute the saving operation.
To display the contents of the Alarm History table, open the Alarm History Browser window (refer
to paragraph 12.1).
315
15.
MISC SIAE TOOLS
15.2
ALARM HISTORY RESTORE
System access
User profile

The Alarm History Restore command restores the history of the alarm/status/event signals
saved before on disk and/or on tape (refer to paragraph 15.1).
If the user wants to restore a saved file on:
D
DISK, he has to execute the procedure described at paragraph 15.2.1.

The data are copied into the Old History table; its contents can be displayed into the
Old History Browser window (refer to paragraph 12.3).
TAPE, he has to execute the procedure described at paragraph 15.2.2.

The backup file is copied on the machine disk. With details, it is copied into the
predefined directory, the same one where the system automatically saves the files
during the backup procedure (refer to paragraph 15.1.1).
To display the contents of the file, the use has to copy it into the Old History by means
of the procedure described at paragraph 15.2.1 and to open the Old History Browser
window (refer to paragraph 12.3).
15.2.1 Restore from disk procedure of the signals

1.
At the choice of the Alarm History Restore command, the system displays the Alarm
History Restore window.
2.
Into the Files list, select the name of the file to be restored.
Into the list, the system points out the files present into the predefined directory
(pointed out into the Selection box). Such a directory is the same one where the system
automatically saves the files during the backup procedure (refer to paragraph 15.1.1).
3.
Choose the OK pushbutton to execute the restoring operation.

If the operation is successfully executed, the system will display a confirmation
message. The restored data will be overwritten on the ones already present into the
Old History table.
15.2.2 Restore procedure from tape of the signals
316
1.
Open a windows terminal.
2.
At the commandline prompt of the windows terminal, type: cd/tar xv.
15.
15.3
MISC SIAE TOOLS
ALARM HISTORY DELETE BACKUP
System access
User profile

The Alarm History Delete Backup command allow deleting the history of the
alarm/status/event signals saved by means of the Alarm History Backup command (refer to
paragraph 15.1) on the machine disk (workstation or server).
15.3.1 Deleting procedure of the backup files of the signals

1.
At the choice of the Alarm History Delete Backup command, the system displays the
Alarm History Delete window.
2.
Into the Files list, select the name of the file to be deleted.
(pointed out into the Directories box) Such a directory is the same one where the
system automatically saves the files during the backup procedure (refer to paragraph
15.1.1).
Warning. Also if the user can set a different directory, the system allows deleting files
only into the predefined directory.
3.
Choose the OK pushbutton to executed the deleting operation.

message.
317
MISC SIAE TOOLS
15.
15.4
PM BACKUP
System access
User profile

The Pm Backup command allows saving (subdivided by month) the results of the PM
measurements stored into the PM table 157 relevant to the NEs present into all the existing maps.
The contents of the table is saved on a file that can be stored on disk and/or on magnetic support
(DAT tape Digital Audio Type).
Then, to display the contents of the file, it will be necessary to restore it (refer to paragraph 15.5)
and to open the Graphical Performance Monitoring window (refer to paragraph 10.3).
15.4.1 Backup procedure of the PM measurements

1.
At the choice of the Pm Backup command, the system displays the Pm Backup
window.
2.
Into the Selected Month option menu, select the month to be saved.
3.
Activate the:
Backup To Tape box, if the user wants to save the contents of the Performance
Monitoring table on tape (DAT tape).
Backup To Disk box, if the user wants to save the table on the disk of the
workstation or server.
4.
Activate the Delete Table box, if the user wants that the contents of the Performance
Monitoring table is automatically deleted after the saving on file.
Warning. This operation is available only for the user with superuser profile.
5.
If the user has activated the:
Backup To Tape box, insert the tape into the DAT drive of the machine
the contents of the table will be overwritten on the possible data already present
on the DAT. This setting can not be changed.
Backup To Disk box, type, into the text box, the name of the file where the user
wants to save the contents of the table.
If the user choose the Browser pushbutton, it is possible to select the name of
an already existing file (in this case the contents of the file will be overwritten with
the new data).
157.
To display the contents of the Performance Monitoring table, open the Graphical Performance
Monitoring window (refer to paragraph 10.2).
318
15.
MISC SIAE TOOLS
Warning. Into the File name field, the system points out the predefined path
where the system saves the file. This setting can not be changed.
6.
319
15.
MISC SIAE TOOLS
15.5
PM RESTORE
System access
User profile

The Pm Restore command restores the results of the Performance Monitoring (PM)
measurements saved before on disk or on tape (refer to paragraph 15.4).
If the user wants to restore a saved file on:
D
DISK, he has to execute the procedure described at paragraph 15.5.1.

The data are copied into the Old Performance Monitoring table, its contents can be
displayed into the Graphical Performance Monitoring OLD window (refer to
paragraph 10.3).
TAPE, he has to execute the procedure described at paragraph 15.5.2.

The backup file is copied on the machine disk. With details, it is copied into the
predefined directory, the same one where the system automatically saves the files
during the backup procedure (refer to paragraph 15.4.1).
To display the contents of the file, the use has to copy it into the Old Performance
Monitoring by means of the procedure described at paragraph 15.5.1 and to open the
Graphic Performance Monitoring OLD window (refer to paragraph 10.3).
15.5.1 Restore procedure from disk of the PM measurements

1.
At the choice of the Pm Restore command, the system displays the Pm Restore
window.
2.
Into the Files list, select the name of the file to be restored.
(pointed out into the Selection box) Such a directory is the same one where the system
3.
Choose the OK pushbutton to executed the restoring operation.

message. The restored data will be overwritten on the ones already present into the
Old Performance Monitoring table.
320
15.
MISC SIAE TOOLS
15.5.2 Restore procedure from tape of the PM measurements

1.
Open a windows terminal.
2.
At the commandline prompt of the windows terminal, type: cd/tar xv.
321
15.
MISC SIAE TOOLS
15.6
PM DELETE
System access
User profile

The Pm Delete command allows deleting the backup files, relevant to the Performance
Monitoring (PM) measurements, saved by means of the Pm Backup command (refer to
paragraph 15.4) on the machine disk (workstation or server).
15.6.1 Deleting procedure of the backup files of the PM measurements

1.
At the choice of the Pm Delete command the system displays the Pm Delete window.
2.
Into the Files list, select the name of the file to be deleted.
(pointed out into the Selection box) Such a directory is the same one where the system
Warning. Also if the user can set a different directory, the system allows deleting files
only into the predefined directory.
3.
Choose the OK pushbutton to execute the deleting operation.

message.
322
15.
15.7
MISC SIAE TOOLS
PDHSDH RADIO SCOREBOARDS
Warning. The PDHSDH Radio Scoreboards command is an optional one.

The description of this option is not available for the current version of the manual.
323
15.
MISC SIAE TOOLS
15.8
PDHSDH RADIO LINK BROWSER
System access
User profile

Warning. The PDHSDH Radio Link Browser command is an optional one.

The PDHSDH Radio Link Browser option displays the list of all the Radio Links defined by
the user (refer to paragraph 9.1.3) and present into all the maps.
At the choice of the PDHSDH Radio Link Browser option, the system displays the Radio Link
Browser window. Such a window is composed by a table that lists the Radio Links, a menu bar
and a lower status bar that are described into the following paragraphs.
By means of the commands present into the subject window, it is possible to execute the
following operations:
D
To filter the list of the Radio Links (refer to paragraph 15.8.2.3).
15.8.1 Radio Link Browser window List of the Radio Links

Into the table, each Radio Link is coupled with a record that points out the following information:
"
Link Name. Name assigned by the user to the Radio Link.
"
Map. Name of the map that contains the Radio Link.
"
Link Type. Equipment type where it has been defined the Radio Link: Radio PDH, Radio
SDH, etc..
"
Source Name. Logic address of the equipment placed at one end of the connection (Radio
Link).
"
Source Address. Physical address of the equipment placed at one end of the connection.
"
Destination Name. Logic address of the equipment placed at the other end of the
connection.
"
Destination Address. Physical address of the equipment placed at the other end of the
connection.
.Warning. The information present into the table corresponds to the connections present into
the map(s) at the time of the option choice or of the refresh procedure
324
15.
MISC SIAE TOOLS
15.8.2 Radio Link Browser window Menu bar

The menu bar of the Radio link Browser window contains the menus and the options described
15.8.2.1 File Menu

"

"
into the window.
At the option choice, the system will refresh the date/time (refer to paragraph 15.8.3) and
it will point out the time of the refresh execution.
15.8.2.3 View Menu

"
Filter. It opens the Radio Link Filter window that allows filtering the list.
system will display only the records that comply with all the specified criteria.
To filter the data, click on one or more boxes present into the window, according to he criteria
to be used.
The activation of each box expands the window displaying an area that contains the
following options:
D
Match Link Name box. In this box, it is possible to set as filter one or more logic
addresses of the Radio Links.
It is possible to set the logic addresses typing the logic address of the Radio Link into
the text box and choosing the Add pushbutton.
The system inserts the values so set into the area placed under the above mentioned
Match Link Name box.
It is possible to delete a single option from the list, after having highlighted it, choosing
the Remove pushbutton or to delete at the same time all the options choosing the
Remove All pushbutton.
Match Map box. In this box, it is possible to set as filter one or more maps.
It is possible to set the maps typing the map name into the text box and choosing the
Add pushbutton.
The system inserts the values so set into the area placed under the Match Map box.
325
15.
MISC SIAE TOOLS
D
Match Equipment box. In this box, it it is possible to set as filter one or more equipment
involved by the connection.
It is possible to set the logic address of one of the two equipment involved by the
connection typing it into the text box and choosing the Add pushbutton.
The system inserts the values so set into the area placed under the Match Equipment
box.
After having set the criteria, choose the OK pushbutton (it executes the filter command
and closes the window) or the Apply one (it executes the filter command and does not close
the window).
The system will display, into the Radio Link Browser window, only the records that comply
with all the activated options.
Every time that the system filters the list, it considers all the records as the displayed records
as the hidden ones.
The window contains also the Clear pushbutton (it removes the activation of all the filters
and displays the complete list of the records) and the Cancel one (it closes the window and
does not execute the command).
Warning. When the system closes the Radio Link Browser, window, the possible activation
of the filters is automatically removed.
15.8.2.4 Help Menu

The menu opens the online manual.
15.8.3 Radio Link Browser window Status bar

326
the number of the displayed records and the total number of records (xx of yy). It the
user has not activated some filters, the number of the displayed records corresponds
to the total number of records.
date and time relevant to the opening or to the refreshing (executed through the choice
of the Refresh option refer to paragraph 15.8.2.1) of the window.
15.
15.9
MISC SIAE TOOLS
MAP MANAGER STATUS
System access
User profile

At the starting up of the supervisory system or at the selection of the Map Manager Status option,
the system displays the SIAE Map Manager Status window that contains the following fields:
D
Status Change Notifications. It points out the connection status with the domain of the
NMS5UX system. The NMS5UX domain has the task to manage the alarms received
by the siae equipment.
With details the square can have the following colors:
green, it points out that the connection with the domain has been activated:
the system dynamically points out the alarms on the map (the status of the
equipment color of the symbols is meaningful).
red, it points out that the connection with the domain has been deactivated:
the system does not dynamically point out the alarms on the map (the status
of the equipment color of the symbols is meaningful).
Warning. In this condition, it is possible to execute all the operations available
with the NMS5UX system, except for the map operations (creation, deletion,
modification, search, moving of an object).
On the side of the square, the system displays the Enable pushbutton.
Select such a pushbutton to activate again the connection with the domain.
If the operation has been successfully performed, the system replaces the red
square with the green one. If the operation execution fails, contact your own
system administrator.
Legacy Actions. It points out the connection status with the modules of the NMS5UX
system that manage the Siae equipment with Legacy protocol.
green, it points out that the connection with the modules under examination
has been activated: the system manages the Legacy equipment.
red, it points out that the connection with the modules under examination has
been deactivated: the system does not manage the Legacy equipment.
Select such a pushbutton to activate again the connection with the modules.
white coupled with the wording Not Managed, it points out that during the
configuration of the NMS5UX system, the modules for the management of
the Siae equipment with Legacy protocol have not been installed.
Ring Manager Link. It points out the connection status with the Siae Ring Manager
327
15.
MISC SIAE TOOLS
supervisory system 158.

green, it points out that the connection with the Ring Manager system has
been activated.
red, it points out that the connection with the Ring Manager system has been
deactivated.
Select such a pushbutton to activate again the connection with the system.
white coupled with the wording Not Managed, it points out that during the
configuration of the NMS5UX system, the Ring Manager system has not been
installed.
158.
Supervisory system for the control and the management of the connections and circuits (path) in
SDH networks of Siae equipment.
328
15.
MISC SIAE TOOLS
15.10 SNMP COMMAND EXECUTOR

System access
User profile

Superuser, Privileged, Advanced
The SNMP Command Executor starts up the Command Executor application program,
through which the user can execute the series of SNMP command memorised on file.
With details, to startup the Command Executor application program, execute the following
procedure:
1.
Select one or more equipment.
2.
Select the Misc SIAE Tools SNMPCommand EExecutor command

The system displays the SNMP Command Executor window.
Warning. If the system displays the message No Command available for the selected
equipment, it means that, for the selected type of equipment, its own supervisory
system is not equipped with files that contain sequences of SNMP commands 159.
3.
Select, into the Files area, the desired command file.

Into the Directory box, the system points out the default path. If the desired file is not
present into the pointed out folder, type the new path into the box or use the Change
Directory button.
4.
Set the possible parameters, displayed into the Command File Description area, at the
selection of the file.
The list of the parameters changes according to the selected file. Some files do not
need for the setting of the parameters.
5.
Select the option pushbutton:
Immediate, if the user wants to execute immediately the sequence of SNMP

commands present into the file.
Scheduled, if the user wants to execute later the sequence of SNMP

commands present into the file.
When the pushbutton is selected, the boxes for the setting of the data (Day,
Month, Year) and of the time (Hour, Min), when you wish to execute the
sequence of commands, are displayed.
6.
Select the Start Command button.

If at the preceding step the user has activated the Immediate box, into the Message
area, the system points out the operation progress status.
If the user selects the OK button present into the Command Executor window
displayed at the operation startingup, the system can stop the procedure.
159.
The files with sequences of SNMP commands can be requested at Siae Microelettronica. Siae
Microelettronica, at customers request, will provide specific files with sequences of SNMP
commands.
329
15.
MISC SIAE TOOLS
If at the preceding step, it has been activated the Scheduled box, the system displays
a message that points out that the file has been scheduled and that it will be
automatically run at the set date/time.
If the operator selects the View Scheduled pushbutton, the system displays the View
Scheduled Command window that lists the scheduled files
With details, for each file, the system points out, into the following fields, the following
data:
File, the file name.
Par 1...Par 5, the possible values set for the requested parameters relevant
to the file execution.
Status, the operation status. The wording:

* Waiting, points out that the file has not been executed yet 160.
* Running, points out that the file execution is on progress.
* Completed, points out that the sequence of the SNMP commands present
into the file has been successfully executed.
Sched Time, date (day/month/year) and time (hour/minute/second) for which

it has ben programmed the file execution.
Start Time, date (day/month/year) and time (hour/minute/second) when the

system has started up the execution of the command sequence.
Stop Time, the possible values set for the parameters requested for the file
execution.
Through the pushbuttons present into the View Scheduled Command window:
it is possible to delete the selected file (Delete Command pushbutton).
it is possible to display the progress of the executed operations relevant to

the selected file (View Detailed Information pushbutton).
it is possible to update the information present into the window (Refresh

pushbutton). The selection of the pushbutton under examination updates
the date/time pointed out into the status bar of the window.
160.
Warning. Into the Sched Time field, it is possible to have the indication of a preceding programming
date/time with respect to the current one. This situation means that the NE, at the time when it was
programmed the operation, was not in the right condition for the file execution (for instance the NE
was disconnected or unreachable). In such a case, the system retries the execution of the file at
regular time.
330
15.
MISC SIAE TOOLS
15.11 DATABASE BACKUP

System access
User profile

Superuser
The Database Backup command allows saving the information present into the database of
the supervisory system 161 on disk and/or on magnetic support (DAT tape Digital Audio Type).
Then, it will be possible to restore the saved information executing the restore procedure of the
database (refer to paragraph 15.12).
15.11.1 Backup procedure of the database

1.
At the choice of the Database Backup command, the system displays the Database
Backup window.
2.
Activate the:
Backup To Disk box, if the user wants to save the database on the machine disk
(workstation or server).
On the side of the box, it is pointed out the predefined path where the system
saves the file. This setting can not be changed.
Backup To Tape box, if the user wants to save the contents of the database on the
DAT tape.
the contents of the database will be overwritten on the possible data already
present on the DAT. This setting can not be changed.
3.
If the user has activated the Backup To Tape box, insert the tape into the DAT drive
of the machine.
4.
161.
Into the system database, there are stored the data relevant to all the existing maps and NEs.
331
15.
MISC SIAE TOOLS
15.12 DATABASE RESTORE

System access
User profile

Superuser
The Database Restore command restores the system database saved before on disk or tape
15.12.1 Restore procedure of the database

Warning. The data restoring procedure can not be executed with the HP OpenView
Windows Network Node Manager graphical platform on progress.
Before closing the graphical platform, choose the command and read the displayed page of the
contextual help that describes the procedure to be executed to restore the database.
332
16
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
The Siae Commands menu contains the commands able to execute the following operations:
"
To manage the connection between the supervisory system and the Network Elements
(PDH Radio, SDH Radio, PMP Radio, etc.).
With details the:
D
Line Test command checks the effective reachability if the NE.
Connect command activates the dialogue 162 between the NMS5UX system and the
NE.
Disconnect command deactivates the dialogue 163 between the NMS5UX system and
the NE.
SNMP Forced NE Disconnect command forces the software disconnection of the

selected NE.
protocol.
Legacy Reset & Connect command resets the information relevant to the
configuration of the NE, stored into the database of the supervisory system and
activates the dialogue between the NE and the NMS5UX system itself.
Warning. This command is available only for the equipment managed with Legacy
protocol.
Then, the subject option is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
Alarm Realignment command allows to the supervisory system to acquire the status
of the alarm actually present into the NE.
Configuration Upload command allows to the supervisory system to acquire the

current configuration of the NE.
SNMP Configuration Download command allows transferring the configuration

of a Network Element (real or virtual) to another NE (real or virtual) of the same type.
SNMP Equipment Controller Reset command executes the software reset of the
selected NE.
162.
It starts the alarm reception.
163.
It ends the alarm reception.
333
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
D
PMP Clear Alarm Table command transfers, to the selected equipment, the default
table of the alarms memorised into its own server/workstation.
Warning. This command is available only for the PMP equipment type.
"
To activate and to deactivate the connection of the Workstation and Communication Server
Board objects and to open and to close the relevant serial ports.
Warning. The commands pointed out here below have to be used only and exclusively if
into the involved network there are Network Elements managed with the Legacy protocol.
In fact, only for these NEs, the connection phase is proceeded by the configuration of the
serial ports physically connected with the NEs themselves (refer to paragraph 6.1).
For the NEs managed with SNMP protocol, it is assumed that the TCP/IP network ensures
their connection to the supervisory system.
With details, the:
D
Communication Server Board command activates and deactivates the connection

between the supervisory system and the CommServerForce and CommServerS
equipment (Communication Server Board objects) .
Legacy Workstation command activates and deactivates the connection between

the supervisory system and the workstation/server.
Warning. The subject option is present into the menu only if the software modules for
the management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
Legacy Communication Server Port command manages the functioning status of

the serial ports of the CommServerF (Communication Server Board object) that are
physically connected with the NEs managed with the Legacy protocol.
Warning. The command for the management of the serial ports of the CommServerS,
are pointed out into the Equipment window relevant to the CommServerS. Foe more
detailed information refer to the User Manual CommServerS Manager.
Legacy Workstation Port command manages the functional status of the serial
ports of the workstation/server that are physically connected with the NEs managed
with the Legacy protocol.

334
16.
16.1
SIAE COMMANDS
LINE TEST
System access
User profile

The Line Test command allows checking the effective reachability of the Network Elements
(NE) by the supervisory system.
The check consists of the request to a NE, executed by the NMS5UX system, concerning the
value of the chosen parameters: if the NE answers the test is correctly executed, on the contrary
it fails.
Warning. All the NEs, independently from their type or connection status, have been
programmed to answer to the test message. Then, the forwarding of the command does not
affect the connection or alarm status of the Network Element.
The choice of the Line Test command opens a menu that contains the following options:
D
Network Element, it executes the test for the selected Network Element or for the
selected NE group as pointed out at paragraph 16.1.1.
Container, it executes the test for all the NEs present into the selected Container
symbol or symbols as pointed out at paragraph 16.1.2.
16.1.1 Line Test Network Element

1.
Select the NE symbol or symbols for which the user wants to execute the test.
It is possible to select different kinds of NE, present into the same map window or into
different ones.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a Container,
Workstation or Communication Server Board symbol.
2.
Choose the Line Test Network Element command.

The system opens the LINE TEST command window.
Into the Command Scope area, the system points out all the selected NEs for which
it will be executed the operation . One record is devoted to each NE. Such a record
orderly points out the following information: logic address and type.
3.
If the user want to delete, from the Command Scope area, one or more NEs, it is
necessary to select the relevant records and to choose the Remove From List
pushbutton.
4.
It is possible to filter the NEs listed into the Command Scope area, according to the
type, activating (or deactivating) the boxes present into the Filter On Type area.
335
SIAE COMMANDS
16.
5.
Choose the Execute pushbutton.

The system display the additional LINE TEST command window that points out, for
each checked NE, the following information:
D
Address field, logic address.
Type field, NE type.
Status field, the result of the test. The wording:
OK points out that the test has been successfully executed.
FAILED! .... points out that the test is failed; the system points out, between
brackets, a message that specifies the cause of the failure.
During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Operation in progress) is
available the Stop pushbutton that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure 164.
The user can print the displayed information choosing the Print pushbutton.
16.1.2 Line Test Container

1.
Select the Container symbol or symbols that contain the NEs for which the user wants
to execute the test.
It is possible to select different kinds of Container symbols, present into the same map
window or into different ones.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a Network Element,
2.
Choose the Line Test Container command.

The system opens the LINE TEST command window.
The description of the window and of its using mode are the same ones pointed out
164.
If, for instance, it has been requested the execution of the operation for ten NEs, the system
forwards the command to the first NE, at the ned it will pass to the next one. If during the execution
of the command for the second NE, the user chooses the Stop pushbutton, the system will end
the operation on progress and then will stop the procedure. Then, the system will points out into
the list only the first two NEs.
336
16.
16.2
SIAE COMMANDS
CONNECT
System access
User profile

The Connect command activates the connection between the supervisory system and the NEs
165.
At the end of the procedure, if it has been successfully executed, the system will be able to
communicate with the NEs, will have get all the information relevant to the current status of
the alarms and to the configuration of the NEs themselves and will have forwarded to the
equipment the network time.
The connection request can be applied only for the selected NEs in disconnected or unreachable
status.
The choice of the Connect command opens a menu that contains the following options:
D
Network Element, it executes the connection of the selected NE or of the selected NE

group as pointed out at paragraph 16.2.1.
Container, it executes the connection of the NEs present into the selected Container
16.2.1 Connect Network Element

1.
Select the symbol or symbols of the Network Elements to be connected.

different ones.
2.
Choose the Connect Network Element command.

The system opens the CONNECT command window.
3.
165.
If the user wants to delete one or more NEs from the Command Scope area, he has
to select the relevant records and to choose the Remove From List pushbutton.
For the equipment managed with Legacy protocol, the system starts the polling cycle for the
acquiring of the alarms. For the equipment managed with SNMP protocol, the system starts the
reception of the traps (messages forwarded by the equipment to the supervisory system).
337
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
4.
It is possible to filter the NEs listed into the Command Scope area, according to the
type, activating (or deactivating) the boxes present into the Filter On Type area.
5.

Warning. The connection request will be forwarded only to the NEs present into the list
and in disconnected or unreachable status.
The system displays the additional CONNECT command window that, for each
connected NE, points out the following information:
D
Status field, the result of the operation. The wording:
OK, points out that the connection has been successfully executed; The NE
symbol changes its colour: from brown it can become green, light blue, yellow,
orange or red according to the seriousness level of the alarms present into
the NE.
FAILED!, points out that the connection is failed; the system points out,
between brackets, a message that specifies the cause of the failure.
The duration of the operation changes according to the number of the involved NEs.
16.2.2 Connect Container

1.
Select the Container symbol or symbols that contain the NEs to be connected.
2.
Choose the Connect Container command.

The system opens the CONNECT command window.
338
16.
16.3
SIAE COMMANDS
DISCONNECT
System access
User profile

The Disconnect command allows deactivating the connection between the supervisory system
and one or more the Network Elements (NE) 166.
After this operation the system does not manage longer (at least at the same time) the NEs
under examination.
The disconnection of a NE does not cause the deleting of the relevant information from the
database; such information remains stored and the operator, also if the Network Element is in
disconnected status, can open the relevant Equipment window (refer to paragraph 2.1.2).
The disconnection request can be applied only for the selected NEs in connected or unreachable
status.
The choice of the Disconnect command opens a menu that contains the following options:
D
Network Element, it executes the disconnection of the selected NE or of the selected

NE group as pointed out at paragraph 16.3.1.
Container, it executes the disconnection of the NEs present into the selected
Container symbol or symbols as pointed out at paragraph 16.3.2.
16.3.1 Disconnect Network Element

1.
Select the symbol or symbols of the Network Elements to be disconnected.

different ones.
2.
Choose the Disconnect Network Element command.

The system opens the DISCONNECT command window.
166.
For the equipment managed with Legacy protocol, the system stops the polling cycle for the
acquiring of the alarms. For the equipment managed with SNMP protocol, the system stops the
reception of the traps (messages spontaneously forwarded by the equipment to the supervisory
system).
339
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
3.
4.
It is possible to filter the NEs listed into the Command Scope according to the type,
activating (or deactivating) the boxes present into the Filter On Type area.
5.

Warning. The disconnection request will be forwarded only to the NEs present into the
list and in disconnected or unreachable status.
The system displays the additional DISCONNECT command window that, for each
disconnected NE, points out the following information:
D
OK, points out that the disconnection has been successfully executed; The
NE symbol switches its current colour to brown.
FAILED!, points out that the disconnection is failed; the system points out,
16.3.2 Disconnect Container

1.
Select the Container symbol or symbols that contain the NEs to be disconnected.
2.
Choose the Disconnect Container command.

The system displays the DISCONNECT command window.
340
16.
16.4
SIAE COMMANDS
SNMP FORCED NE DISCONNECT
System access
User profile

Warning. This option is available only for the equipment managed with SNMP protocol.
The SNMP Forced NE Disconnect option forces the software disconnection of the selected
equipment.
The software disconnection is realized when the NMS5UX system graphically positions the
equipment in disconnected status (icon with brown color), but it does not communicate such an
operation to the equipment itself.
The use of this command is necessary if the equipment remains graphically locked in
maintenance status (icon with pink color).
The procedure to force the software disconnection of an equipment is the following one:
1.
Select the symbol of the NE to be disconnected.

2.
Choose the SNMP Forced NE Disconnect command.

The system opens the FORCED DISCONNECT command window.
Into the Command Scope area, the system points out the selected NE (logic address
and type) for which it will be executed the operation.
3.

Warning. The disconnection request will be forwarded only if the NE is in disconnected
The system displays the additional FORCED DISCONNECT command window that,
for the disconnected NE, points out the following information:
D
OK, points out that the disconnection has been successfully executed; The
NE symbol switches its current colour to brown.
FAILED!, points out that the disconnection is failed; the system points out,
341
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
16.5
LEGACY RESET & CONNECT
System access
User profile

Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected one or more equipment
managed with Legacy protocol. For the equipment managed with SNMP protocol, the
forwarding of the command under examination is not available because it would be
equal to the forwarding of the Connect command.
Then, the subject option is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
The Legacy Reset & Connect command allows resetting the information, stored into the
database of the NMS5UX system, relevant to the configuration of the Network Elements (NE)
and then activating the connection between the system and the NEs themselves.
At the end of the procedure, if it has been successfully executed, the system will be able to
communicate with the NEs as after a normal connection procedure; it will have get all the
information relevant to the configuration and to the functional status of the NEs then the NEs
themselves will be automatically inserted into the polling cycle.
Warning. This command has to be selected only in extreme cases, when the user supposes
that it is present a misalignment situation between the alarm information known by the
supervisory system and the real situation present into the NEs. The duration of the reset and
connection operation is usually longer than the one of a normal connection because the entire
configuration of the NE is transferred from the peripheral part to the supervisory centre.
The command forwarding can be applied only for the selected NEs in disconnected or
unreachable status.
The choice of the Legacy Reset & Connect command opens a menu that contains the
following options:
D
Network Element, it executes the reset and the connection of the selected NE or of
the selected NE group as pointed out at paragraph 16.5.1.
Container, it executes the reset and the connection of the NEs present into the
selected Container symbol or symbols as pointed out at paragraph 16.5.2.
16.5.1 LegacyReset & Connect Network Element

1.
Select the symbol or symbols of the desired Network Elements.

different ones.
342
16.
SIAE COMMANDS

2.
Choose the LegacyReset & Connect Network Element command.

The system opens the RESET & CONNECT command window.
3.
4.
5.

Warning. The reset and connection request will be forwarded only to the NEs present
into the list and in disconnected or unreachable status.
The system displays the additional RESET & CONNECT command window that, for
each NE, points out the following information:
D
OK, points out that the operation has been successfully executed.
FAILED!, points out that the operation is failed; the system points out,
16.5.2 LegacyReset & Connect Container

1.
Select the Container symbol or symbols that contain the NEs to be reset and
connected.
2.
Choose the LegacyReset & Connect Container command.

The system displays the RESET & CONNECT command window.
343
SIAE COMMANDS
16.
16.6
ALARM REALIGNMENT
System access
User profile

The Alarm Realignment command forces a Network Element or a group of NEs, to forward
to the supervisory system its own current alarms.
Warning. This command has to be selected only when the user supposes that it is present a
misalignment situation between the alarm information known by the NMS5UX system and the
real alarm situation present into the NE. In fact, the command under examination does not
represent the normal procedure to get the functional status of a NE.
The realignment procedure forces the system to delete the information, present into the
current alarms table, relevant to the NEs involved in the operation. Then, the system requires
to the NEs the status of their alarms and stores them into the current alarms table 167.
The realignment request of the alarms can be applied only to the selected NEs in connected
status. This operation does not affect the connection status of the NE or its configuration.
The choice of the Alarm Realignment command opens a menu that contains the following
options:
D
Network Element, it executes the realignment of the alarms for the selected NE or
for the selected NE group as pointed out at paragraph 16.6.1.
Container, it executes the realignment of the alarms for the NEs present into the
selected Container symbol or symbols as pointed out at paragraph 16.6.2.
16.6.1 Alarm Realignment Network Element

1.

different ones.
2.
Choose the Alarm Realignment Network Element command.

The system opens the ALARM REALIGNMENT command window.
167.
The contents of the current alarms table can be displayed opening the Current Alarms Browser
window (refer to paragraph 12.2).
344
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
3.
4.
5.

Warning. The realignment request will be forwarded only to the NEs present into the
list and in connected status.
The system displays the additional ALARM REALIGNMENT command window that,
for each disconnected NE, points out the following information:
D
16.6.2 Alarm Realignment Container

1.
to execute the alarm realignment.
2.
Choose the Alarm Realignment Container pushbutton.

The system displays the ALARM REALIGNMENT command window.
345
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
16.7
CONFIGURATION UPLOAD
System access
User profile

The Configuration Upload command forces a Network Element or a group of NEs, to forward
to the supervisory system its own configuration and its own current alarms.
Warning. This command has to be selected only when the user supposes that it is present a
misalignment situation between the alarm information known by the NMS5UX system and the
real configuration and functional status of the NE. In fact, the command under examination does
not represent the normal procedure to get the information relevant to a NE.
The execution mode of the subject procedure is the same one described for the alarm
realignment procedure (refer to paragraph 16.6), the only difference is that the system, in this
case, requires to the NE the status of the alarms and also the configuration parameters.
The request for the configuration acquiring can be applied only to the selected NEs in connected
status. This operation does not affect the connection status of the NE.
Warning. If the Configuration Upload command fails, the equipment switches to the unreachable
status and the system points out the operation failure into the Equipment window of the NE under
examination and into the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window (refer to paragraph 14.1.1).
The choice of the Configuration Upload command opens a menu that contains the following
options:
D
Network Element, it acquires the configuration of the selected NE or of the selected

NE group as pointed out at paragraph 16.7.1.
Container, it acquires the configuration of the NEs present into the selected Container
16.7.1 Configuration Upload Network Element

1.

different ones.
2.
346
Choose the Configuration Upload Network Element command.
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
The system opens the UPLOAD command window.

3.
4.
5.

Warning. The acquisition request will be forwarded only to the NEs present into the list
and in connected status.
The system displays the additional UPLOAD command window that, for each NE,
points out the following information:
D
16.7.2 Configuration Upload Container

1.
to acquire the configuration.
2.
Choose the Configuration Upload Container command.

The system displays the UPLOAD command window.
347
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
16.8
SNMP CONFIGURATION DOWNLOAD
System access
User profile

The SNMP Configuration Download command allows transferring the configuration of a

Network Element (real or virtual) to another NE (real or virtual) of the same type.
Warning. This command is available only for the equipment managed with SNMP protocol,
At the command choice, the system displays the Configuration Download window shown in
Fig. 16.1.
operations:
348
To transfer the configuration of a Network Element (virtual or real) to one or more real
NEs (refer to Download Configuration command at paragraph 16.8.1.2).
To transfer the configuration of a Network Element (virtual or real) to one or more virtual
NEs (refer to Copy Configuration command at paragraph 16.8.1.2).
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
Menu bar (1)

List of the main
configuration
parameters of
the NE selected
into the map
window (2)
In this area, the

system points out
the operations on
progress by means
of messages
List of the NEs (real and/or virtual)
present into the map with the
same characteristics (type and
values of the configuration
parameters) of the selected NE,
from which it is possible to take the
configuration to be transferred (3)
List of the NEs (real or virtual

(4)) present into the map with
the same characteristics (type
and values of the configuration
parameters) of the selected
NE, to which it is possible to
transfer the configuration (5)
(1) For the description of the menus and of the relevant commands refer to paragraph
16.8.1.
(2) The configuration parameters changes according to the change of the selected NE
type. Their description is reported into the equipment User Manual relevant to the
NE type under examination (refer to paragraph 1.3.3).
(3) Into the list, it is possible to display, at the same time, the real and virtual NEs. For
the first ones, it is necessary to activate the Real Equipment box, for the second
ones the Virtual Equipment box.
(4) Into the list, it is possible to display only the real NEs or only the virtual NEs . To
display the real ones, it is necessary to select the Real Equipment (download)
pushbutton, to display the virtual ones, the Virtual Equipment (copy) pushbutton.
(5) Into the list, it will not be present the NE (real or virtual) selected into the Source area
because the NE from which it is taken up the configuration to be transferred is
automatically excluded from the list of the NEs to which such a configuration can
be transferred.
Fig. 16.1
349
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
16.8.1 Configuration Download window Menu bar

Into the menu bar of the Configuration Download window, there are the menus and the
16.8.1.1 File Menu

"
16.8.1.2 Command Menu

"
Download Configuration. It transfers the configuration of the NE (real or virtual) selected

into the Source area to the real NE or to the real NE group selected into the Destination area.
The procedure to execute the operation is the following one:
a.
Into the map window, select the Network Element having the type and the
configuration parameters that correspond to the characteristics NE desired for the
configuration transfer.
b.
Choose the Configuration Download command.

The system opens the Configuration Download window (refer to Fig. 16.1).
c.
Into the Source area, select the NE (real or virtual) with the configuration to be
transferred.
d.
Into the Destination area, activate the Real Equipment (download) option
pushbutton.
e.
Select the Attribute Selection pushbutton to define the configuration

parameters to be transferred.
The system displays the View Download Parameter window.
Into the Group area, the system displays the logic groups that compose the
configuration parameters of the equipment type under examination.
Into the Attributes area, the system displays the attributes relevant to the selected
group into the Group area.
Each group and parameter is characterised by means of a control box.
If the box is activated, it points out that the group/parameter will be transferred
during the download. If the box is not activated, it points out that the
group/parameter will not be transferred during the download.
f.
350
Deactivate the control boxes relevant to the groups/parameters that have not to
be transferred.
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
Warning. The deactivation of a group is a priority action with respect to the setting
of its own parameters. For instance, if the user deactivates the A group, at the
transfer of the configuration, the system will not transfer the values of the
parameters coupled with the A group, also if the box relevant to the single
parameters is activated.
To activate all the boxes at the same time, select the Select all option. To
deactivate all the boxes at the same time, select the Deselect all option.
g.
Select, from the list, the NE or the NE group to which the user wants to transfer
the configuration.
h.
Select the Command Download Configuration command.

i.

Into the Messages area, the system points out the starting and stopping time of
the operation, by means of messages.
"
Copy Configuration. It transfers the configuration of the NE (real or virtual) selected into
the Source area to the virtual NE or to the virtual NE group selected into the Destination
area.
The procedure to execute the operation is the following one:
a.
Into the map window, select the Network Element having the type and the
configuration parameters that correspond to the characteristics NE desired for the
configuration transfer.
b.
Choose the Configuration Download command.

The system opens the Configuration Download window (refer to Fig. 16.1).
c.
Into the Source area, select the NE (real or virtual) with the configuration to be
transferred.
d.
Into the Destination area, activate the Virtual Equipment (copy) option
pushbutton.
e.
Select, from the list, the NE or the NE group to which the user wants to transfer
the configuration.
f.
From the menu bar, select the Command Copy Configuration command.
g.

Into the Messages area, the system points out the starting and stopping time of
the operation, by means of messages.

"
into the window.
351
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
16.9
COMMUNICATION SERVER BOARD
System access
User profile

The Communication Server Board command allows activating and deactivating the
connection between the supervisory system and the CommServerForce and CommServerS
equipment (Communication Server Board CSB objects).
D
Connect, it activates the connection of the selected CSB or of the selected CSB group
as pointed out at paragraph 16.9.1.
Disconnect, it deactivates the connection of the selected CSB or of the selected CSB
group as pointed out at paragraph 16.9.2.
16.9.1 Communication Server Board Connect

1.
Select the CSB symbol or symbols to be connected.

It is possible to select symbols present into the same map window or into different ones.
2.
Choose the Communication Server Board Connect command.

Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a symbol different from
a CSB one.
The system opens the CONNECT BOARD command window.
Into the Command Scope area, the system points out all the selected CSBs for which
it will be executed the operation. One record is devoted to each CSB. Such a record
orderly points out the following information: IP address and name.
3.
If the user wants to delete one or more CSBs from the Command Scope area, he has
4.

Warning. The connection request will be forwarded only to the CBSs present into the
list and in disconnected status.
The system displays the additional CONNECT BOARD command window that, for
each connected CSB, points out the following information:
D
CS Board Address field, IP address of the CSB.
CS Name field, CSB name.
352
OK, points out that the operation has been successfully executed, the CSB
symbol changes its colour from brown to green.
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
FAILED! ...., points out that the operation is failed; the system points out,
During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Working) is available the
Stop pushbutton that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure.
16.9.2 Communication Server Board Disconnect

Warning. It is not possible to disconnect a CSB if into the relevant map window there is at least
one CSB Port symbol in open status. In this case, the user has to close before the port (refer
to paragraph 16.12.3) and then to disconnect the CSB.
1.
Select the CSB symbol or symbols to be disconnected.

It is possible to select symbols present into the same map window or into different ones.
2.
Choose the Communication Server Board Disconnect command.

Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a symbol different from
a CSB one.
The system opens the DISCONNECT BOARD command window.
Into the Command Scope area, the system points out all the selected CSBs for which
it will be executed the operation . One record is devoted to each CSB. Such a record
orderly points out the following information: IP address and name.
3.
If the user wants to delete one or more CSBs from the Command Scope area, he has
to select the relevant records and to choose the Remove From List command.
4.

Warning. The disconnection request will be forwarded only to the CBSs present into
the list and in connected or unreachable status.
The system displays the additional DISCONNECT BOARD command window that, for
each disconnected CSB, points out the following information:
D
CS Board Address field, IP address of the CSB.
CS Name field, CSB name.
OK, points out that the operation has been successfully executed, the CSB
symbol changes its colour from green to brown.
353
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
16.10 LEGACY WORKSTATION

System access
User profile

The Legacy Workstation command allows activating and deactivating the connection
between the supervisory system and the workstation/server (Workstation WS object).
D
Connect, it activates the connection of the WS of of the selected WS group, as pointed

out at paragraph 16.10.1.
Disconnect, it deactivates the connection of the WS of of the selected WS group, as

pointed out at paragraph 16.10.2.
16.10.1 LegacyWorkstation Connect

1.
Select the symbol of the symbols of the WS to be connected.

It is possible to select the symbols present into the same map window or into different
map windows.
2.
Choose the LegacyWorkstation Connect command.

Warning. This command is not available, if it has been selected a symbol different from
the WS one.
The system opens the CONNECT WORKSTATION command window.
Into the Command Scope area, the system points out all the selected WSs for which
it will be executed the operation. To each WS, it is devoted a record that ordinately
points out: IP address and name.
3.
If the user wants to delete from the Command Scope area, one or more WSs, he has
4.

Warning. The connection request will be forwarded only to the WSs present into the
list and in connected status.
The system display the additional CONNECT WORKSTATION command window
that, for each connected WS, points out the following information:
354
16.
WS Address field, IP address of the WS.
WS Name field, WS name.
SIAE COMMANDS
OK, points out that the operation has been successfully executed, the WS
symbol changes its colour from brown to green.
16.10.2 LegacyWorkstation Disconnect

Warning. It is not possible to disconnect a WS if into the relevant map window there is at least
one WS Port symbol in open status. In this case, the user has to close before the port (refer to
paragraph 16.12.3) and then to disconnect the WS.
1.
Select the symbol of the symbols of the WS to be connected.

It is possible to select the symbols present into the same map window or into different
map windows.
2.
Choose the LegacyWorkstation Disconnect command.

Warning. This command is not available, if it has been selected a symbol different from
the WS one.
The system opens the DISCONNECT WORKSTATION command window.
Into the Command Scope area, the system points out all the selected WSs for which
it will be executed the operation. To each WS, it is devoted a record that ordinately
points out: IP address and name.
3.
If the user wants to delete from the Command Scope area, one or more WSs, he has
4.

Warning. The connection request will be forwarded only to the WSs present into the
list and in connected or unreachable status.
The system display the additional DISCONNECT WORKSTATION command window
that, for each disconnected WS, points out the following information:
D
WS Address field, IP address of the WS.
WS Name field, WS name.
355
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
OK, points out that the operation has been successfully executed, the WS
symbol changes its colour from green to brown.
356
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
16.11 LEGACY COMMUNICATION SERVER PORT

System access
User profile

The Legacy Communication Server Port command allows managing the functional status
of the serial ports (CSB Port objects) of the CommServerF (Communication Server Board
CSB object) that are physically connected to the Network Elements managed with the Legacy
protocol.
Warning. The commands for the management of the serial ports (CSB Port objects) of the
CommServerS (CSB object), are present into the Equipment window relevant to the
CommServerS 168.
The choice of the Legacy Communication Server Port command opens a menu that
contains the following options:
D
Open, it activates the management processes of the serial port as pointed out at
paragraph 16.11.1. This operation is usually called to open the port.
View, it displays the values of the configuration parameters relevant to the port in open
status, selected as pointed out at paragraph 16.11.2.
Close, it deactivates the management processes of the serial port as pointed out at
paragraph 16.11.3. This operation is usually called to close the port.
16.11.1 LegacyCommunication Server Port Open

Warning. It is not possible to open a CSB Port if before it has not been executed the connection
procedure of the relevant CSB object (refer to paragraph 16.9.1).
1.
Open the CSB map window that contains the CSB Port symbol in close status to be
opened and select such a symbol.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected an object different from
a CSB Port in close status (symbol with blue colour) or two or more CSB Port objects.
2.
Choose the LegacyCommunication Server Port Open command.

The system opens the Set Port Attributes window that points out the following
parameters:
168.
For more detailled information refer to the equipment Manual: CommServerS Manager.
357
SIAE COMMANDS
16.
Board Address. IP address of the CSB.

This parameter can not be changed.
Port Number. Port number.

Line Speed. Transmission rate of the serial port.

The default value is 19.200. The user can change it choosing a different value
between the ones available into the option menu.
Retry Timeout (sec.). The time range that the system has to wait before retrying
the new forwarding of a message that has not had an answer.
The default value is 10 169. The user can change it moving the cursor in the scroll
bar; the new value is pointed out over the bar.
Retry Number. The number of times that the supervisory system has to repeat the
message before to detect as an error the absence of the dialogue with the
peripheral unit.
Polling Delay (sec.). The time range that passes between the query of an
equipment and the query of the next one.
Warning. The parameter is managed by the edition 2.0 of the CommServerF
(refer to paragraph 9.2.5). For the preceding versions, this parameter has the
value 0 (disabled parameter).
3.
Choose the OK pushbutton,

The status of the port switches from close (CSB Port icon with blue colour) to open
(CSB Port icon with green colour).
16.11.2 LegacyCommunication Server Port View

1.
Open the CSB map window that contains the CSB Port symbol in open status for which
the user wants to displays the relevant parameters and select such a symbol.
a CSB Port in open status (symbol with green colour) or two or more CSB Port objects.
2.
Choose the LegacyCommunication Server Port View command.

The system opens the Set Port Attributes window that points out the value of the
following parameters set during the opening procedure of the port: Board Address,
169.
358
The default value can be modified by superuser (see manual NMS5UX System Administrator).
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
Port Number, Line Speed, Retry Timeout (sec.), Retry Number, Polling Delay (sec.).
The description of such parameters is reported at paragraph 16.11.1.
It is not possible to change the values of the above mentioned parameters. If it is
necessary to change them, the user has to close and then to open again the port under
examination, assigning to the parameters the desired values.
16.11.3 LegacyCommunication Server Port Close

Warning. It is not possible to close a CSB Port if also only one of the NEs, locally or remotely
connected to the port under examination, is in connected status.
1.
Open the CSB map window that contains the CSB Port symbol in open status to be
closed and select such a symbol.
a CSB Port in open status (symbol with green colour) or two or more CSB Port objects.
2.
Choose the LegacyCommunication Server Port Close command.

3.

The status of the port switches from open (CSB Port icon with green colour) to close
(CSB Port icon with blue colour).
359
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
16.12 LEGACY WORKSTATION PORT

System access
User profile

The Legacy Workstation Port command allows managing the functional status of the serial
ports (WS Port objects) of the workstation/server (Workstation WS object) that are physically
connected with the Network Elements managed with Legacy protocol.
Warning. To let a serial port of a workstation to be used by the supervisory system, such a port
has to be described before into the description of the serial ports file. For more detailed
information refer to the manual NM5UX Administrator manual.
The choice of the Legacy Workstation Port command opens a menu that contains the
following options:
D
Open, it activates the management processes of the serial port as pointed out at
paragraph 16.12.1. This operation is usually called to open the port.
The number of the WS Ports that can be opened depends on the number of the serial
interfaces, equipped with the workstation, set at the creation of the WS object (refer
View, it displays the values of the configuration parameters relevant to the port in open
status, selected as pointed out at paragraph 16.12.2.
Close, it deactivates the management processes of the serial port as pointed out at
paragraph 16.12.3. This operation is usually called to close the port.
16.12.1 LegacyWorkstation Port Open

Warning. It is not possible to open a WS Port if before it has not been executed the connection
procedure of the relevant WS object (refer to paragraph 16.10.1).
1.
Open the WS map window that contains the WS Port symbol in close status to be
opened and select such a symbol.
a WS Port in close status (symbol with blue colour) or two or more WS Port objects.
2.
Choose the LegacyWorkstation Port Open command.

The system opens the Set Workstation Port Attributes window that points out the
following parameters:
360
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
Workstation Address. IP address of the workstation.

Port Number. Port number

Line Speed. Transmission rate of the serial port.

The default value is 19.200. The user can change it choosing a different value
between the ones available into the option menu.
Retry Timeout (sec.). The time range that the system has to wait before retrying
the new forwarding of a message that has not had an answer.
Retry Number. The number of times that the supervisory system has to repeat the
message before to detect as an error the absence of the dialogue with the
peripheral unit.
3.
Port Info. Parameter not available

The status of the port switches from close (WS Port icon with blue colour) to open (WS
Port icon with green colour).
16.12.2 LegacyWorkstation Port View

1.
Open the WS map window that contains the WS Port symbol in open status for which
the user wants to displays the relevant parameters and select such a symbol.
a WS Port in open status (symbol with green colour) or two or more WS Port objects.
2.
Choose the LegacyWorkstation Port View command.

The system opens the Set Workstation Port Attributes window that points out the value
of the following parameters set during the opening procedure of the port: Board
Address, Port Number, Line Speed, Retry Timeout (sec.), Retry Number. The
description of such parameters is reported at paragraph 16.12.1.
It is not possible to change the values of the above mentioned parameters. If it is
necessary to change them, the user has to close and then to open again the port under
examination, assigning to the parameters the desired values.
361
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
16.12.3 LegacyWorkstation Port Close

Warning. It is not possible to close a WS Port if also only one of the NEs, locally or remotely
connected to the port under examination, is in connected status.
1.
Open the WS map window that contains the WS Port symbol in open status to be
closed and select such a symbol.
a WS Port in open status (symbol with green colour) or two or more WS Port objects.
2.
Choose the LegacyWorkstation Port Close command.

3.

The status of the port switches from open (WS Port icon with green colour) to close
(WS Port icon with blue colour).
362
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
16.13 SNMP EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER RESET

System access
User profile

The SNMP Equipment Controller Reset option executes the software restarting of the
selected equipment.
This operation consists of the new initialization of all the communication channels
equipment.
170
of the
Warning. Its execution causes a temporary disconnection of the equipment from the supervisory
system.
The system points out the end of the operation through a message concerning the result of the
operation itself.
170.
For instance, with the NMS5UX system.
363
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
16.14 PMP CLEAR ALARM TABLE

System access
User profile

Superuser
Warning. This option is available only if it has been selected a PMP type NE.
The PMP Clear Alarm Table option allows transferring, to the selected PMP equipment, the
default table of the alarms memorised into the server/workstation over which it has been
installed its own NMS5UX system 171.
The system points out the end of the operation through a message concerning the result of the
operation itself.
171.
The files that contain the default alarm tables (relevant to each type of NE managed by the system)
are copied on the server/workstation during the installation of the supervisory system.
364
17
17.
NMS6UX
The NMS6UX menu is an optional menu. It is present, in the map window (also in the Root
window), ONLY if installed the NMS6UX software module 172.
Warning. The description of the commands present in the menu is reported in the NMS6UX user
manual.
172.
Software module realized by Siae Microelettronica for the contemporay management of more
NMS5UX systems.
The module integrates into a NMS5UX system (menu NMS6UX) from which the other NMS5UX
systems are managed.
365
17.
366
NMS6UX
18
18.
HELP
The Help menu contains the following commands:

D
NMS5UX, contains the options to open the online manuals of the supervisory system.
About NMS5UX, displays the list of the software programs that constitutes the
NMS5UX software package.

367
18.
HELP
18.1
NMS5UX
System access
User profile

The NMS5UX menu contains the options to open the online manuals of the supervisory
system.
Warning. The list of the available manuals changes according to the type of equipment that ban
be managed by its own NMS5UX system.
The System Administrator manual is available for the superuser user only.
To display a manual, select the option relevant to the title of the desired manual.
By means of the Acrobat Reader browser, the system automatically opens the desired manual.
To surf inside the manual, display the bookmarks (Show Bookmarks option 173) in Acrobat
Reader and select the desired option into the list of the contents.
173.
368
The pointed out command refers to the program version in English.
18.
18.2
HELP
ABOUT NMS5UX
System access
User profile

Superuser
The About NMS5UX command displays the list of the programs that constitute the NMS5UX
software package.
At the selection of the command, the system displays the NMS5UX Version window composed
by a table that lists the programs and by a bar relevant to the menus described into the following
paragraphs.
operations:
D
To print the data present into the window (refer to paragraph 18.2.2.1).
To display the details of the word queues relevant to its own supervisory system (refer
18.2.1 NMS5UX Version Window Program list

Into the tables relevant to each program, it is present a devoted record that reports the following
information:
"
Program. Program name.
"
Version. Program version.
"
Dimension. Program dimensions expressed through byte.
"
Date. Issuing date of the program.
"
Path. Program path on the server/workstation.
18.2.2 NMS5UX Version Window Menu bar

Into the menu bar of the NMS5UX Version window, there are the menus and the commands
369
18.
HELP
18.2.2.1
File Menu
"
Print. It prints the content of the widow on the default printer.
"
18.2.2.2
"
Option Menu
Code Word. It displays the detail of the word queues relevant to its own supervisory
system.
The selection of the command opens the CodeWord window that points out the following
information:
User number, maximum number of NMS5UX users that can open the NMS5UX
graphical interface (using the same map or different maps).
Check number, number of version of the word queues present on its own NMS5UX
system.
Equipment max number, maximum number of equipment that can be managed

at the same time by by NMS5UX system.
Expired date, it points out the possible expiring date of the word queues.
The wording Definitively points out that the word queues do not have an expiring
date
Server code, code of the server/workstation.
Type equipment, types of the Siae equipment managed by its own NMS5UX
system.
18.2.2.3
"
370
Command Menu
Check Legacy Processes. It allows ending possible commands, relevant only to the
equipment managed with Legacy protocol, that have remained appended.
Section
Appendix
371
372
19
19.
RESUMING TABLE OF THE SIAE

COMMANDS
Tab. 19.1 points out the commands available into the Siae World map window and into all the
map windows of the NMS5UX system, relevant only to the features provided by the supervisory
system of Siae microelettronica.
Such commands are pointed out by the wording SIAE written before the command name.
All the menus and the commands that are not specific ones of the NMS5UX system but on the
contrary are general ones of the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform, are not
pointed out into the table and are not described into the subject manual.
For the description of such commands, refer to the specific documentation.
Warning. Some commands, present into Tab. 19.1, are optional ones. Then, such commands
can be absent into the specific menu of its own NMS5UX system.
373
19.
RESUMING TABLE OF THE SIAE COMMANDS
Tab. 19.1 Menus and commands Siae Siae World
Menus
Map SIAE Map
Commands
Import/Export
Change Map
Edit
SIAE Objects
Add
Container
Network Element
SNMP Managed
SNMP Managed (Virtual)
(1)
(Virtual) (1)
Radio Link for Scoreboards (2)

Legacy Workstation (1)
Modify/View
Container
Network Element
Delete
Container
Network Element
Arrange Symbol
Horizontal Alignment
Vertical Alignment
Map Realignment
Generate Info for WEB (2)
Performance
SIAE Performance
Performance Monitoring Read

Performance Monitoring
Old Performance Monitoring
Export Performance Monitoring
View/Modify P.M. Status
Configuration
SIAE Objects
374
Equipment Info
19.
Menus
Configuration
SIAE Objects
Commands
Radio Certificate
Legacy Hw/Sw Edition Inventory (1)
Legacy Physical Unit Inventory (1)
SNMP Software Inventory
Legacy Alarm Average (1)
Fault
SIAE Logs
Network Alarm History

Network Current Alarms
Old Alarm History
NE Alarm History
NE Current Alarms
SNMP NE History Log
Alarm Summary
Nms5ux Statistics
Transaction Log
NMS5UX Inspect (2)
Options
SIAE Options
Legacy Network Alarm Hysteresis (1)

SNMP Network Severity Code
SNMP Equipment Severity Code
NMS5UX System Users
NMS5UX Logged Users
SNMP LCT Equipment Users
SNMP LCT Logged Users
SNMP NE Remote Element Table
SNMP NE Sw/Fw Download
SNMP Scheduled Sw Dwl Status
SNMP NE Sw/Fw Release
Legacy NE Sw/Fw Download (1)
Legacy Scheduled Sw Dwl Status (1)
HW Inventory
Locate
SIAE Elements
Equipment List/Locate
Proxy Equipment List (2)
Equipment Find
Misc
SIAE Tools
Alarm History Backup

Alarm History Restore
375
19.
Menus
Commands
Alarm History Delete Backup
Pm Backup
Misc
SIAE Tools
Pm Restore
Pm Delete
PDHSDH Radio
Scoreboards (2)
Scoreboards Creator (2)

Scoreboards Viewer (2)
PDHSDH Radio Link Browser (2)

Map Manager Status
SNMP Command Executor
Database Backup
Database Restore
SIAE Commands
Line Test
Network Element
Container
Connect
Network Element
Container
Disconnect
Network Element
Container
SNMP Forced NE Disconnect

Legacy Reset & Connect Network Element (1)
(1)
Container (1)
Alarm Realignment
Network Element
Container
Configuration Upload
Network Element
Container
SNMP Configuration Download

Board
Connect
Connect (1)
Disconnect
Disconnect (1)
Legacy Communication Open (1)
Server Port (1)
Legacy Communication View (1)
Server Port (1)
Close (1)
Legacy Workstation Port Open (1)
(1)
376
19.
Menus
Commands
(1)
View (1)
Close (1)
SIAE Commands
SNMP Equipment Controller Reset

PMP Clear Alarm Table
NMS6UX (2)
Warning. The description of the commands present in the subject menu is reported
in the NMS6UX user manual.
Help
NMS5UX
Warning. the list of the availeble online manuals

changes according to the equipment type that can
by managed by your own NMS5UX system.
About NMS5UX
(1) Menu/option present only if the software modules for the management of the Legacy
(2) OPTIONAL menu/command.
377
19.
378
20
20.
AVAILABILITY OF THE SIAE

COMMANDS
The SIAE menu and commands, present into the Siae World map window and into all the map
windows of the NMS5UX system, are not always available for the user.
Their availability depends on the profile of the NMS5UX user (Superuser, Privileged, etc.) who
has opened the map and on the access type to the map (Read Only or Read Write).
In Tab. 20.1, the system points out the SIAE commands. For each command, it is pointed out
the operating level and the access type to the map necessary to be able to use it.
With details, into the column:
D
Map, the wording:
RO/RW, points out that the command is available as into the map with Read Only
access as into the map with Read Write one.
RW, points out that the command is available only into the map with Read Write
access.
User, the wording:
S, points out that the command is available for the user with Superuser level.
P, points out that the command is available for the user with Privileged level.
A, points out that the command is available for the user with Advanced level.
N, points out that the command is available for the user with Normal level.
E, points out that the command is available for the user with Entry level.
Warning. Some commands, present into Tab. 20.1, are optional ones. Then, it is possible that
such commands are not present into the specific menu of its own NMS5UX system.
379
20.
AVAILABILITY OF THE SIAE COMMANDS
Tab. 20.1 Availability of the commands Siae Siae World

Menu/command
Map
User
Map SIAE Map

Import/Export
RO/RW
SPA
Change Map
RO/RW
SP
RW
SPA
RO (3)
RW (4)
N E (3)
S P A (4)
RW
SPA
RW
SPANE
Map Realignment
RW
SP
Generate Info for WEB
RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPAN
Equipment Info
RO/RW
S P A N E (5)
Radio Certificate
RO/RW
S P A N E (6)
LegacyHw/Sw Edition Inventory (1)
RO/RW
SPANE
LegacyPhysical Unit Inventory (1)
RO/RW
SPANE
Edit SIAE Objects

Add Container
Add Network Element SNMP Managed
Add Network Element SNMP Managed (Virtual)
Add Network Element Legacy Prototocol Managed (1)
Add Network Element Legacy Prototocol Managed (Virtual) (1)
Add Radio Link for Scoreboards (2)
Add LegacyWorkstation (1)
Add Communication Server Board
Modify/View Container
Modify/View Network Element
Modify/View Radio Link for Scoreboards (2)
Modify/View LegacyWorkstation (1)
Modify/View Communication Server Board
Delete Container
Delete Network Element
Delete Radio Link for Scoreboards (2)
Delete LegacyWorkstation (1)
Delete Communication Server Board
Arrange Symbol Horizontal Alignment
Arrange Symbol Vertical Alignment
Performance SIAE Performance
Configuration SIAE Objects
380
20.
Menu/command
Map
User
RO/RW
S P A N E (7)
LegacyAlarm Average (1)
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
S P A N E (8)
RO/RW
SPANE
Old Alarm History
RO/RW
SPANE
NE Alarm History
RO/RW
S P A N E (8)
NE Current Alarms
RO/RW
SPANE
SNMPNE History Log
RO/RW
S P A N E (9)
Alarm Summary
RO/RW
SPANE
Nms5ux Statistics
RO/RW
SPANE
Transaction Log
RO/RW
S P A N E (10)
(11)
NMS5UX Inspect (2)
RO/RW
LegacyNetwork Alarm Hysteresis (1)
RO/RW
SNMPNetwork Severity Code
RO/RW
SNMPEquipment Severity Code
RO/RW
SPAN
NMS5UX System Users
RO/RW
S P A N E (12)
NMS5UX Logged Users
RO/RW
S P A N E (13)
SNMPLCT Equipment Users
RO/RW
SP
SNMPLCT Logged Users
RO/RW
S P A N E (14)
SNMPNE Remote Element Table
RO/RW
S P A N E (15)
SNMPNE Sw/Fw Download
RO/RW
SPAN
SNMPScheduled Sw Dwl Status
RO/RW
SPAN
SNMPNE Sw/Fw Release
RO/RW
SPAN
LegacyNE Sw/Fw Download (1)
RO/RW
SPAN
LegacyScheduled Sw Dwl Status (1)
RO/RW
SPAN
HW Inventory
RO/RW
SPAN
RO/RW
S P A N E (16)
RO/RW
SPANE
Equipment Find
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPA
RO/RW
SP
RO/RW
SP
Pm Backup
RO/RW
S P A (17)
Pm Restore
RO/RW
SP
Pm Delete
RO/RW
SP
Fault SIAE Logs
Options SIAE Options
Locate SIAE Elements
Misc SIAE Tools
381
20.
Menu/command
Map
User
PDHSDH Radio Scoreboards Scoreboards Creator (2)
RO/RW
PDHSDH Radio Scoreboards Scoreboards Viewer (2)
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
Map Manager Status
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPA
Database Backup
RO/RW
Database Restore
RO/RW
Line Test Network Element
RO/RW
SPANE
Line Test Container
RO/RW
SPANE
Connect Network Element
RO/RW
SPANE
Connect Container
RO/RW
SPANE
Disconnect Network Element
RO/RW
SPANE
Disconnect Container
RO/RW
SPANE
SNMPForced NE Disconnect
RO/RW
SPAN
LegacyReset&Connect Network Element (1)
RO/RW
SPANE
LegacyReset&Connect Container (1)
RO/RW
SPANE
Alarm Realignment Network Element
RO/RW
SPANE
Alarm Realignment Container
RO/RW
SPANE
Configuration Upload Network Element
RO/RW
SPANE
Configuration Upload Container
RO/RW
SPANE
SNMPConfiguration Download
RO/RW
SPAN
Communication Server Board Connect
RO/RW
SPANE
Communication Server Board Disconnect
RO/RW
SPANE
LegacyWorkstation Connect (1)
RO/RW
SPANE
LegacyWorkstation Disconnect (1)
RO/RW
SPANE
LegacyCommunication Server Port Open (1)
RO/RW
SPANE
LegacyCommunication Server Port View (1)
RO/RW
SPANE
LegacyCommunication Server Port Close (1)
RO/RW
SPANE
LegacyWorkstation Port Open (1)
RO/RW
SPANE
LegacyWorkstation Port View (1)
RO/RW
SPANE
LegacyWorkstation Port Close (1)
RO/RW
SPANE
SNMPEquipment Controller Reset
RO/RW
SPAN
PMPClear Alarm Table
RO/RW
RO/RW
SPANE
NMS5UX
RO/RW
SPANE
About NMS5UX
RO/RW
SIAE Commands
NMS6UX
NMS6UX (2)
Help
382
20.
Notes
(2)
OPTIONAL menu/command.
(3)
For the subject user profile/map access, it is possible only to check the data (View
command).
(4)
For the subject user profile/map access, it is possible as to check as to change the data
(View and Modify command).
(5)
Only the user with Privileged and Superuser profile can save the information on file.
(6)
For the Normal and Entry user profiles, it is not available the Save command.
(7)
For the Entry user profile, it is not available the ActionBench Switch command.
(8)
For the Normal and Entry user profiles, it is not possible to delete and to mark the records
(ActionDelete and ActionAcknowledge commands).
(9)
For the Entry user profile, it is possible to check the data.
(10) For the Normal and Entry user profiles, it is not available the ActionDelete Records
command.
(11) For the profile:
Superuser, the operations listed into the window refer to all the users of all the
maps managed by the NMS5UX system
Privileged and Advanced, the operations refer only to the users of its own map
(12) For the Privileged, Advanced, Normal and Entry user profiles, it is possible only to change
their own passwords.
(13) The ActionForce Logout and ActionForced Exit commands are available only for the
user with Superuser profile.
(14) For the Normal and Entry user profiles, it is not available the ActionForce Logout
command.
(15) For the Entry user profile, it is not possible to set/modify the parameters.
(16) The ActionMap Structure Rebuild command is available only for the user with
Superuser profile.
The CommandsSNMP Command Executor command is available only for the users
with Superuser, Privileged and Advanced profiles.
Then, for the profile:
Superuser, the information, present into the window, refers to all the NEs of all the
Privileged, Advanced, Normal, Entry, the operations refer only to the NEs of their
own map.
(17) The activation of the Delete Table box is available only for the user with Superuser profile.
383
20.
384
21
21.
MENUS AND COMMANDS (SIAE

AND HP OPENVIEW)
The following tables point out the available options present into the Siae World map window and
into all the map windows of the NMS5UX system.
The options relevant to the features provided by the supervisory system of Siae microelettronica
(identified by the wording SIAE before the name of the command) are pointed out through bold
characters.
The menus and the options that are not specifically relevant to the NMS5UX system, but that
are created by the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform are not pointed out through
bold characters.
The menus and the options present into the map winow are not always available for the user.
The availability of such elements depends on the profile of the NMS5UX user (Superuser,
Privileged, etc.) who has opened the map. Tables specifie for each menu/option the necessary
user profile in such a way that the option is present into the map window. With details, into the
User column, the system can display the following wordings:
S, it points out that the option is available for the user with Superuser level.
P, it points out that the option is available for the user with Privileged level.
A, it points out that the option is available for the user with Advanced level.
N, it points out that the option is available for the user with Normal level.
E, it points out that the option is available for the user with Entry level.
Warning. The menus/options pointed out into Tab. 21.1 refer to the NMS5UX system
release 6.4 and to the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform release 6.2.
The menus/options pointed out into Tab. 21.2 refer to the NMS5UX system release 6.4
and to the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform release 7.5.
The menus/options pointed out into Tab. 21.1 and Tab. 21.2 are the DEFAULT options present
at the installation of the NMS5UX 6.4 system. Such elements can be different from the ones
present into your own map windows because the NMS5UX system is provided with some
optional options and the options/menus of the HP OpenView graphical platform can be
reconfigured 174.
174.
For the reconfiguration of the HP OpenView menus/options, refer to the specific documentation.
385
21.
MENUS AND COMMANDS (SIAE AND HP OPENVIEW)
Tab. 21.1
Menus and commands NMS5UX 6.4 and HP OpenView 6.2
Map
User
New
Open
Refresh
SPANE
Save As
SIAE Map
Import/Export
SPA
Change Map
SP
Import
Export
Delete
Properties
Print Window
SPANE
Submap
New
Open
Delete
Delete This Submap
Set This Submap As Home
Make This Submap Persistent
Properties
Close
Snapshot
New
Open
Delete
Properties
Close
Edit
Exit
SPANE
Add Object
SPANE
Add Connection
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
From This Submap
SPANE
From All Submaps

Selected Objects List
SPANE
Find
SPANE
Submap
Object By Selection Name
386
21.

Edit
Find
User
SPANE
Object By Attribute
Object By Comment
Object By Status
Object By Symbol Type
Object By Label
SIAE Objects
Add
Container
SPA
Network Element SNMP Managed

Network Element SNMP Managed (Virtual)
Network Element Legacy Protocol Managed (1)
Network Element Legacy Protocol Managed (Virtual) (1)
LegacyWorkstation (1)
Modify/View
Container
Network Element
N E (3)
S P A (4)

Delete
Container
SPA
Network Element
Arrange
Symbol
Add To Quick
Navigator
SPANE
Vertical alignment
Map Realignment
SP
SPANE
Add This Submap
SPANE
Add Selected Objects

S
Manage Objects
Unmanage Objects
Object Properties
View
Highlights
Select Highlighted
SPANE
Clear Highlighted
Hidden Objects
Hide Selected From This Submap
SPANE
Hide Selected From All Submaps
387
21.

View
Hidden Objects
Show Hidden On This Submap
User
SPANE
Show Hidden On All Submaps

Toolbar
On For All Submaps
SPANE
Off For All Submaps

Pan and Zoom
User Plane
SPANE
On For This Submap
SPANE
Off For This Submap

On For All Submaps
Off For All Submaps
Automatic Layout
On For This Submap
SPANE
Off For This Submap

On For All Submaps
Off For All Submaps
Submap Overlay
On For This Submap
SPANE
Off For This Submap

On For All Submaps
Off For All Submaps
Show Connection
Labels
On For This Submap
SPANE
Off For This Submap

On For All Submaps
Off For All Submaps
Window Geometry
Save For This Submap
SPANE
Save For All Open Submaps

Clear For This Submap
Clear For All Open Submaps
Redo Layout
Performance
SIAE
Performance
SPANE
SPANE
Configuration
388
SPAN
Network Polling Statistics
System Performance: Start GlancePlus
SIAE Objects
Equipment Info
S P A N E (5)
Radio Certificate
S P A N E (6)
SPANE
SPANE
21.

Configuration
SIAE Objects
Faults
Alarms
Network
Connectivity
S P A N E (7)
SPANE
SPANE
Poll Node
Ping
SPANE
Trace Route
Test IP/TCP/SNMP
SIAE Logs
Tools
User
SPANE
S P A N E (8)
SPANE
Old Alarm History
SPANE
NE Alarm History
S P A N E (8)
NE Current Alarms
SPANE
SNMPNE History Log
S P A N E (9)
Alarm Summary
SPANE
Nms5ux Statistics
SPANE
Transaction Log
S P A N E (10)
(11)
NMS5UX Inspect (2)
Report Presenter
Terminal
Telnet (hpterm)
Connection
Telnet (xterm)
Unused IP Addresses
HP OpenView Launcher
Data Warehouse
Export Topology
Export Events
Export Trend Data
Node View
CDP View
Neighbor View
SNMP MIB Browser
Views
OSPF Backbone
All VLANs
Options
Report Configuration
SNMP Configuration
Event Configuration
Data Collection & Thresholds: SNMP
MIB Application Builder: SNMP
389
21.
User
Load/Unload MIBs: SNMP

Options
Network Polling Configuration: IP
SIAE Options

SPAN
NMS5UX System Users
S P A N E (12)
NMS5UX Logged Users
S P A N E (13)
SP
S P A N E (14)
S P A N E (15)
SPAN

SPAN
HW Inventory
Window
License Password
SPANE
Root
SPANE
Home
Parent
Quick Navigator
Locate
Misc
SIAE Elements
SIAE Tools
S P A N E (16)
SPANE
Equipment Find
SPANE
SPA
SP
SP
Pm Backup
S P A (17)
Pm Restore
SP
Pm Delete
PDHSDH
Radio
Scoreboards (2)
390
SP
SPANE
SPANE
Map Manager Status
SPANE
SPA
Database Backup
Database Restore
21.

SIAE Com- Line Test
mands
Network Element
SIAE Com- Connect

mands
Network Element
Disconnect
User
SPANE
Container
SPANE
Container
Network Element
SPANE
Container
SPAN
Legacy
Reset & Connect
(1)
Network Element (1)
SPANE
Alarm
Realignment
Network Element
Configuration
Upload
Network Element
Container (1)
SPANE
Container
SPANE
Container
SPAN
Communication
Server Board
Connect
SPANE
Legacy
Workstation (1)
Connect (1)
Legacy
Communication
Server Port ((1))
Open (1)
Disconnect
SPANE
Disconnect (1)
SPANE
View (1)
Close (1)
Legacy
Workstation Port
((1))
Open (1)
SPANE
View (1)
Close (1)
SPAN
NMS6UX (2)
Help
SPANE
Display Legend
Online Manuals
SPANE
Welcome to NNM
SPANE
Managing Your Network

Scalability And Distribution
Reporting and Data Analysis
Creating and Using Registration Files
Installation Guide
Application Style Guide
Integration Concepts
OVW Developers Guide
391
21.
User
SNMP Developers Guide

A Guide for Java Developers
Help
Mouse and Keyboard
SPANE
On Window
SPANE
NMS5UX
Attenzione. Lelenco dei manuali in linea disponibili, varia in S P A N E

base al tipo di apparati che possono essere gestiti dal proprio
sistema NMS5UX.
Using Help
NNM
SPANE
Overview
SPANE
Tasks
Home Page
Patches and Updates
Release Notes
Whats New with NNM
Extended Topology Release Notes
About NNM
Misc
Tasks
SPANE
Functions
HP OpenView
On the Web
392
OpenView Home
SPANE
Online Support
Developer Release Notes
SPANE
About HP OpenView
SPANE
About NMS5UX
21.
Tab. 21.2
Map
User
New
Open
Refresh
SPANE
Save As
SIAE Map
Import/Export
SPA
Change Map
SP
Import
Export
Delete
Properties
Print Window
SPANE
Submap
New
Open
Delete
Delete This Submap
Set This Submap As Home
Make This Submap Persistent
Properties
Close
Snapshot
New
Open
Delete
Properties
Close
Edit
Exit
SPANE
Add Object
SPANE
Add Connection
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
From This Submap
SPANE
From All Submaps

Selected Objects List
Find
SPANE
Submap
SPANE
Object By Selection Name
393
21.

Edit
Find
User
SPANE
Object By Attribute
Object By Comment
Object By Status
Object By Symbol Type
Object By Label
SIAE Objects
Add
SPA
Container
Network Element SNMP Managed
Network Element SNMP Managed (Virtual)
Network Element Legacy Protocol
Managed (1)
Network Element Legacy Protocol
Managed (Virtual) (1)
Modify/View
N E (3)
S P A (4)
Container
Network Element
Delete
SPA
Container
Network Element
Arrange
Symbol
Add To Quick
Navigator
View
SPANE
Vertical alignment
Map Realignment
SP
SPANE
Add This Submap
SPANE
Add Selected Objects
SPANE
Manage Objects
Unmanage Objects
Object Properties
Highlights
Select Highlighted
SPANE
Clear Highlighted
Hidden Objects
394
Hide Selected From This Submap
SPANE
21.

View
Hidden Objects
Hide Selected From All Submaps
User
SPANE
Show Hidden On This Submap

Show Hidden On All Submaps
Toolbar
On For All Submaps
SPANE
Off For All Submaps

Pan and Zoom
User Plane
SPANE
On For This Submap
SPANE
Off For This Submap

On For All Submaps
Off For All Submaps
Automatic Layout
On For This Submap
SPANE
Off For This Submap

On For All Submaps
Off For All Submaps
Submap Overlay
On For This Submap
SPANE
Off For This Submap

On For All Submaps
Off For All Submaps
Show
Labels
Connection
On For This Submap
SPANE
Off For This Submap

On For All Submaps
Off For All Submaps
Window Geometry
Save For This Submap
SPANE
Save For All Open Submaps

Clear For This Submap
Clear For All Open Submaps
Redo Layout
Performance
SIAE Performance
SPANE
SPANE
Configuration
SPAN
Network Polling Statistics
SIAE Objects
Equipment Info
S P A N E (5)
Radio Certificate
S P A N E (6)
SPANE
SPANE
395
21.

Configuration
SIAE Objects
Faults
Network Connectivity
S P A N E (7)
SPANE
APA Status Poll Node
Poll Node
Ping
SPANE
Trace Route
Alarms
SPANE
Test IP/TCP/SNMP
SPANE
SIAE Logs
Tools
User
S P A N E (8)
SPANE
Old Alarm History
SPANE
NE Alarm History
S P A N E (8)
NE Current Alarms
SPANE
SNMPNE History Log
S P A N E (9)
Alarm Summary
SPANE
Transaction Log
S P A N E (10)
(11)
NMS5UX Inspect (2)
Report Presenter
Terminal Connection Telnet (hpterm)
Unused IP Addresses
HP OpenView Launcher
Data Warehouse
Export Topology
Export Events
Export Trend Data
Options
SNMP MIB Browser
Views: Home Base
Report Configuration
SNMP Configuration
Event Configuration
Data Collection & Thresholds: SNMP
MIB Application Builder: SNMP
Load/Unload MIBs: SNMP
Network Polling Configuration: IP
SIAE Options
396
SPAN
21.

Options
Window
SIAE Options
User
NMS5UX System Users
S P A N E (12)
NMS5UX Logged Users
S P A N E (13)
SP
S P A N E (14)
S P A N E (15)
SPAN
SPAN
SPAN
SPAN
SPAN
HW Inventory
SPAN
License Password
SPANE
Root
SPANE
Home
Parent
Quick Navigator
Locate
Misc
SIAE Elements
SIAE Tools
S P A N E (16)
SPANE
Equipment Find
SPANE
SPA
SP
SP
Pm Backup
S P A (17)
Pm Restore
SP
Pm Delete
SP
PDHSDH
Radio
Scoreboards (2)
SIAE
Commands
Line Test
SPANE
SPANE
Map Manager Status
SPANE
SPA
Database Backup
Database Restore
Network Element
SPANE
Container
Connect
Network Element
SPANE
Container
Disconnect
Network Element
SPANE
397
21.
User
Container
SIAE
Commands
SPAN
Legacy
Reset & Connect (1)
Network Element (1)
SPANE
Alarm Realignment
Network Element
Container (1)
SPANE
Container
Configuration
Upload
Network Element
SPANE
Container
SPAN
Communication
Server Board
Connect
SPANE
Legacy
Workstation (1)
Connect (1)
Legacy
Communication
Server Port ((1))
Open (1)
Disconnect
SPANE
Disconnect (1)
SPANE
View (1)
Close (1)
Legacy
Workstation Port (1)
Open (1)
SPANE
View (1)
Close (1)
SPAN
NMS6UX (2)
Help
SPANE
Display Legend
Online Manuals
SPANE
Welcome to NNM
SPANE
Managing Your Network

Using Extended Topology
Correlation Composers Guide
Scalability And Distribution
Reporting and Data Analysis
Creating and Using Registration Files
Installation Guide
Integrating HP OpenView Reporter
Mouse and Keyboard
SPANE
On Window
SPANE
NMS5UX
Using Help
398
Warning. The list of the available online manuals change S P A N E

according to the type of equipment that can be managed by
ones NMS5UX system.
SPANE
21.
Help
User
NNM
Overview
SPANE
NNM
Tasks
SPANE
Home Page
SPANE
Patches
Updates
and
Check for Update
SPANE
NNM Patches
Event Correlation Services (ECS) Patches
SNMP Emanate SNMP Agent Patches
Misc
NNM Release Notes
SPANE
About NNM
SPANE
Tasks
SPANE
Functions
HP OpenView
On the Web
OpenView Home
SPANE
Online Support
About HP OpenView
SPANE
About NMS5UX
399
21.
Notes
(2)
OPTIONAL menu/command.
(3)
For the subject user profile/map access, it is possible only to check the data (View
command).
(4)
For the subject user profile/map access, it is possible as to check as to change the data
(View and Modify command).
(5)
Only the user with Privileged and Superuser profile can save the information on file.
(6)
For the Normal and Entry user profiles, it is not available the Save command.
(7)
For the Entry user profile, it is not available the ActionBench Switch command.
(8)
For the Normal and Entry user profiles, it is not possible to delete and to mark the records
(ActionDelete and ActionAcknowledge commands).
(9)
For the Entry user profile, it is possible to check the data.
(10) For the Normal and Entry user profiles, it is not available the ActionDelete Records
command.
(11) For the profile:
Superuser, the operations listed into the window refer to all the users of all the
Privileged and Advanced, the operations refer only to the users of its own map
(12) For the Privileged, Advanced, Normal and Entry user profiles, it is possible only to change
their own passwords.
(13) The ActionForce Logout and ActionForced Exit commands are available only for the
user with Superuser profile.
(14) For the Normal and Entry user profiles, it is not available the ActionForce Logout
command.
(15) For the Entry user profile, it is not possible to set/modify the parameters.
(16) The ActionMap Structure Rebuild command is available only for the user with
Superuser profile.
The CommandsSNMP Command Executor command is available only for the users
with Superuser, Privileged and Advanced profiles.
Then, for the profile:
Superuser, the information, present into the window, refers to all the NEs of all the
Privileged, Advanced, Normal, Entry, the operations refer only to the NEs of their
own map.
(17) The activation of the Delete Table box is available only for the user with Superuser profile.
400
22
22.
22.1
SW TROUBLE REPORT (RQ961)
TROUBLE REPORT FILLING INSTRUCTIONS (RQ961)
Each report must refer to one single trouble; multiple troubles must be described in different
report.
Required information are the following.
Section 1: General information

D
Object IIt defines if trouble report refers to software product or documentation.
Customer Report Ref. Customer trouble report identification.
Date Trouble report issue date.
Section 2: Customer identification

D
Name Author name and surname.
Company/Dept. Company/department name.
Tel Author telephone number.
Fax Author fax number.
Contract N.. Product contract identification.
Address Company/department address.
To Trouble report distribution list.
401
22.
Section 3: Trouble identification

D
SIAE Product Name SIAE software product identification.
Version Software product version number.
Document type Type of document.
Revision Document revision number.
Volume N. Document volume number.
Page N. Document/volume page number.
Typology Trouble typology:
Critical, if trouble prevents the correct use of a main software product functionality;
Important, if trouble prevents the correct use of a secondary software product

functionality;
Disturbing, if trouble sometimes prevents the correct use of a secondary software

product functionality and it is difficult to reproduce;
Minor, if trouble rarely prevents the correct use of a secondary software product
subfunctionality;
Suggestion, if some software product feature may be improved (i.e. user

interface).
Recurrent It indicates if trouble always raises by stimulating software product with

the same inputs.
Repeatable It indicates if trouble may be reproduced by customer.
Annexes It indicates if, and how many, information are annexed to trouble report.
Title Trouble title.
Description Brief but complete trouble description, including environmental

conditions.
NOTE: this is not the Fault Report Form, to be sent with each repair item.
To send the form to the following address:

SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A.
via Michelangelo Buonarroti, 21
20093 Cologno Monzese Milano
Fax
+ (39) 02 25391585
email siaemi@siaemic.it
402
22.
403
22.
404

Mn00144e - NMS5LX OPERATOR MANUAL PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mn00144e - NMS5LX OPERATOR MANUAL PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NMS5UX

The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.

CHARACTERISTICS OF THE NMS5UX SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SIAE EQUIPMENT MANAGED BY THE NMS5UX SYSTEM

FUNCTIONS OF THE NMS5UX SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NMS5UX GRAPHICAL INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NMS5UX Release 6.4 MN.00144.E 001

2.1.1.2 Siae World map window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ELEMENTS OF THE MAP WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RELATION BETWEEN UNIX USER AND NMS5UX USER . . . . . .

PREDEFINED NMS5UX USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHARACTERISTICS OF A NMS5UX USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ACCESS TO THE MAP (READ WRITE OR READ ONLY) . . . . . .

NMS5UX Release 6.4 MN.00144.E 001

Passage from the Read Only mode to the ReadWrite

STARTUP OF THE GRAPHICAL INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP CDE GRAPHICAL INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP OPENVIEW WINDOWS NNM GRAPHICAL INTERFACE . . .

STARTINGUP OF THE NMS5UX GRAPHICAL INTERFACE . . .

AT THE FIRST STARTINGUP OF THE NMS5UX

GRAPHICAL DISPLAYING OF THE EQUIPMENT NETWORK . .

AVAILABLE OBJECTS FOR THE NETWORK DISPLAYING . . . .

MODES FOR THE OBJECT CREATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EXAMPLES OF NETWORK GRAPHICAL DISPLAYING . . . . . . . .

OPENING OF THE SERIAL PORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NMS5UX Release 6.4 MN.00144.E 001

Opening modes of the serial ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

COMMANDS FOR THE CONNECTION MANAGEMENT . . . . . . .

CONNECTION STATUSES OF THE EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . .

ALARM AND PERFORMANCE MONITORING MANAGEMENT .

NMS5UX Release 6.4 MN.00144.E 001

Activation (and deactivation) of the PM measurements .

MAP SIAE MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EDIT SIAE OBJECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NMS5UX Release 6.4 MN.00144.E 001

GENERATE INFO FOR WEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10. PERFORMANCE SIAE PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1 PERFORMANCE MONITORING READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2 PERFORMANCE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.3 OLD PERFORMANCE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.4 EXPORT PERFORMANCE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.5 VIEW/MODIFY PM STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11. CONFIGURATION SIAE OBJECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NMS5UX Release 6.4 MN.00144.E 001

11.1 EQUIPMENT INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.2 RADIO CERTIFICATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.3 LEGACY HW/SW EDITION INVENTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.4 LEGACY PHYSICAL UNIT INVENTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.5 SNMP SOFTWARE INVENTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.6 LEGACY ALARM AVERAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12. FAULT SIAE LOGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.1 NETWORK ALARM HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NMS5UX Release 6.4 MN.00144.E 001

Refreshing of the information into the Alarm History

12.2 NETWORK CURRENT ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.3 OLD ALARM HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.4 NE ALARM HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.5 NE CURRENT ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.6 SNMP NE HISTORY LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.7 ALARM SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.8 NMS5UX STATISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.9 TRANSACTION LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .